21.3 - C - Part 3 - Electrical Specs

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PALESTINIAN SCHOOL
INDEX
Section
16010
16050
16060
16120
16124
16130
16139
16140
16264
16265
16289
16350
16410
16415
16441
16442
16466
16511
16521
16739
16740
16741
16742
16743
16744
16745
16746
16747
16748
16749
16860
16999
Title
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
CABLE TRAYS
WIRING DEVICES
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TRANSFER SWITCHES
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
BUSDUCTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
VOICE AND DATA NETWORK
FIRE ALARM
FIRE STOPPING
CONSOLE FOR FIRE COMMAND CENTER ROOM
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
IP CCTV SYSTEM
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
MOTOR STARTER
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLS
ELECTRIC MOTORS
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
LIST OF APPROVED AND RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Page No.
E/1
E/17
E/30
E/39
E/46
E/51
E/61
E/65
E/71
E/81
E/89
E/93
E/99
E/103
E/108
E/120
E/131
E/138
E/146
E/152
E/166
E/208
E/234
E/237
E/238
E/244
E/256
E/267
E/271
E/277
E/282
E/294

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
SECTION 16010
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the latest Qatar Construction
Specification and relevant Kahramaa requirements, the Conditions of Contract, the drawings
and other tender contract documents. In case conflict between QCS and these specifications,
the higher standard performance and specifications shall be deemed to be applied.
B.
This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding
Electrical Work. Additional requirements are specified in various sections of Division 16 and
also may be required during the execution work due to project conditions.
C. The requirements of this Section do not supersede or take precedence over any
provision of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and should any
discrepancy become apparent between these requirements and the General Conditions and
Supplementary General
Conditions, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
writing, and the Engineer shall interpret and
decide such matters in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions.
1.02
EXTENT OF WORK
This shall include installation, testing, pre-commissioning, commissioning, snags attendance,
spares, training, O&M manuals, as-built drawings including all labour, material, equipment,
tools, appurtenances, storage, services, temporary work, re-routing of existing services
necessary to complete the work in accordance with these specifications, drawings, BOQ,
circulars, etc.
Work, materials, equipment or services not specifically mentioned in other clauses of these
specifications or elsewhere, or indicated on the drawings but found necessary for the
completion and perfect functioning of the installations must be included in the Contractors
price.
The work shall include also operation of the installations after completion and acceptance
including maintenance and guarantee of the works as described hereinafter.
The work shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the contract drawings and
specifications as well as the standards of the country of origin.
The following builders work shall be considered as part of this work:
i. Concrete foundations for equipment.
ii. All Builders work in connection with fixing brackets support, hangers, anchors,
etc.
iii. Cutting or forming all openings, mortar, chase, etc., in floors, walls and ceilings
required for the installation and making good after.
iv. Excavation and break filling, including compaction of trenches.
v. Painting items of equipment and exposed pipes and supports, including
decorative painting wherever required.
v.
Labeling and identification.
E/1

1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Division 16 of this specification covers the supply and installation of the Electrical
system and services as shown on the design drawings and in this specification.
B.
GENERAL
The works comprised this Contract are the complete Works, all as described in the
Specification and in accordance with the drawings , preliminaries and other Contract
Documents.
The words complete works shall mean not only the major items conveyed by the
Contractor Drawings and Specification, but all incidental sundry items necessary for the
complete execution of the works and for the proper operation of the works.
The Contractor shall allow for working with the Engineer and relevant Government
Departments, including attending meetings at the requests of the Engineer, and for
providing calculations, designs and the like. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining
all necessary Government approvals and consents including providing all necessary
information in its complete and final format suitable for submission purposes, for all
relevant Government approvals and any other consent to be obtained for these Works,
to the Engineers, so that the Engineers can submit this information on behalf of the
Contractor.
C.
HIGH AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
D.
High voltage works shall be as per KM-ENA's Compound agreement.

High Voltage Switchgear & Room is provided at Ground Floor.
HV switchgear will be provided by the local utility company. Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation.
HV Feeder shall be available at boundary limit. The Contractor shall provide cables
from that point onwards up to HV Switchgear and terminate as necessary.
Transformers shall be provided in First Basement. These are dry type cast resin.
415 Main Distribution Boards, alternatively called MV Panels are located in First
Basement. MV Room is facing the Transformer Room. Power is conveyed from
Transformer to MV panels by busducts. Power is distributed to various electric load
centers and equipment, Client is metered accordingly.
Bunds are provided to all electrical and telephone risers including the mechanical
plantroom to prevent damage by local flooding. Bottom of every riser is provided with
leak detection system.
LIGHTING
1.
An integrated ceiling mounted lighting system is considered throughout the

classroom floors using low brightness, high efficiency light fittings. Wiring and
containment serving the light fixtures within the areas will be part of this contract.
2. Lighting the areas, i.e. plant rooms, stores, circulation areas, car park etc. shall
comprise surface or suspended fluorescent light fittings.
3. A central battery emergency lighting system will be provided throughout serving all
means of escape, fire exits, etc. in accordance with local code requirements. Lighting
within critical areas such as fire services plant rooms, MDF and building management
offices to be provided with emergency lighting.
E/2

E.
EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION

1. Substation and MV room earthing in accordance with the latest KM regulations.
2. An Independent clean earth system is provided in main telecommunication room.
3. A lightning protection system using air terminals and down conductors.
4. A transient voltage suppression for low voltage power, control and communication
equipment.
F.
FIRE DETECTION, ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SERVICE

1.
Fully automatic addressable fire alarm system is provided throughout including

smoke and heat detectors, break glass stations, audible and visual alarms, and fire
alarm and repeater panels. The fire alarm and detection will be fully integrated with
other services, fire prevention and extinguishing facilities all in accordance with local
code requirements, and capable of expansion to incorporate monitoring of systems
and/or areas as may be required.
2. An automatic public address announcement and evacuation system is provided
throughout the building, integrated with the fire alarm system with facility for manual
control and input, and music. The system shall have the ability to address each room.
G.
BUILDING MANGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) AND CONTROLS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
A fully addressable, direct digital control (DDC) IP based building management system
(BMS) is provided for the monitoring and automatic control of all building service
systems. The control system will be designed to minimized reliance on any central
control system and will fail safe to a local controls in the event of a system
communications failure. Essential and emergency system will not rely on the BMS for
their control and will provide with hardwire.
The BMS will provide general monitoring and alarm reporting of all ancillary mechanical
and electrical systems including fire, security and transportation systems.
The BMS will be capable of integrating with other systems with high level interface and
will be a minimum of BACnet/Lonmark compliant.
The BMS features will include the ability for future expansion with minimum disruption to
the existing system and permit secure & local. The BMS should also offer an option for
programmed planned maintenance for future consideration.
The base BMS system will incorporate a minimum of 10% spare point capacity equally
shared between analogue and digitals points. LAN and Bus systems to be sized with
30% spare capacity. The LAN will be configured as a loop(s) to enable remote
communication to DDCs etc in the event of a single break with in the loop.
The BMS shall be supported by standalone UPS equipment with each controller fed
from generator to ensure the system remains on line in the event of a power failure.
All incoming and outgoing current breakers shall be motorized type fed from emergency
supply that are required to be operational or generator supply. This shall be achieved
and fully managed at the BMS system. Described in Division 15.
IP CCTV SYSTEMS
An IP based Closed Circuit Television Security System (CCTV) comprising fully

addressable colour, low lux cameras with pan, tilt and zoom controls as appropriate,
monitoring including but not limited to all building entry/exit points, car park and
strategic internal areas, complying with the latest Ministry of Interior Regulations.
The CCTV system shall incorporate a central security monitoring station with
multiplex video presentation, camera control console and multi-track recording
systems with fault indication and printer.
The CCTV system will be supported by UPS equipment and standby generators to
ensure the system remains on line in the event of a power failure.
E/3

I.
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTION
J.
K.
L.
Complete System serving the Client.

The Telecom works shall be carried out accordingly, but not limited to the details
shown in the drawings and requirements in the specifications.
DATA NETWORK
The Complete data network shall be carried out accordingly, but not limited to the
details shown in drawings and requirements in the specification,ie Structured cabling
system with horizontal and vertical cabling, patch panels, patch cords, data racks,
termination blocks and cross connect wires and cables.
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FOR VARIOUS MECHANICAL/OTHER EQUIPMENTS

a. All HVAC Equipments - Electrical
b. All Plumbing Equipments - Electrical
c. All Fire Fighting Equipments - Electrical
d. All Kitchen Equipments - Electrical
e. Lift Equipment
f. Irrigation Equipment
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Reference Standards
The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition,
amendments and supplements of the following regulations and standards, unless
otherwise specified.
a. State of Qatar Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical
Equipments and Air Conditioning Equipment and Air Conditioning Equipment 2nd
Edition March 2010, and all circulars or revisions.
b. Regulation for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the Institute of
Electrical Engineers (IEE Regulations), 17th Edition 2008, including all
subsequent amendments.
c. Regulation for Passenger and Commercial Lifts in Buildings issued by the MEW,
Doha Qatar.
d. Qatar Construction Specifications, issued by Civil Engineering Department of
Ministryof Municipality Affairs and Agriculture.
e. Regulations, specification, guidelines, instruction and circulars dictated or
circulated by Q-Tel for Telephone installation.
f. Regulations, specifications, guidelines, instructions and circulars dictated or
circulated by the Civil
Defense Department for fire and safely requirements.
g. Regulations, specifications and guidelines and circulars dictated or circulated by
Environments; Protection Authority, Qatar.
h. Regulations, specifications and guidelines and circulars dictated or circulated by
Ministry of Interior for Security System.
2. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following:

1) ASME American Society of Engineers.
2) Underwriters Laboratories
3) ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
E/4

4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
1.05
ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
BS British Standards Institute
DIN Deutsches Institute for Normalisierung
FM Factory Mutual.
ISO International Standardization organization.
CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers
SUBMITTALS
A. Definitions: The required submittals of this division, in addition to the definitions of the
General
Conditions, and elsewhere in the contract documents, are further categorized
for convenience as follows:
1.
Product data shall include manufacturers latest standard printed literature such as
manufacturers installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, roughing diagrams,
wiring diagrams and performance curves on materials, equipment and systems for this
project. Product data shall include references to applicable specification section and
item number. Product data shall be provided in addition to the required shop drawing
submittals.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described

hereinafter.
3. Samples shall include physical examples of materials in complete units for visual
inspection. Samples shall indicate applicable specification section number and item
numbers within that section.
1.06
4.
Certificates shall include statements of applicability, certifying reports from governing and
testing
agencies, industry standards and applicable certificates specified in each
Section of the
specifications.
5.
Test and inspection reports shall include reports specified in each section of the
specifications.
6.
Miscellaneous submittals shall include submittals related directly to the work (nonadministrative) including warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds,
reports, physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field
measurement data and similar information applicable to the work and not processed as
shop drawings, product data, samples or certificates.
7.
No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the required

submittals have been approved.
INTENT
The purpose of the shop drawings and specification is to provide an approach for intended
complete installations, finished, fully adjusted, tested commissioned and put in perfect
operating condition. The spirit as well as the letter of the drawings and specification shall be
followed, and all work shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning of the
drawings and specifications.
1.07
DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS

It is the responsibility of the Contractor, to inform the Engineer of any discrepancies in the
drawings and specifications before signing the Contract, default of which will make him
responsible for any errors or omissions in the drawings and specifications even though these
have been approved by the Engineer.
E/5

All costs incurred by any changes or alterations necessitated by any errors or omissions shall
be on the Contractors own expense without having the right to ask the employer for any
indemnity.
1.08
ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
The Engineer's drawings are generally diagrammatic and include general layouts and typical
details of the various systems to be installed. No deviations from the drawings shall make
without receipt of prior written approval from the Engineer.
The drawings shall not be scaled. The Contractor shall base all measurements both
horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these
established lines and levels. All measurements shall be verified on Site and checked as to
correctness of same as related to the work.
The Contractor shall check all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical drawings in laying out
work for verifying the adequacy of space in which work will be installed. Maximum headroom
and space conditions shall be maintained all points. Where head room or space conditions
appear inadequate the Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installation.
1.09
SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Prior to starting the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed
shop and installation drawings showing to scale dimensions of equipment, pipes, etc. in plan
and elevation with clearances and relation of same to the space assigned. Minimum scale of
shop drawings shall be 1/50.
Where the work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with the work of other
trades, the Contractor shall coordinate space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.
The Contractor shall prepare composite installation drawings and sections to a suitable scale
of not less than 1/50, clearly showing how work will be installed in relation with work of other
trades.
Prior to submissions of the drawings and approximately 30 days after award of the Contract,
The Contractor shall submit lists of all equipment and materials with the names of proposed
manufactures. Lists shall show submission dates. The drawings will not be accepted prior to
submission of such lists. Drawings of interrelated items shall be submitted at approximately
the same time.
Drawings of equipment and material shall include detailed manufacturers drawings, cuts of
catalogues and descriptive literature, showing specifications, type, performance
characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, size arrangements, operating
clearance, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor, and drive and
testing information. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
Catalogues, pamphlets or manufacturers drawings submitted for approval shall be clearly
marked in ink for proper identification of the item being proposed.
Deviations from the specifications and drawings shall be indicated clearly with the reason for
each deviation.
All submissions for approval shall be furnished in three copies and submitted sufficiently in
advance of requirements to allow the Engineer ample time for checking and approving.
Failure of the Contractor to submit the drawing in ample advance time shall not entitle him to
an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be
allowed.
The Engineer shall have 21 days to answer any submittal either shop drawing or material
submittal. Any resubmitted shall entitle the Engineer to an additional of 14 days.
E/6

No equipment or material shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the
contractor has in his possession the approved drawings for the particular equipment or
material.
Approval rendered on drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to
provide equipment and material to meet the performance and quality standards as indicated
on the drawings and as described in the specification or to be of physical size to fit the space
assigned for it.
Material not covered by drawings shall be submitted for approval in letter form giving ratings
and names of manufacturers.
During the progress of the work, drawings shall be submitted as required by the Engineer and
as specified elsewhere in this specification. These drawings shall comprise but not
necessarily be limited to concrete bases for equipment with location of anchors bolts,
manufacturers certified installation drawings and instructions, certified performance
characteristics of equipment, wiring diagrams, control systems, etc.
Where required by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of material
to be used and workmanship proposed. The Contractor shall not use material or
workmanship that does not correspond to the approved samples.
1.10
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

The Contractor shall plan and coordinate the work with all other trades in advance of
requirements and shall provide all necessary resources to ensure compliance with the
construction program. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a set of composite coordination
drawings in plans and sections with minimum scale of 1/50.
The Contractor shall coordinate the space requirements of all other trades involved and shall
be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and adequate clearance in
double partitions, hung ceilings, etc. for the proper installation of the work.
The Contractor shall give full cooperation to all other trades to permit the work of the trades to
be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns,
setting plans and shop details for the proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.
The Contractor shall undertake to make, without extra charge, minor changes and
modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for
proper execution of the work.
Any extra cost incurred due to lack of coordination on the part of the Contractor shall be at his
own expense.
1.11
RECORD DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for record a complete set of as-built drawings
including three sets of soft copies on CAD 2007 and electrical wiring diagrams, in tracing or
other reproducible form reflecting all the changes made from the original drawings during the
progress of the work. The drawings and electrical wiring diagrams shall show all labeled
equipment, valves, controls, instruments and electrical devices.
1.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS, SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS AND LISTS

The Contractor shall supply spare parts for each and every equipment supplied under
Contract.
E/7

The Contractor shall furnish four copies of an instruction manual bound in booklet form
containing the following information:
Brief description of every system and equipment with basic operating features.
Descriptive literature of all equipment and components with manufacturers name, model
number, capacity rating and operating characteristic.
Service manual for every major piece of equipment giving operating and maintenance
instructions, starting and shutdown instructions, lubrication instructions and possible
breakdown and repairs, the service manual shall be prepared specially by the manufacturer
for the particular equipment.
Manufacturers list of recommended spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit prices.
Detailed and simplified one line, color coded flow diagrams of every system with tag number,
location and function of each valve and instrument.
The instruction manual shall be submitted in draft form to the Engineer for his review and
approval as to the fulfillment of the specified requirements prior to final issue.
The instruction manual shall be submitted to the Engineer at least four weeks in advance of
the complete date of the system to be available for the final inspection prior to acceptance of
the respective systems.
1.13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver products to the project properly identified with name, model number, types, grades,
compliance labels and other information needed for identification.
1.14
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP

All equipment and material provided by the Contractor shall be new, free from defects and of
the same type, standard and quality as set forth in the specification.
Equipment and material of similar application shall be of the same manufacturer unless
All workmanship shall be of the highest standards of the industry, of accepted engineering
practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Poor workmanship shall be rejected
and the work reinstalled when in the judgment of the Engineer, the workmanship is not of the
highest quality.
1.15
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

Reference in the drawings and specifications to any equipment or material by name, make or
catalogue number, as well as any list of approved manufacturers, shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality and performance and shall not in any way be construed as
an intention to eliminate the products of other manufacturers and suppliers having approved
equivalent products.
Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his equipment as
equal to those specified. After award of Contract and before start of construction, the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a complete summary of proposed
equivalent to be furnished indicating service, manufacturer, figure number, type and pressure
rating.
The Tender shall be based on the trade name and catalogue reference named in the
specification and products of the approved manufacturers. Should the Contractor wish to use
E/8

any equipment, material or products other than those specified, he should so state as an
alternative to the Tender, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what difference, if
any, will be made to the Contract, price and detailing all differences entailed by the
substitution.
All the times the Engineer shall be the only judge of equality between the proposed
alternative and the item specified. No alternative shall be implemented without the written
approval of the Engineer.
Where the Contractor proposes to use equipment other than that specified or indicated which
requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part
of the works, all such redesign, new drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by the
Contractor at his own expense. All additional costs resulting from such substitution if
approved by the Engineer in writing shall be paid by the Contractor.
Where such approved substitution requires a different quantity or arrangement of piping,
wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or shown on the drawings, the Contractor
shall provide all such piping, structural supports, installation, controllers, motors, starters,
electrical wiring and conduits and any other additional equipment required by the system, at
no additional cost to the Employer.
1.16
PROTECTION
The Contractor shall order all equipment from the manufacturer specifying adequate packing
for export at the factory to avoid damage during shipment to the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage and the adequate protection of all
material and equipment until finally installed, tested and accepted.
He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage and shall carefully store material and
equipment received on Site in their original crates or containers until they are installed. Any
equipment containing components sensitive to high ambient temperature must be stored in
an air conditioned storage area. This responsibility shall embrace any delay pending final
testing of systems and equipment due to any condition.
The Contractor shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during
construction and storage to prevent entry of obstructing material.
The Contractor shall coordinate the protection of the work of all trades and shall be liable for
any damage sustained to other trades resulting from his work.
If any equipment is damaged during shipment be before it is tested and accepted, the
Contractor shall replace or repair the equipment depending on the extent of damage and as
determined and decided by the Engineer, on the Contractors own account and without
additional cost to the Employer.
1.17
ACCESSIBILITY
Contractor shall be responsible for determining in advance of purchase that equipment and
materials proposed for installation shall fit into the confines indicated areas, allowing
adequate space for maintenance.
All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and
repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, after the written
Concealed valves and devices shall be grouped together in as practical a way as possible in
order to be accessible through access doors.
E/9

1.18
ACCESS DOORS
The Contractor shall arrange for access doors and frames to be provided for easy access to
concealed equipment, components, pull boxes and devices that require operation, inspection
or maintenance.
However, the dimensions and locations of access doors shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall have the approval of the Engineer before the work is installed.
Requirements of access doors shall be submitted in sufficient advance time to be installed in
the normal course of the work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct identification of access doors by means of
buttons, tabs or markers to indicate the location of concealed work. The method and
schedule for identification of access doors shall be approved by the Engineer.
1.19
NAMEPLATES
1.20
Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a

permanent manner to the equipment at the factory, a certified nameplate on which shall be
printed or stamped clearly the name and address of the manufacturer, the equipment model
number, serial number, date of manufacture, Electrical characteristics, performance rating,
temperature or other limitations and all other pertinent data as deemed necessary by the
manufacturer for any future reference to the equipmen
LABELING
The Contractor shall label and identify all equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices,
switchgear, etc. as to duty, service or function.
Labels on equipment shall generally be of laminated bakelite with black surface and white
core unless approved otherwise, with incised lettering nomenclature written in English.
Labels shall be attached to equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, etc. or to
adjacent permanent surfaces, in an approved permanent manner.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval prior to installation a schedule of
all equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested nomenclature.
Controls and electrical devices shall be labeled to indicate clearly which equipment they
control.
1.21
GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
All works are to be guaranteed for a period of two years as minimum, and as reflected to
each specific sections of the specification shall prevail dated from the final acceptance of the
work by the Owner.
Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an additional one year
guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment, date of
beginning of warranty or bond, duration of warranty or bond, and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers and procedures for filling a claim and obtaining warranty services.
The guarantee is to cover perfect electrical and mechanical operation of systems, acceptable
noise and vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water, and perfect
attainment of performance within specified design conditions.
E/10

If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part of a
system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions
corrected as directed by the Engineer.
If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the guarantee
period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the original guarantee
period.
During the guarantee period, provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper operation
and to provide regular and preventive maintenance for equipment and controls, on a
continuous 24 hour basis.
Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system.
Provide Owner with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a check
list and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended and
has been properly maintained as recommended by manufacturer.
Check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed.
Spare parts for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be provided Free of cost
by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions at the job site where Electrical Work is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. The Engineers drawings issued with these specifications show the approximate
Location of mechanical apparatus, the exact locations are subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems,
materials and equipment. Comply with the following requirements.
B. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment and material installation with other
building components.
C. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
D. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
F. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
E/11

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, material,
and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
I.
Install systems materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination
drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents,
recognizing that
portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the
Engineer.
J.
Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel; and
perpendicular to the other building systems and components, where installed
exposed in finished spaces.
K. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
L. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
M. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
N. Painting
1. Follow manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation and application
procedures for paints and finishes.
2. Thoroughly clean surfaces requiring prime painting of rust, loose scale, oil,
grease and dirt by the use of wire brushes, solvent and other required means.
3. Do not paint on damp or frosty surfaces or during wet, foggy or freezing
weather.
4. Spread and brush paint evenly to eliminate drips, runs or sagging.
5. Fill voids, open or hollow places and irregularities with compound.
6. Thoroughly clean and retouch damaged or dirtied shop coat surfaces.
7. Do not paint controls, nameplates or labels.
8. Paint thickness is measured when dry.
9. Machinery: Before shipment, paint all equipment that require painting with the
manufacturers standard shop prime coat.
10. Supports and Brackets
a. Prime coat steel and cast iron supports. Apply prime coat in accordance with
manufactures specifications. Do not prime galvanized metals.
b. Decorative painting to match the colour of the adjacent services /Finishes to be
done.
O. Cutting and Patching
1. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
Documents. In addition to the requirements specified, the following
requirements apply:
a. Perform cutting, fitting and patching of equipment and materials required to :
E/12

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.
Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

Remove and replace defective Work.
Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the
Contract Documents.
Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work
to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.
Cut remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, component

and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical
items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new work.
3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated
or scheduled to be removed.
4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the
spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect
adjacent installations.
6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials
matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications
refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building
components being patched.
8. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified
for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications refer to
the materials and methods required for the surface and building components
being patched.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests
1. Perform tests on individual equipment, systems and controls in the presence of
the Representatives of the Employer, Engineer and such other parties as may have
legal jurisdiction.
2. Supply labor, materials, properly calibrated instruments, power, etc., required for
testing, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Before conducting any tests on system or equipment, thoroughly clean the
associated systems or quipment just prior to testing.
4. Test equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons
during the appropriate seasons. Where the equipment or system under test is
interrelated with and depends upon other equipment, systems, and/or controls
for proper operation, functioning and performance, operate the latter
simultaneously with the equipment or system under test.
5. The duration of tests shall be as determined by authorities having jurisdiction,
but in no case less than the time prescribed in each section of the
specifications.
E/13

6.
Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular
system and components parts thereof receive the approval for the Engineer.
Replace any damages resulting from tests, as directed by the Engineer.
7. Submit test records on reproducible sheets to the Engineer for approval and
include approved copy in the instruction Manual. The Engineer shall approve
the format of the record sheet prior to actual testing of equipment.
8. During tests of equipment and systems, fully instruct the Employers
representative on the operation and maintenance of the equipment and
systems. This period is in addition to any required special instruction, elsewhere
specified.
B. Third Party Inspection
1.
All Electromechanical systems and equipments should be inspected, witnessed,

commissioned, and certified by a third party qualified testing and commissioning
authority.
2. Life and safety systems should only be inspected and certified by a QCDD approved
third party agency.
C. Final Inspection
1. At final inspection, it is essential that certain trades be properly represented including
the following:
a. Electrical Contractor including people thoroughly familiar with the project, its
intent, equipment and system installation and operation.
b. Dynamic rotating machinery and specialist systems equipment manufacturer and
system installer.
c. The automatic control manufacturer representatives familiar with the installation
who can demonstrate to the Employers satisfaction that the controls perform
according to the specified requirements.
d. The Mechanical Contractors, representatives familiar with the installations wiring
and interlocking.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the actual operation of equipment and controls
prior to final inspection
3.05
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING -GENERAL

A. Thoroughly clean any apparatus before placing in operation. Restore finished
surfaces if damaged and deliver the entire installation in an approved condition.
B. Adjust and balance systems to operate as shown and specified.
3.06
INSERTS AND SLEEVES

A. Inserts in concrete for supports are to be provided.
B. Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place,
in advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary
to complete the Work.
C. Cable Sleeves: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, pipe sleeves are to be as
follows:
E/14

1.
General floor sleeves are to be standard weight PVC with bottom and flush with
surface, calked with glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic.
Top end is to extend 25 mm above floor level in electrical and plant rooms. Top
end of sleeves is to be flush with finished floor surface in finished rooms.
3. Sleeves in Foundation Walls: HDPE or Standard weight galvanized steel

fabricated sleeves with puddle flange, flush inside and outside, calked water tight.
3.
Sleeves in Concrete Walls: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall
surface at both ends, calked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl
mastic.
4. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings: UPVC or LDPE.

5.
Sleeves for cables and services trunking are to be approximately 30 mm larger than
passing through.
5. Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves-Galvanized Pipe: Annular space between pipe
and sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated
sealant. Refer to Fire stopping in
Division 16.
3.07
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES

A. Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for the installation of all utility services
and underground cabling within the building, and to points of connection with exterior
underground utilities outside of the building, are to be performed by each trade for its
work as specified.
B. Excavate to the required depths and grade. Rock or existing concrete, where
encountered, are to be excavated to a minimum depth of 150 mm below the bottom
of cable. Where mud or otherwise unstable soil is encountered in the bottom of the
trench which is incapable of supporting the cables or utility lines, such soil is to be
removed to firm bearing and the trench is to be backfilled with sand to the proper grade
and tamped to provide uniformly firm support.
3.08
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO

FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of equipment and materials
during delivery, storage, installation up to testing and commissioning and shutdown
conditions. This responsibility shall include provisions required to meet the conditions
incidental to the delays pending final test of systems and equipment
under seasonal conditions.
B.
Operate the completed systems for a period of time prescribed by the Engineer to
determinate the capability of the equipment and controls to conform to the
requirements of the drawings and specifications.
C. Guarantee period for works shall be two years from the date of issuance of handing
over certificate, unless otherwise stated to be more in relevant section of the
specification.
D. Make final operating tests with systems in simultaneous operation and building in
normal operating modes.
3.09
TRAINING
E/15

A. The Contractor shall instruct and train the Owners designated personnel in the operation
and maintenance of every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems with
emphasis on proper startup and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and
lubrication procedures with recommended services, overhaul and maintenance methods,
adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, use of special tools and safe
practices.
The duration of training shall be for a total period of ninety working days, eight hours
a day up to the complete satisfaction of the end users.
This period shall follow the final inspection date and shall not necessarily consist of a
single series of consecutive days. Apportion time between summer, winter, and
intermediate operating seasons as mutually agreed.
-
Details of training: Comprising Training manuals from original manufacturer to be

submitted and approved by the Client well in advance.
Training shall be classroom and site based.
Training to be different for different grade of employees, i.e. supervisor, technician,
engineer level, etc.
B. All expenses for training Owners personnel shall be at Contractors own cost.
C. Commencement date of training shall be subject to the Owner approval.
END OF SECTION 16010
E/16

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 16050
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of
Contract and Divisions 1 and 5 of Specifications, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:

1. General provisions applicable to Division 16 work and other Sections of the
Specification that refer to this Section.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Covers, brackets and supports.
5. Electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7. Electrical demolition.
8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
9. Touchup painting.
B.
1.3
Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation,

testing and commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and
materials shown on the Drawings and/or described in the Specification
together with all associated ancillary work, support work and builder's work in
connection.
REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

A.
Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of
the Qatar General Electricity and Water Regulations and regulation for the
Electrical and Installation, latest Edition as issued by the Institution of Electrical
Engineers, UK where not in contradiction with the local codes of practice and
regulations.
B.
Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in

which material or construction methods called for is less than minimum
requirement of the Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in writing.
Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and perform the work
as though called for to minimum code standards.
C.
Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be

manufactured and installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations
of the following or other equal and approved standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
BS: The British Standards Institute

IEC: The International Electro-technical Commission
ISO: The International Standardization Organization
CCITT: The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative
Committee
5. CCIR: The International Radio Consultative Committee
6. CISPR: The International Special Committee on Radio Interference
E/17

D.
1.4
Local standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over
the Standards.
POWER SUPPLY
A.
The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection
at 11,000V to the location shown on the Drawings.
B.
Power Supply: Liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm:

1. Characteristics of supply and system earthing.
2. Location of incoming supply shown on the Drawings.
3. Space requirements and associated builder's work for the Authority's
installations.
4. Make necessary arrangements at the earliest opportunity to ensure
connection as and when required, and inform the Engineer in the event of
any foreseen delay.
C.
kWH-metering: Liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a
complete kWH-metering installation.
D.
kWH-metering will be at low voltage as shown on the Drawings.
E.
Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:

1. Medium voltage: 11 kV, 3 phase, 3 wire.
2. Low voltage: 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed neutral.
3. Frequency: 50 Hz.
F.
1.5
Distribution systems are to be supplied or derived from the voltage system

previously described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
TELEPHONE PUBLIC EXCHANGE LINES

A.
The Local Telephone Authority (QTEL) will bring telephone public exchange
lines into the premises to the location shown on the Drawings and/or to be
agreed with the Authority. Liaise with the Local Telephone Authority to confirm
location of connection of public telephone exchange lines into the premises.
During execution at the Owners request Local Telephone Authority could be in
valve in bulk wiring cabling and installation of cabinet and termination. In such
situation the Contractor shall provide access to the premises without delay and
interruption of other works.
1.6
EQUIPMENT
A.
Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating

and cooling arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and
rooms are suitable for installation, operation and maintenance of proposed
equipment. Note any discrepancies on the shop and construction drawings.
B.
Equipment is to be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously

described, unless otherwise specified. Special provisions are to be made for
equipment sensitive to power supply frequency and voltage variations and for
equipment operated at other voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.
E/18

1.7
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A.
Equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays, lighting fixtures,

motors etc., is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble free service
under the Doha climatic conditions.
a. Max Ambient Temp. in shade:
50C (Dry Bulb) in Winter

8C (Dry Bulb) in summer
Sea Level
95% to 98%
160 Kms per hour
North or North-Westerly
Dusty, Sporadic and Irregular
50mm between January and April
Salt ladden and very corrosive
b. Altitude
c. Maximum Relative Humidity
d. Maximum Wind Velocity
e. Prevailing Wind
f. Storms
g. Annual Rainfall
h. Atmosphere
All Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation without deterioration and
breakdown, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week, throughout its normal
rated life except for interruption due routine maintenance.
B.
1.8
1.9
Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required
for particular equipment, they are described in the specification of the
equipment concerned.
DRAWINGS
A.
Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations

and general layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts
together with dimensions, weights, mounting methods and accessories, where
relevant, are to be shown on Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
B.
Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity

on the Drawings, the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly
wall mounted devices, take up more space on the Drawings than the device
does on the wall.
Because of drafting limitations these locations must be
considered as being indicative rather than exact physical locations of the
devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for convenience of
operation and the proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with
the scaled locations of the symbols. In locating the outlets, follow the criteria
provided on detail Drawings where provided, and coordinate with furniture. Do
not scale from design Drawings.
C.
Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to

defining basic positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual
layouts and details of routing of circuits are to be shown on the Contractor's
shop and construction drawings.
D.
Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical
Work, such as motor control centers/panels, cables to motors and other similar
electrically operated equipment are shown for convenience and reference only.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and

construction drawings and other information required by the Specification,
before ordering equipment or materials and before executing any related work
on site.
B. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment, covers and supports.
E/19

C. Shop and Construction Drawings:
1.
Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricitymetering equipment.

a. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design
requirements are understood by indicating all equipment and material
proposed to be supplied and installed and by detailing fabrication and
installation methods proposed to be used.
Shop and construction
drawings are to clearly state the name and location of the work, the
names of Engineer and Contractor, submission date, cross-references to
the Drawings and Specification and the specific reference number, location,
service and function of each item.
2.
Shop and construction drawings are to be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for

general layout plans, and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for
sections, details, elevations, congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a.
Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades

concerned, showing sleeves and openings for passage through floor
structure.
b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing
locations of cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and
electrical equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other critical
locations
c. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to
clearances, access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and
elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.
d. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate
compliance with Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance,
movement, installation, etc.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
E. Coordination Study: Carry out a short circuit and protection coordination study,
for the electrical distribution network, and submitted to Engineer for approval.
F.
Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original

catalogues or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and
operating criteria of all equipment and materials, together with other
information necessary to satisfy Engineer that proposed equipment and
systems are suitable and adequate.
G. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all

items for which choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, is to be submitted
for approval.
H. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the
project is to be assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized assembler.
Submit the necessary documents to substantiate the above including the
assembler staff training, quality control, etc. The Engineer reserves the right to
reject any local assembler if the information submitted is not sufficient. The
Engineer's rejection in that respect is final and not subject to discussion.
I.
Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test
certificates and reports for equipment and devices. Complete test results are
to be submitted in clearly identified and organized booklets, indicating item of
equipment, make, model, type, date of tests, and type of tests, descriptions
E/20

and procedures. Include in the test reports the Quality Assurance Certification,
the standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to which the
equipment was tested.
J.
Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment is to comply with

the relevant standards recommendations and are to be witnessed by Engineer.
If the manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not complying with the
standards, then independent laboratory tests are to be carried out on
equipment in accordance with the Specification and the Standards, and as
required by Engineer. The Engineer's requirements in that respect are final and
not subject to discussion.
K.
Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare
parts to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each
item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
L.
Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules
of tools and instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and
state against each item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and
delivery to site.
M. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all

equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering,
position and fixing methods of each label indicating its application.
N. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major
items of equipment for which samples cannot be submitted are to be
demonstrated in existing installations or by manufacturer's information, test
certificates and reports.
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.
B. Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.
1.11
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general
construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of
construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work,
other structural components as they are constructed.
and
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment
requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility

companies.
1.
Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering
components.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility
company providing electrical power and other services.
E/21
1.12
D.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are
concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
E.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces,

coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished
surface.
F.
Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical

identification markings and devices, coordinate installation of these items
before ceiling installation.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A.
Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in

the work prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or
materials cease to be available, submit alternative items of equal quality and
type for approval.
B.
Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material

characteristics where required are compatible with the requirements of the
Local Power Authority or other Authorities having jurisdiction and are
acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any modifications necessary to comply
with the Local Power Authority's requirements.
C.
Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment is to be the latest standard product of

the manufacturer.
Component parts are to be the product of a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise approved and provided that components made
by other manufacturers are of a standard design and are interchangeable.
D.
Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the

Specification does not necessarily constitute approval of their standard
products as equal to those specified. Ascertain that listed manufacturers are
able to supply equipment and material in conformity with the Specification.
E.
Factory Assembly: Equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory

assembled units ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for
transportation or other purposes is to be arranged to limit site work to simple
reassembly and inter-wiring of control and power cabling.
F.
Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved

location, under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment
sensitive to heat and humidity is to be kept in climatically conditioned areas
until installed and handed over.
G.
Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable

defective equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed
from service for repair or replacement.
1.
H.
Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by

the manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective
equipment or parts thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials
and workmanship for the period stated in the Specification, starting at substantial
completion. Assign the benefits of such warranty to the Employer.
Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare
parts required by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying,
storing and securing same.
E/22

1.
Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion,
provide sets of tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with
suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
I.
Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices
etc. to indicate duty, service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels
are to have English and Arabic whenever required by the Client. Alternative
methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with noncorrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent surfaces or as
approved by Engineer.
J.
Systems used before substantial completion are to have all consumable

elements, such as lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new, within
7 days prior to the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm
diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel
supports.
D.
Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed,

glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 14-mm diameter holes at a
maximum of 200-mm centers in at least one surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels
and angles.
2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except
metal items may be stainless steel.
2.2
E.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps,

straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall
brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
G.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in
riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as
required suiting individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting
with hot-dip galvanized finish.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each

application category. Use colors prescribed by these Specifications.
E/23

B.
Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size to meet Standards.
1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted,
color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Color: Black letters on orange background.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Selfadhesive vinyl tape, not less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.
D.
Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed,

vinyl tape with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
E.
Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type

with preprinted numbers and letters.
F.
Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and

firmly fixed to equipment at factory. Nameplates are to indicate name and
address of manufacturer, model, serial number, basic characteristics and
ratings of equipment and are to include elementary diagrams etc., all in
accordance with the Standards.
G.
Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type.

scheme.
H.
Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock,

melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm
minimum thickness for signs up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness
for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.
I.
Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamelfinish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend,
and size appropriate to the application.
J.
Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted,

cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing, with
colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 6-mm grommets in
corners for mounting.
K.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or

No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
Colors to suit coding
COVERS FOR TRENCHES

A.
2.4
Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.

Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on
the Drawings, are to be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channelsection frames, suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and finished
with zinc chromate primer and two coats gray enamel.
BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS

A.
Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to
be galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material.
E/24

Plastic inserts and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for
specific light duty installations.
2.5
2.6
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3

Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Equipment Foundations and Bases: Reinforced concrete, as approved by

Engineer after submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and
surface finishes are to be suitable for equipment installed, as shown on the
Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
TOUCHUP PAINT
A.
For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed

equipment finish.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A.
Installations Generally:
1.
Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification

and Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance
requirements, to provide safe and protected systems with equipment
readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
2. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated
and coordinated with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types
specified or recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the
equipment or accessories.
3.2
B.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not

indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the
maximum possible headroom.
C.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular
to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement

of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
with other installations.
E.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required

slope.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, Uchannel system components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
E/25
3.3
C.
Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a

safety factor of at least four; minimum of 90-kg design load.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support

electrical components.
B.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support
raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware
necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or brackettype hangers.
D.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased

by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe

hangers or clamps.
F.
Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed

conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on
raceway terminals.
H.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for
fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure
or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on
opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener
not more than 600 mm from the box.
J.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect

switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other
devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
K.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls
unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway
penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated
floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and
masonry walls.
L.
Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure,
unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following
unless other fastening methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on
solid masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
E/26

5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and
provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for
conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25
percent of its proof-test load.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A.
Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with

operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for

electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the
Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
C.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D.
Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:

1.
Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored

adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely
encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and
floors, at 15-m maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum
intervals in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
3.5
E.
Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source
and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box.
Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.
F.
Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for

exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located
directly above power and communication lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below
finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or
concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall, use a single line marker.
G.
Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe
operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they
connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved
legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
H.
Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red

background with minimum 9-mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on
power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire
E/27

stopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7
Section "Through-Penetration Firestop System."
3.6
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.7
SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR

A.
3.8
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but

not less than 100 mm larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow
supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting
templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use
21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified
in Division Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on
the Drawings or required by equipment design, are to be installed prior to
pouring concrete.
HOLES AND ANCHORS

A.
Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and
in approved positions.
B.
Holes and chases in in situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened
concrete or drill holes larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.
C.
Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete
without prior approval.
D.
Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without

prior approval.
E.
Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:

1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.
2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf
thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
F.
Cutting Masonry:
1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.
2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to
surrounding structure.
3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified
dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set
back to back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
G.
3.9
Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for
ducts etc. which exceed 450-mm width.
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other
surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of trades involved.
E/28

B.
3.10
Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match
adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire
stopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces
by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

A.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Test Employer's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy,

and usability of output data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.11
Supporting devices for electrical components.

Electrical identification.
Electricity-metering components.
Concrete bases.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Touchup painting.
Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied

by the metered feeder.
Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the
"off" condition.
Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to
obtain a measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and
setting that ensure continuous, safe operation.
Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with
actual electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and
sample measurements of supply voltage at the test load connection.
Record
test results.
Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup;
then retest. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of
entire system is verified.
REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A.
Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and
finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and
for timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.12
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that

coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
E/29

GROUNDING AND BONDING
SECTION 16060
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding
materials.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to
provide protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system
arrangement to achieve an earth resistance value: less than 5 ohms, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.3
Transformer neutral earthing

Main earthing terminals or bars
Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment
Extraneous conductive parts
Standby generator neutral earthing
Feeder and branch circuits
Motor and appliance branch circuits
Signal and communication systems
Bonding to the lightning protection system
Earthing requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special

requirements of systems described in other Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and
may be used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".
B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is
conventionally taken as zero.
C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.
D. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live
part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
E.
Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e.
radiators, cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.
F.
Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric
shock and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
E/30

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exposed conductive parts.

Extraneous conductive parts.
Earth electrode(s).
Main earthing terminal or bar(s).
Earthed point of the source(s).
G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance

from one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not
significantly affect the potential of the other(s).
H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of
protective conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing
conductors if any to the means of earthing.
1.4
I.
Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive

parts at a substantially equal potential.
J.
Earthing Conductor: Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of

an installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not
limited to, manufacturers catalogues for each type of product indicated including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Ground rods.
Connecting clamps.
Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
Connectors and other accessories.
Exothermic welding kits and tools.
Earth Pit.
Chemical Compoun.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and
owners, and other information specified or required by Engineer.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used and test conditions.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth
of laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms,
switchgear, distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates
and marking, passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves,
grooves, niches etc., giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
E/31

E. Records: Submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all
components of earthing system.
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used.
F. Samples: Submit samples of conductors, as requested by Engineer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in
installing lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those
indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Standards: Carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC 364-3 and 364-4-41: Electrical Installations in Buildings.
2. Latest edition IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings London.
C. Comply with BS 6651 when interconnecting with lightning protection system or any
revision applied during the Construction phase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A. Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)

Main earthing terminals or bars.
Earthing conductors.
Protective conductors.
Equipotential bonding conductors.
Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems.
Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.
Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried

earthing tape or cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any
season of the year and before interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing
means, not exceeding 5 ohms. Distance between two rods is not to be less than twice
the length of one rod driven depth.
C. Ring type earth electrode is to consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in
exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around
the perimeter of the building foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Connect all
earthing conductors to this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same
material as earthing conductors, are to be located at positions of service entrance and
main switchboard rooms, terminating in bolt-type earth points (studs) or test- links for
connection of main earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring
E/32

are to be provided, as necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to an
acceptable value.
D. Functional earth electrode is to be provided separately from, but interconnected to,
other earth electrode(s) through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth
electrodes are to be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment,
digital processors, computers etc.) as required by the particular Section of the
Specification and recommendation of manufacturer.
E. Main earthing bar is to be provided at the main LV distribution room, and as described
in the Specification or shown on the Drawings.
Connect all earthing conductors,
protective conductors and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide two
insulated main earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing
joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry
maximum earth fault current of system at point of application with final conductor
temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C for at least 5 seconds. Main earthing
conductors are to be minimum 120 mm2 or as otherwise required by the particular
Section of the Specification.
F.
Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main
earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
G. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor
is common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the
largest of the conductor sizes.
1. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54F of IEE Regulations.
H. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like.
Where armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective
conductor, if approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I.
Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one

piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive
parts of equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected
by bolted clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors
which are to be insulated by molded materials.
J.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance: For final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device
on over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds.
For final circuits supplying only fixed
equipment, earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such that
disconnection occurs within 5 seconds.
1. Use appropriate tables and present same for approval by the Engineer (IEE
Regulations: Tables 41A1 and 41A2, Appendix 7 and Regulation 543).
K. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the

building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting,
metallic conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing
terminals by equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding
conductor shall not be less than half of the protective conductor connected to
respective earthing terminal with a minimum of 4-mm2.
L.
Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to
main earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable
between point of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are
E/33

installed, bonding is to be made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of
conductors are not to be less than half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto,
and minimum 6 mm2.
M. Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every
bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with
the Regulations, as follows:
1.
SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.
N. Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of

green-and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as
approved.
O. Identification: Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be
identified along its entire length by continuous black insulation labeled 'neutral earthing'.
2.3
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Buried Earth Conductors: Bare annealed copper strip conductors 25 x 2.5 mm, or
annealed stranded copper conductors 70 mm2 cross-section.
B. Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described in the

Specification for the particular application.
C. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables,
having rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor
forming part of a multi-core cable, color coded.
D. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper
cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article
"General Requirements" hereof.
2.4
E.
Main Earthing Bar: Hard drawn copper, 40 x 4 mm where formed into a closed loop,
and 50 x 6 mm where open-ended. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main Earth Bar' and is to
be drilled, for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be
supplied with copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall mounting insulators.
F.
Testing Joints (Test Links): Copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar
connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating supports.
Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES

A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of
connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
B. Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or
compression type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or
copper silicon alloys.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.5
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rod: 20-mm diameter high strength, with 99.99% pure electrolytic solid copper
conductor. Driving head is to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length
E/34

silicon bronze, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform
layers of copper and strength. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and
bolted connector of sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables
terminated thereto.
1. Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary to obtain required earth
resistance. The electrode shall penetrate at least 1m into summer water table level.
B. Tape Mats: Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of
parallel and perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic
welds to form a grid. Tape is to be 25 x 2.5-mm strip conductor.
C. Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450 mm
internal diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of
earth rod. Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing
conductor. Cover is to have inset brass plate with inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not
Remove'.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING

A. MV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth
bar of each item by bare conductor and the earth-electrode by two insulated earthing
conductors, one at each end of bar, via testing joints. Earthing conductor is to be
minimum 50 mm2.
B. Outdoor ring main units, which are individually mounted, are to be connected to earth
electrode by one insulated earthing conductor, bolted at earthing terminal.
C. LV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth
bar of each item by bare conductor and the earth electrode at two extreme ends by two
insulated earthing conductors through testing joints. Earthing conductor size is to be
minimum 120 mm2.
D. Transformer earthing terminal is to be connected to LV main earthing bar by bare
copper earthing conductor not less than 20 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating,
with a minimum of 35 mm2.
E.
Transformer neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor

(color black) to LV side main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be sized for
maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature not
exceeding 160 deg. C or sized not less than 30 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating,
and with a minimum of 50 mm2. Where a neutral is directly connected to earth
electrode, an insulated disconnecting device is to be provided at the transformer.
F.
Outdoor package substation earthing is to comprise at least four earth rods, each
providing a connection point of an earthing conductor connected to one end of the
earthing bars at MV and LV switchgear sections respectively. The four rods are to be
interconnected together and to the earth electrode.
G. Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the

shortest path. Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod.
3.2
EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS,

INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.
PANELBOARDS,
LIGHTING
Main earthing bar is to be provided in main distribution room and connected to earth
electrode by two insulated conductors (minimum 120 mm2) via testing joints.
E/35

B. Earthing bars of main distribution boards are to be connected, by bare earthing
conductor, directly to main earthing bar at main distribution room and by protective
conductor run with incoming feeder from respective supply point.
C. Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective
conductors run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in
panelboards with respective main distribution board earthing bar.
D. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket
outlet terminal is to be connected.
3.3
E.
Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in

the form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in
panelboard.
F.
Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as
switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth
conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY

A. Main earthing bar or loop is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms, and
connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre
at its earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their
earthing terminals, using 20 x 2 mm bare copper strips or 35 mm2 bare copper
conductor (minimum size) or as required to carry maximum earth fault current for 1
second with final conductor temperature not exceeding 200 deg. C. Conductors are to
be securely fixed, recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate
staples. Earth bar or loop is to be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass
saddles.
B. Main earthing bar or loop is to be connected at two extremely separate points to earth
electrode, directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or
connected to main earth bar by protective conductors.
C. Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective earth
conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or
distribution unit.
3.4
SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

A. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide 16mm2 minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet,
wiring closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 6.4-by-50-by-300-mm grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.5
INSTALLATION
A. Continuity: Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and
mechanically secure.
B.
Earth Rods: While citing earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with
individual rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than
600 mm from foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient
E/36

size is to be drilled before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or
Bentonite or equal filler that will not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.
C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground
surface.
D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing
terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building structure by
approved supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against
mechanical damage and corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable,
are to be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F.
3.6
Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at

threads, contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings
designed to make secure bonds.
CONNECTIONS
A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by
filling with vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper
capping.
B. Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth
connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals
according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
If manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
3.7

A. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and
checked against specified resistance.
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
C. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
D.
Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against
calculated impedance figures.
E. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
E/37

3.8
GRADING AND PLANTING

A.
Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this

Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been
removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas
disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original
condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch.
Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore
disturbed paving as indicated.
E/38

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 16120
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and
signal cables, termination, jointing and splicing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying

capacities, de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and
branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination
between various trades.
Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings
at enclosures.
Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with
final conduit routing.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued
by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test
requirements of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers
qualifications prior to work commencing on site.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E/39

1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install,

splice and terminate low-voltage cables.
B. Standards: Wires and cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved
standards and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are
manufactured. Wires and cables not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by Engineer.
Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers,
wound on factory reels.
B.
Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris,
etc.
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and
cable insulation and sheathing.
Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of
wires/cables is maintained.
1.6
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions
and as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
GENERALLY
A.
Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other
feeders are to have copper conductors. Cable conductors are to be stranded for 4 mm2
and above, based on IEC 228 Class 2. Signal and control cables are to have solid
conductors unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded
conductors. Conductors of single-core cables 25-mm2 and above are to be compacted.
Multi-core cables 35-mm and above is to be sectoral shape.
B.
Conductor sizes are to be metric and as shown on the Drawings.

cross-sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
Conductors with
C. Building wiring insulation is to be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the

Regulations and as follows:
1. Neutral is to be black.
2. Protective earth is to be green or green/yellow striped.
E/40

3. Phase colors are to be consistent throughout the installation; use Red, Yellow,
Blue for the Phases L1, L2, and L3.
D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket
is not color-coded are to have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded
heat-shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables: Cables buried directly in the ground are to be armored type, unless
otherwise indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
2.3
LV WIRES AND CABLES

A. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors,
compacted, generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), suitable for wet locations
and for conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V
grade.
B.
Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors,
compacted, insulated with PVC to IEC 227 (or to BS 6746), flame retardant, moisture
and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C,
laid up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with PVC. Armored cables are to have
single layer of galvanized steel wire armor with PVC over-sheath. Cables are to comply
with IEC 502 and IEC 540.
C. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded,
annealed copper conductors, compacted, insulated with flame retardant, moisture and
heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and
conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C. and PVC over-sheath. Armored cables are to
have taped bedding, single wire aluminum armor and PVC over-sheath.
D. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single core annealed copper
conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid
up and bedded with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation
and PVC over-sheathed, color black. Armored cables are to have single layer of
galvanized steel wire applied helically over extruded PVC bedding (which may be an
integral part of filling) and over-sheathed with PVC, color black. PVC over-sheaths are
to be type ST2 to IEC502.
E. Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted,
insulated with extruded LSF material in compliance with BS 6724 for armored cables
and BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in construction of LSF cables are
to be nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine and bromine). When material is
tested in accordance with BS 6425, Part 1 and IEC Publication 754, Part 1, the acidic
gas evolved during combustion is to be less than 0.5%. When tested in accordance
with BS 2782, method 141D or ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of bedding and
sheathing materials is not to be less than 30.
Completed cable is to meet the
requirements for tests under fire conditions when tested in accordance with BS 4066,
Part 1 and NMV 1.5 of BS 4066 Part 3. Cores and cross sectional area are to be as
shown on the Drawings.
Phases are to be color coded in conformity with the
Standards, and overall cable sheath is to be extruded black LSF material.
F. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. is to be
300/500 V grade to BS 6500, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded copper
wires, EPR insulated, twisted and Sheathed With Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene
(CSP) Compound And With Strengthening Cord.
G. High Temperature Cable - Type MICC: 1000 V grade, annealed solid copper
conductors, embedded in densely compacted mineral insulated, and contained in
E/41

seamless annealed tubular copper sheath for continuous operation at 250 deg. C, and
for short duration at temperatures up to 1000 deg. C, and waterproof. Cable is to be
supplied with standard fittings, terminations etc. by the manufacturer.
H. High Temperature Cable - Solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to BS
6360 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), extruded silicon rubber insulation to BS 6899 (0.6 mm
radial thickness), aluminum/PVC laminate and LSF composite sheath with tinned earth
continuity conductor/drain wire. Cable is to be rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting
voltage surges up to 5 kV, to operate continuously at 150 deg. C and for short duration
at 200 deg. C. It is to be certified to have passed IEC 331 and IEC 332 flame
resistance and fire retardant tests.
I.
2.4
High Temperature Cable (125 deg. C) - TYPE SA: Single conductor, rated for maximum
600 V service, suitable for special applications. Silicone rubber insulated with outer
covering of asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material.
CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES

A.
Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm, 2.5 mm or
stranded 4 mm plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to IEC 227
(PVC type 5 to BS 6746), rated for 85 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores
are to be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material, PVC over-sheathed,
to form compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and generally for
control of power and lighting systems. Armored cable is to have extruded PVC bedding
which may be an integral part of the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and oversheath of PVC type ST2 to IEC 502, color black. Core identification is to be white
printed numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. over black insulation.
B. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, are to be generally
300 V rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm
diameter), twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly is to be covered with
binder tape, spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with
drain wire and overall PVC sheath.
C. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, are to
be insulated for same voltage grade.
2.5
CONNECTORS (LV POWER)

A.
Connector - Type A-1: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 10 mm and smaller. Connector is to be non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or
phenolic insulating covers.
B. Connector - Type A-2: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 16 mm and larger. Connector is to be cast non-ferrous copper
alloy applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with
phenolic insulating cover.
C. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Connector is to be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes receiving wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
E/42

wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is
free of burrs and is dry and clean.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. General: Building wires and cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts
indoors and in conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.
B.
Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring is to be
run inside trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring is to be run in separate conduits from A.C.
wiring, and emergency lighting and power circuits are to be run in separate conduits
from normal circuits.
C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be balanced.
Ensure that the lighting load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more
than 10% between the phases.
D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in
conduit and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
E.
Bunching of wires in raceways is to be in accordance with raceway filling factors

permitted by the Regulations.
F.
Lubricants are to be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise
damage conductors, insulation or jacket.
Lubricants are to be approved by the
Engineer.
G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in
the same raceway.
H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported at
upper end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any
stresses on conductors, where required.
I.
Wiring at Outlets: Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.
J.
Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through is
to be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating
in outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.
K.
Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or

made only in boxes or cabinet gutters.
L.
Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on
conductors 10 mm or smaller, Type A-2 for conductors 16 mm and larger, and Type
B-1 for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
M. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.

N. Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive color, selected as
complementary to cable color coding used in the project.
O. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 16mm are to be tightly twisted and
where possible doubled back before being clamped with set screws. Where two or
more wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to be tightly twisted
E/43

together before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be allowed to
project beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 16
mm and larger are to terminate in tunnel lugs with setscrew, or by using bolted or
sweated compression connectors.
P. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. Tags are to identify cable or circuit number and
conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.
Q. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or
ceiling junction box, each circuit is to be tagged as a guide in making connections.
3.3
FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)

A. Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped
to steel racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be installed in
steel conduits.
B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be fixed
directly to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run
in parallel, they are to be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other
approved special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.
C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved
galvanized cast steel clamps (or molded plastic clamps for single core cables) are to be
used at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables are to be
supplied in lengths sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination
pull.
E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be laid
in heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete,
in masonry or in floor finishing.
F.
Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or
asbestos cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and
protective earth circuits are to be in the same conduit.
G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to
corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables are to be type designed for
particular condition.
H. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
Insulating cover is to be purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level equal
to that of conductor insulation.
I.
Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables are to be purpose made and
suitable for rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
J.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping

material according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K.
Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods."
E/44

3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
B.
Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct
specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and
bonds as applicable.
C. Jointing: Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and
through-joints are to be submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples are to be
constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for test and
inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white
spirit or equal approved.
F.
3.5
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturers torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.

A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
Regulations and Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide insulation testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 500 V insulation test on
installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V.
C.
Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations is to be carried out in

accordance with IEE Regulations 613-5 through 613-8 and 713-04.
D. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohm-km
for PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured
core-core and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
E. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
F. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuit.
G. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning
in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and
then retest to demonstrate compliance.
E/45

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
SECTION 16124
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for
medium-voltage electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.

1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable and
termination supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable markers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying
capacities, de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and, if requested by the Engineer, other accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exact routing layouts, showing coordination between various trades.

Details of supports and fixings for trays and cables.
Details of connections to transformers, switchgear, etc.
Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings
at enclosures.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued
by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, Standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test
requirements of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers
qualifications prior to work commencing on site.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables and accessories certifying that
the products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E/46

I.
Product Test Reports:

Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
J.
Maintenance Data: For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1. Include periodic tests of cables in service.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install,

splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B. Standards:
1.0 Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards, and are to
bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured.
Cables not having this identification will be rejected.
2.0 Kahramaa Specification EP-MS-P4-S3-030 latest version during Construction
Stage.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
1.5

A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels complying with applicable Standard.
B.
1.6
Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather,
fumes, water, debris, etc.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer at least 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
B. Kahramaa Approved Manufacturers.
2.2
11 kV MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use
on systems with voltages between 12 kV and 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and
have the following characteristics:
E/47

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Conductor: Copper, circular, stranded and compacted.

Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 thick.
Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting
material, readily strippable.
Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.
Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact
circular bedding.
Armor: Single layer of round galvanized steel wire.
Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 502.
Embossing: "Electric cable 11000 V".
Short-circuit: 21.7 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 185 mm2 cables, and 40
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
Cables are to be waterblock type if installed in high water tables (in ducts or directly
buried).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways to receive medium-voltage cables for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cables. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for feeder and sub-feeder cable
installation requirements applicable to this Section.
B. Install cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where
necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure
values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,
that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to cable.
E.
Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
G. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 75-mm bed of clean sand at bottom
of trench. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a
minimum of 100 mm of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs,
changes in direction, and buried splices.
H. Install "buried cable" warning tape 305 mm above cables.
I.
In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables
around walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals
adequate to prevent sag.
J.
Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping
material according to Section "Fire Stopping".
E/48

K. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.3
CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING
A.
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
B.
Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct
specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and
bonds as applicable.
C. Jointing: Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to Engineer prior to work

commencing on site. Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary
to cable manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations
and through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing work on
site. Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be
available for test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white
spirit or equal approved.
F.
3.4
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturers torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.

A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
Regulations and Standards.
B.
Test Equipment: Provide insulation testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV

test equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 1000 V insulation tester
settings on installations with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V
insulation tester settings on MV installations (up to 13.8 kV) for initial checks.
Equipment shall be certified and calibrated by Third Party Calibration Institution.
C. Testing: On installation of medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has

been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere
range sufficient to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment
and clear of ground.
2.
MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and
the screen in steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the
A.C. rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum
test voltage. At each step, and for the last 5-15 minutes duration at maximum test
E/49
3.
4.
A.
3.5
voltage, the ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be monitored closely and

recorded. If, except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is
to be stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C.
test voltage for grounded neutral system is to be 2 times rated A.C. rms voltage of
cable.
MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times A.C.
rms rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cable), applied for 5 minutes and until
equipment reading is stable, by an approved A.C. test set. Readings are to be
within same range and in accordance with IEC 502.
Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and
retest.
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer, to prevent entrance of moisture into the cables and to
ensure medium-voltage cables are without damage or deterioration at the time of
E/50

RACEWAYS AND BOXES
SECTION 16130
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related
installations and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, subfeeders, branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and
signal cables.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box
supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers'
catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and
related accessories
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure,
connection of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms, weatherproof
installations outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
C. Samples of each type of raceway, box, and accessory.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trays and fittings are to be
designed, constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical
protection for wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of
products are to be as specified.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction
elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
E/51

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
RIGID HEAVY GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT

A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to CEE 23, BS
4568 Part 1 and BS 31 Class B (threaded), with class 4 protection for rigid steel conduit,
zinc coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or sherardizing.
B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron.
Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Fittings and
components are to comply with CEE 23, BS 4568 Part 2 and BS 31.
C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy hexagonal or
castellated pattern, for fastening.
D. Bushings for terminating conduits are to be smooth rounded brass rings.
E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split
couplings and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the
particular application.
2.3
LIGHT GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT (ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING-EMT)

NOT ACCEPTABLE.
2.4
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT

A.
Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous
length of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside
and outside, and to BS 731.
B. Liquid-tight flexible conduit is to have PVC jacket extruded over core.

C. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated
malleable cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
D. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep
slotted machine screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.
E. Angle connectors of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors are to be as specified for
straight connectors, except that body is to be two-piece with removable upper section.
2.5
RIGID HEAVY GAUGE PVC CONDUIT

A.
Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride with high impact and high temperature
resistance, flame retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to CEE 26, BS 4607 and
BS 6099, DIN 49016 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 423,
614-1 and 614-2-2.
B.
Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded

plastic. Expansion couplings are to be telescoping double tube type, with at least two
inner water-tight neoprene rings.
E/52

C. Assembly: Conduits, boxes and accessories are to be assembled by cementing, using
manufacturer's recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts. Where
no spouts are available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
2.6
FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUIT

A. Material: Flame retardant, heat resistant, non-hygroscopic PVC, high resistance to
impact, ribbed on circumference for flexibility.
2.7
STEEL CONDUIT ACCESSORIES

A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral flanges,
and internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length is to correspond
to wall thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to
within 50 mm of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or
lead, held in place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of
sleeve. Alternatively, sleeves or other equal and approved, with cable or conduit bolted
pressure sealing.
B. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections
with hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
C. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with
end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length is to allow movement within range of joint
and is not to be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with
thick rubber tubing with 5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth
clamp is to electrically connect both sides of joint.
D. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit
telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit is to be fitted with watertight
bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding
jumper with earth clamp is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is
or other equal and approved.
2.8
E.
Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel
conduit terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion
joint. Bonding jumper is to electrically connect both sides of joint.
F.
Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked
enamel finish.
WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING

A.
Components are to include wireway base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall
flanges, panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary
hangers, supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS 4678 Part 1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick,
protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or
cadmium with top coat of enamel.
C. PVC Trunking: high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with grooved
double locking action of the clip-on cover. Design is to be approved by Engineer before
ordering materials. Trunking is to be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers and
demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations
and/or as shown on the Drawings.
E/53

2.9
WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING

A. Type: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking and cover, similar to Simplex, Power
Center type or other equal and approved.
B. Construction: Trunking is to have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets are to be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers are to be secured with galvanized steel holding
screws.
2.10
SKIRTING TRUNKING
A.
Type: Comprising wireway base, snap-on cover, couplings, end plates, wall flanges,
elbows, tees, adapters, if required, and necessary clamps, hangers, supports and
accessories. Wires and cables are to laid from front and held in place by clamps.
B. Steel Skirting Trunking: Sheet steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, protected internally and
externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat of
enamel.
C. UPVC Skirting Trunking: High impact resistant, flame retardant UPVC (unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride) to BS 476 Part 5 and Part 6.
D. Partitions: Trunking is to be partitioned continuously into compartments for separate
circuits.
Size of each compartment is to be determined by size and number of
conductors housed, in accordance with the Regulations and/or as shown on the
Drawings.
E.
2.11
Dimensions: As shown on the Drawings and as required to accommodate specified

wiring devices.
OUTLET BOXES, GENERAL

A. Surface or recessed boxes are to be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system.
Shapes and sizes of boxes are to be of compatible standards as switches and socket
outlets specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures
selected and of various types and mounting methods required.
B. Unused openings in outlet boxes are to be closed with knock-out closers manufactured
for the purpose.
C. Floor outlets and plates are to be water-tight and impact resistant. Floor boxes provided
inside the apartments shall be to the approval of the Interior Designer, similar to Legrand
"650 300" or other approved equal and shall include frames, covers and supporting
accessories.
2.12
METALLIC OUTLET BOXES

A.
Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy
field installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
E/54

C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC
gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion
resistant screws.
D. Flame-Proof Boxes: Malleable iron or cast iron, with gas threaded hubs, special covers
with silicon rubber gaskets, gas tight, and water-tight. Boxes are to comply with the
Regulations for explosive areas.
2.13
MOULDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES

A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge
pressure moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point
not less than 85 deg. C. Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits
and are to be manufacturer's standard for required application.
B. Fittings: Boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting
devices or accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide
additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets are to be
provided for weatherproof installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
CONDUIT, WIREWAYS, AND BOXES, GENERAL

A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring are to be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to
the various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Separate conduits and wireway installations are to be used for medium voltage cables,
low voltage feeders and sub-feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light
and power circuits and communication, signal and other low current systems wiring.
Cables of different voltages are not to be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as
per the regulations.
C. Boxes: Junction, pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity are to be provided as indicated
or required. Boxes are to remain permanently accessible.
D. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent
inserts or lead anchors.
E. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing
for thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required.
Repair damaged
finishings to original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
F. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices".
G. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems are to be
purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
H. Fixing: Conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.
E/55

I.
Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in
accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors
and the space factor as recommended by the regulations. Minimum size of conduit for
all applications is to be 20 mm diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
J.
Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined together and
connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly.
Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective
electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is
required or not.
K. Metal conduits and enclosures are to be mechanically fastened, and to be connected to

electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to form low electrical resistance continuity and firm
mechanical assembly.
L.
Dissimilar Metals: Use of dissimilar metals is to be avoided throughout the system to

eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, treat
surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
M. Miscellaneous fittings such as reduces, chase nipples, 3 piece unions, split couplings
and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular
application are to be installed as necessary.
N. Conduits are to be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel are to be
replaced. Restore conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.
3.3
CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.
Conduits and wireways installations are to be as described below, unless otherwise

shown on the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
B.
Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations comprising
lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system wiring, including
mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and service areas. Use rigid
steel conduit in areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is not
acceptable.
C. Light gauge steel conduit (EMT) is to be used for exposed installations over false
ceilings when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.
D. Light gauge steel conduit (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting.
E. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures is to be fastened by lockouts, and
terminate with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
F. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete, masonry or
underfloor, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular
section of the Specification.
G. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used above false ceilings for lighting and power
circuits, low current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is
not used as return plenum and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC conduits from outlet
boxes to fixtures in conjunction with the use of PVC conduits.
H. Flexible conduit of same material as corresponding conduit system is to be used for
connection to motors, vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment and to fixtures installed
in false ceilings.
E/56

I.
Flexible steel conduit is to be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture
over false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits are to be liquid tight in
damp areas.
J.
Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit is to be used in one or more of the following
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
Exterior location.
Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
Corrosive atmosphere.
Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered to be subject to undue risk of damage by

shock or corrosion is to be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy
tubes may be used in corrosive atmospheres.
L. Crossing: Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.

M. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of
other non- electrical services.
(Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install
horizontal conduit and wireways runs above water and steam piping.
N. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforces
concrete. Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but are to be drilled. Fix
sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.
O. Waterproof Construction: Conduits are not to cross waterproof construction unless
permitted by Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings are to be used.
P.
Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or
wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.
Q. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement
or similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
R. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting are
not to contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
S. Bending is to be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending are to be approved.
T. Cut ends are to be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.
U. Conduits entering cold stores are to be made vapour tight, so that vapour from outside
cannot enter conduit.
V.
Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at
lowest point.
W. Before wiring, conduits are to be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section
of system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation
is completed.
X. Capping: Conduits are to be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.
Y.
Conduit and fittings installed outdoors are to be watertight and highly resistant to
corrosion. Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on
covers and the like.
E/57

Z. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
AA. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment are to
permit bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.
BB. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor is to have sufficient slack to allow for
movement of motor over entire slide rail length.
CC. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and
signal).
DD. Standard elbows are to be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field
bends may be used provided no damage occurs to conduit.
EE. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of
conduit and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the
system.
FF. Non ferrous conduit is to be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
3.4
STEEL CONDUITS
A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not
terminated in a threaded hub, is to be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed
inside and outside enclosure, and terminated with an insulating bushing.
B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece
unions or split couplings.
C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits are to be painted with zinc based
coating resistant to corrosion.
D. Damage to protective coating of conduits is to be repaired to original degree of
protection.
E.
Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based

paint and two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other
equal and approved coating.
F. Galvanized conduit run in screed is to be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.
G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations are to be
coated with two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits are to be covered by at least 600
mm of earth if buried in planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.
H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.
3.5
PVC CONDUITS
A.
Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings are to be made watertight
and permanent using special cement.
B. Termination: Connect conduits terminating in switchgear, fuseboards, trunking,

adaptable boxes or other non-spouted enclosures etc. with smooth bore male PVC
bushes and sockets.
C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings are to be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
E/58

D. Semi-Permanent Adhesive: Use in joints requiring expansion couplers.
E.
3.6
Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending
springs. Conduits over 25 mm are to be hot bent by an approved method.
EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing
steel, between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel.
Fasten conduits to
reinforcing steel by positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete
face. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases
shall be referred to Engineer.
B. Conduits In Partitions or Side Walls: Horizontal or cross runs are to be avoided.
C. Pull-boxes are not to be used. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located
inconspicuously.
D. Conduits in floor of beds on grade: Encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50 mm or to
thickness allowed by architectural detail.
E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or are to be placed in
grooves formed in the concrete, if approved.
3.7
EXPOSED CONDUITS
A. Conduits on walls are to be run neatly, horizontally or vertically.
B.
Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to

expansion sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits is not to be greater

than: Conduit Size
mm
Maximum Spacing of Supports

metres 20 (3/4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.60
4.25
5.00
6.00
3.00 (10)
25 (1)
32-38 (1-1/4 - 1-1/2)
50-63 (2 - 2-1/2)
75 (3) and larger
(12)
(14)
(16)
(20)
D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size
Supports mm
Maximum Spacing of
metres
Conductors Rated
60 deg.C and below
Conductors
Rated more than 60
deg C
1.25 (4)
1.50 (5)
1.80 (6)
2.00 (7)
2.50 (8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
20 (3/4)
25-50 (1 - 2)
63-75 (2-1/2 - 3)
90-125 (3-1/2 - 5)
150 (6)
0.60 (2)
0.75 (2-1/2)
0.90 (3)
1.00 (3-1/2)
1.25 (4)
E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of
each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
E/59

F.
Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall
outlet.
G. Exposed conduit work is to be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.
3.8
CABLE TRUNKING
A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints are
not to overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.
B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings is to have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm
either side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.
C. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long are to have staggered insulated tie-off
studs to support weight of cables.
D. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits is to be by two
channel trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable
retaining straps are to be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front
of trunking are to facilitate drawing-in cables.
E. Coupling: Trunking parts are to be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing
abrasion to wiring.
F.
3.9
Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective
conductor in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS
A. Lay and assemble ducts in accordance with Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and
Utility Structures".
3.10
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
3.11
CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
E/60

CABLE TRAYS
SECTION 16139
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cable trays with cover, cable ladders and related installations and
accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch
circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1.
1.3
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable tray / ladder
supports not specified in this Section.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of cable trays / ladders and related

accessories.
2. Samples of each type of tray / ladder and accessory.
B.
Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1.
Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations,
and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements.
Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods,
splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and
earthing connections.
C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled
cable tray / ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements.
D. Design Calculations: Verify loading capacities for supports.
E. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with related BS Standards.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations.
E/61

1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS (HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED)

A. Components: To include covered cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings),
bends, elbows, tees, couplings and plates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket supports
and other system accessories required for safety and protection of the cable
installations.
B. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety 300%.
C. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after manufacture,
minimum 1.5 mm thick, with sides not less than 45 mm deep, and as shown on
drawings. Fittings are to be same material as tray.
D. Ladders: to be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2mm mild carbon
steel. Ladder side channels are to be minimum 127 x 32 mm, strengthened by
reinforcing inserts for torsional rigidity. Rungs are to be slotted to take cable cleats or
ties and conduit clamps. Rungs are to be minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at
300 mm centers.
E. Galvanizing to be in accordance with BS 729 (335 g/m), applied after fabrication.
F. Bolts and Screws: Cadmium plated or electrolytically galvanized.
G. Coating applied to cable tray or cable ladder is to be applied after priming coat.
H. Sizes: Trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800mm &
wider, and at least 2.4 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder is to be determined by
number and sizes of cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on
the Drawings. Tray or ladder is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for
cables contained within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full
loading capacity.
I.
Earthing connector for plastic coated trays or ladders is to be provided on each

coupling between adjacent sections.
J.
Cable Tray Cover : Provide cable tray cover for all installation at exposed areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray / ladder level and plumb according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Each run is to be completed before installation of cables.
E/62

C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using
approved suspension rods or steel angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and
generally as shown on the Drawings.
D. All bends and tee shall be from manufacturer. No site fabrication is allowed.
E. Cables: Secure to tray / ladder with purpose made straps or saddles and arrange in one
layer only, evenly spaced, or as shown on the Drawings, with minimum spacing of one
diameter of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core
cable circuit.
F. Fasten cable tray / ladder supports securely to building structure as specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and
to equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight
of cable tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.
H. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion
joint and in cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 27 m. Make changes in direction and
elevation using standard fittings.
I.
Make cable tray / ladder connections using standard fittings.
J.
Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is
required or unless otherwise indicated.
K. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Section Firestopper.
L. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through fire
stopping-sealed cable tray / ladder penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
M. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for
installing cables. Minimum clearance of 250 mm is to be maintained between top of tray
/ ladder and ceiling, beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier
formation.
N. Barriers: Where tray / ladders carry conductors of different systems, such as power,
communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V,
5000V, and 20, 000 V use separate cable tray / ladders. In case of absolute necessity,
install insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineers
approval.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays / ladders according to manufacturer's instructions.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values.
3.3

A. Grounding: Test cable trays / ladders to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections.
B.
Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect
trays / ladders by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and
at maximum 30-m spacing.
E/63

C. Replace malfunctioning units.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed

finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes,
including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer that ensure cable tray / ladder is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable
tray / ladder manufacturer.
recommended by cable tray / ladder manufacturer.
E/64

WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16140
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets,
automatic and manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates,
etc.
B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying

with one set of approved Standards.
C. Related Sections include the following:
2. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for boxes.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each item.
B.
1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout
drawings, with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including fans etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed
in writing by the Engineer.
D.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish 2% (with minimum of one each) extra materials for all products that match
those installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
E/65

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLATES, GENERALLY
A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division
16 Section "Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where
apparatus installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets
are to be attached by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
B. Floor outlets and plates are to be watertight and impact resistant.
2.2
PLATES AND CORD-OUTLETS

A.
Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit
electrical device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws.
Combination plates are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.
B.
Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and
finish as plates.
C. Plastic Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color, for
general use in service areas.
D. Cable/cord outlet (electric outlet) is to be used for up to 20 A, 250 V rating for
connection of power/control cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord
grip to anchor cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable
clamp for termination of cable/cord within.
E. Lighting outlet is to consist of outlet box, coverplate, and necessary accessories ready
for connection to lighting fixture.
2.3
SWITCHES
A.
Generally: Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting
molded base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive
loads up to full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
B. Types: Single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
C. General Lighting Switch: 20A, 250 V ac rocker operated, grid-switch with plastic plate.
D. Push Button Switch: similar to with push button control (push to make, push to break)
and indicator for remote control of lighting contactors and relays.
E. Remote Lighting Control Panel for Contactor Control: Multiple two ways momentary
on/off push button switch assembly, with an 'on' pilot light for each circuit controlled
(remote contactor). Panel and box are to be sheet steel construction, with see-through
steel-framed acrylic door and trim, handle and lock. Enclosure protection IP 42 to IEC
144 for indoor installation and IP 55 for outdoor installation.
F.
Weatherproof Switch (S15): 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, with weatherproof

plate, synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 55 enclosure.
G. Electric Outlet for Water Heater, Cooker, Dishwasher, etc..: Double Pole Switch (S20):
Rated as shown on the drawings, 250 V ac with molded plastic plate, marked (etched)
with equipment controlled (e.g. water heater, cooker, dishwasher, etc) and with red
neon pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to be provided with cord outlet and cord
extension to equipment controlled.
E/66

H. Fused connectors units with 20ADP switch and unswitched with or without flex outlet as
shown on drawings.
2.4
SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Types: BS compliance, General-purpose socket outlets shall conform to BS standard.
B. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off
feature for two-circuit connection.
C. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in surface
mounted polycarbonate box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket hinged
flap. Enclosure is to comprise a pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet
specified.
D. Standard British Socket - Single phase, three-wire, to accept three pin plugs (2P +E)
and rated 13A, 250 V ac, for ring main circuit.
E. Standard British Socket: Single phase, three-wire, (2P +E) and rated 16A, 250 V for use
with sockets of high power appliance.
Selection of Finishes
Type D1: All indoor areas of Ground, Mezzanine Floor and VIP Floors devices, switch cover
plates and socket outlets shall be Metal finish and decorative.
Type D2: All indoor areas from First Floor to 18th Floor and above used by general public
and non-technical use in dry areas devices, cover plates of switches and socket outlets
shall be decorative high impact white PVC having a smooth surface finish and fully
complying with BS standards.
Type D3: All indoor areas common services and for technical use of dry nature devices
coverplate of switches and socket outlets shall be function unit of high impact with PVC
having a smooth finish full complying with BS and European standards.
Type D4: All indoor devices in plant rooms, car parks and non-air conditioned areas shall be
of polycarbonate housing and ingress protected at least IP 54.
Type D5: Outdoor area devices, socket outlets and isolation shall be metal clad die-cast
aluminum enclosure or glass-fibre reinforced polyester at least IP 65.
2.5
PLUGS
A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact
resistant molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and
cord grip and of shape providing easy hand-grip for removal.
B.
2.6
Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.
SPECIAL DEVICES
A. Lighting Contactors
1. Type: Double pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and triple pole for three
phase circuits, mechanically held, electrically operated, rated 500 V, of current
ratings shown on the Drawings, and complying with IEC-158-1 category AC 3.
2. Contacts: Copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed
for switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.
E/67

3. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to provide specified interlocks and signals as shown
on the Drawings, or required by the Specification, with one N.O. and one N.C. spare
contacts.
4. Enclosure: Unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contactor is to
be provided with IP 42 enclosure for indoor use or IP 65 enclosure for outdoor use.
5. Control: Each contactor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have
on/off pilot lights and set of on/off push buttons mounted on cover.
6. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
B. Photoelectric Cells
1. Photoelectric Cells: Omnidirectional cadmium sulfide, hermetically sealed, with 2:1
on/off adjustment possible by moving light level selector, set to operate at
illuminance levels shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Unit is to include
timer giving 3-minute delay to prevent false switching. Temperature range is to be 10 deg. C to +80 deg. C.
2. Safety: Control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on
position.
3. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect
to requirements shown on the Drawings.
4. Enclosure: Heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of 'Lexan' (by G.E.) or
other equal and approved, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and 180 deg.
swivel base and 16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof
and protected against high winds and storms.
C. Door Entrance Systems

1. Door Bell Push Button: Momentary contact, low voltage, with illuminated label holder
under glassine, flush box and stainless steel plate, and electronic microphone for
two-way communication.
2. Chime: Electronic, with built-in double-wound transformer, 8V - 12V secondary
protected by fuses; primary voltage to correspond with building power supply voltage
at location. Chime is to be two-tone, double insulated, 80 dB at 1-m distance,
adjustable output. It is to be possible to operate chime by 9 V alkaline batteries.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment.
Exact locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any
condition that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the
Engineer. Locate switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or
not. In locating outlets allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement,
thickness of finishing, window trim, paneling and other engineering features.
B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the
same or similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by
Engineer. Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket
E/68

outlets generally at 1200 mm and 300 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount
switches with long dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up
when in the on position.
C. Additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by
equipment manufacturers for control or other wiring.
D. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
allowing for thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged
finishing to original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
E. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished
wall surface. Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface
without gaps, and fully covering the box.
F. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
G. Waterproof and Explosion-Proof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for
installation and connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of
protection.
H. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings
and plates against damage after installation and until handed over.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate
and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire.

switches having neutral shunt or bridge.
Do not run neutral wire through
B.
Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent
inserts or lead anchors.
C. Connection Of Appliances:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring
to incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring
in flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on
appliance.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published
3.4

A. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and
workmanship.
E/69

B. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation
resistance of wiring installations.
C. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full
load without any signs of heating.
D. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3
days operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.
3.5
CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures.
improperly painted wall plates or devices.
E/70
Replace stained or
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

SECTION 16264
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The UPS size and full details shall be coordinated with the final requirement of the IT
Data Center Specialist
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
C.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
2.
3.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes three-phase, on-line, static-type, uninterruptible power supply

(UPS) system installation, comprising the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
1.4
Division 16, Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

Division 16, Section "Grounding and Bonding".
Division 16, Section "Conductors and Cables".
Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static switch

and maintenance by-pass circuit
Output panelboard (included under a different section),
Necessary interface for data on faults/monitoring to the Building Management
System.
Input isolation transformer for UPS units rated at 80 kVA and above
Interplant power and control cabling
Connection of normal a.c. power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker,
as shown on the Drawings
Earthing system.
Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays,
transducers, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS
schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
D.
UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
Manufacturers catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the Standards,

dimensions and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods
of operation, protective and control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions
and limitations on electronic components etc. beyond which such components
may suffer partial or permanent damage.
E/71
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with

requirements.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E.
Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System is to undergo
a functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and is to undergo a
minimum 72 hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
F.
Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance
requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not
agree.
G.
Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
1.6
Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and
indicating devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding
etc.
Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
Installation and mounting details.
Batteries arrangement and mounting details.
Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

Project site for ready access.
Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and
abnormal conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of

UPS manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B.
Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for
professional advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately
supply spare parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements.
Failure to satisfy Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
C.
Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or
equal Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design,
and Standards used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency
interference (RFI) suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR recommendations.

A.
Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions

have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B.
Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers'

ambient temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
E/72
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero to

+40 deg. C at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating under up
to 55 deg. C ambient conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 40 deg.
C.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
1.
1.9
1.10
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours
operation of UPS system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours
operation together with current prices.
B.
Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'

full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer.
Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1.
Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal

working hours.
a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
System is to be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and

memory capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall
permit setting parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by
the Engineer. UPS is to be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test
function to verify correct system operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the
UPS requiring repair in case of a fault. The system shall be provided with multipassword levels to limit access to software and data.
B.
General: System is to be interposed between normal a.c. power supply and critical
load, to secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for 10
E/73

minutes in case of failure of normal a.c. supply and maintain output voltage,
frequency and phase deviation within specified tolerances.
2.3
C.
System is dual redundant with maintained (continuously supplying load through the
inverter), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source
(bypass) in case of failure or overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system.
D.
Normal a.c. power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either
normal a.c. network or from a.c. Characteristics of output of generator set (when
provided) and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results. Study and advise
on special requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
E.
System overall efficiency is not to be less than 92 % at full load .
F.
Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 60 dB(A) at 1.0 m distance

anywhere within UPS room.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Under normal conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked to

normal a.c. supply. Upon loss of normal a.c. supply, battery is to continue supply of
no-break power to inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency
reference. Upon restoration of normal a.c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize to
a.c. line, gradually (at slew rate), if frequency and voltage deviation of normal a.c.
supply is within preset limits specified.
B.
Automatic Transfer To Bypass: Static transfer switch is to automatically transfer

critical (100%) load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal a.c. supply) if:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.

Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
Over-temperature is sensed.
Manual (push button) command is given.
Transfer to by-pass mode is to be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage,
frequency and/or phase shift of bypass power is outside acceptable tolerances.
Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to

inverter (UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
1.
Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified
tolerances.
2.
Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of
UPS.
3.
Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
D.
Lock-out feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside

preset tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase
locked or if UPS output is not restored to normal conditions.
E.
Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage,

rectifier/charger is to initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current.
After approximately 10 seconds (walk-in time), input power requirements are to rise to
power level to drive critical load and recharge battery.
F.
Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input
current of the UPS.
E/74

2.4
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Rectifier/Charger Input:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Nominal Input Voltage: 415V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz.

Voltage input variation: +-6%, 3 phase 50Hz.
Frequency: +/-5% from nominal.
Transformer Exciting Current In Rush: Less than 600 % nominal
current.
Power Factor: 0.8 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage.
Total Harmonic Feedback: Maximum 10 % (total).
Current Limiting: 115% max. Of that required to operate inverters and
charge battery at full rated load, adjustment possible between 100%
and 125%.
Walk-in Current in Rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 10 seconds.
B.
Rectifier/Charger Output:
1.
Float and Equalize Operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible with
battery.
2.
Regulation: +/-1% max. from 0-100% load.
3.
Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load).
C.
Static Inverters:
1.
2.
Nominal net system power output rating with load power factor 0.7-lag to 0.9lead: as shown on drawings.
Nominal output voltage: 440 V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of
nominal.
3.
Output voltage regulation:
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Balanced load: +/-2 % (0 - 100% load)

Unbalanced load (3-phase output only):+/-10 % (at 100% unbalance)
4.
Phase Displacement: 120 deg. (+/-5 deg.) at 100% load unbalance.
Output Voltage Waveform: 5% max. Total harmonic, 3% max. Single harmonic.
Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-1%
adjustable range; free running at +/-0.1% over full battery voltage variation, load
and p.f. range; slew rate not to exceed 0.1 Hz/sec.
Dynamic Output Voltage Tolerance Sudden Full Load Removal: +/-10 % max.
recovering application or to within 1% in less than 100 milliseconds.
Over-load Rating: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5
cycles, 105% continuous.
Automatic Static Transfer Switch:

1.
Transfer Time: 150 microsecond (overlapping) maximum.
2.
Total Sensing and Transfer/Retransfer Time: 2 milliseconds,
maximum.
3.
Retransfer Mode: automatic/inhibit (selectable).
4.
Retransfer Delay:
2 - 32 secs. in auto mode (selectable).
5.
Transfer Point: +/-10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
6.
Retransfer Point: +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
7.
Transfer Inhibit Point: +/-20% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
2.5
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A.
Materials and Parts: Electronic devices are to be solid state, hermetically sealed.
Indicator lights are to be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions are to
be seen by operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power
connections and remote alarm and control wiring are to be accessible at terminal
boards. Power semi- conductors are to be fused. Metal surfaces including copper
E/75

and aluminium heat sinks and busbars are to be treated with permanent protective
coating.
Electro-mechanical power devices and relays are to be vacuum
impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions, and enclosed in
dust-tight enclosures. Cables are to be fire resistant high temperature grade.
B.
UPS is to be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked to a

portable PC, to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the UPS. It
shall enable interrogation of the UPS about status, faults, data stored,
reprogramming, etc.
C.
Housing: Equipment is to be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally

enclosed modular assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access
for maintenance, inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for handling and
lifting during and after installation. Enclosures are to be suitable for industrial, tropical
environments, protection IP20 to IEC 144, of galvanized sheet steel construction
treated against corrosion and with light grey RAL7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to
approved standard.
D.
Sub-assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-out

trays, of the plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount
components in pull-out or swing-out trays, they are to be easily accessible inside the
enclosure. Assemblies shall be replaceable without requiring any adjustments or
settings in the UPS.
E.
Ventilation: For units rated over 5 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system is to be
provided in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure
components operate within environmental ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet
through replaceable filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans are to be
provided for ventilating each enclosure. No degradation of performance is to occur in
the event of a single fan failure. Temperature sensors, mounted on semi-conductor
heat sinks, are to initiate alarm if maximum working temperature is exceeded.
F.
Rectifier/charger unit is to have mainline circuit breaker and two-winding dry-type,

Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high
efficiency (98%), regulating transformer and is to be automatic with soft start-up
(walk-in) feature, using silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic
circuitry to control firing angles to thyristors to suit power output requirements and
protect against primary power surges, lightning transients, under-voltage and overvoltage conditions. Output is to be passed through LC filters to d.c. bus.
G.
Rectifier/charger unit is to be capable of supplying full load power to inverter, and to

charge the battery from a discharge condition to 95% charge within ten times
discharge period, and maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation.
Charger current is to be voltage regulated and current limited. Where three-phase
supply is involved, rectifier is to be at least six-pulse type for UPS ratings up to 80
kVA, and 12-pulse type for 80 kVA ratings and above.
H.
Inverter is to employ Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) technology in three

leg, pulse width modulation (PWM) design with high frequency switching technique,
and complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up is to be automatic,
to reach full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2
seconds. Inverter is to start at any load including short-circuit. Output transformer is
to be two-winding dry-type, Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic
electrostatic shielding, high efficiency (98%),
I.
Inverter oscillator is to operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within

specified tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal
power supply frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and
latter fails, oscillator is to automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator)
and maintain specified limits.
E/76

J.
Automatic static transfer switch is to be continuously rated at full load (100% FL),
hybrid type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor
assembly isolatable or completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close
switch is initiated, thyristors are to instantaneously conduct power to prevent
deviations and breaks in load voltage outside specified tolerances.
K.
Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch is to

allow load to be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and
provide isolation of UPS and static switch during maintenance. Test position is to
permit testing of static switch while load is being fed from bypass power circuit.
Transfer inhibited warning circuit is to be provided to give an alarm indication in case
by-pass supply is beyond acceptable tolerances.
L.
Protection: UPS modules are to have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting

protection against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast
acting, current limiting devices are to protect against failure of any solid state
component. Internal failure in any UPS module is to cause immediate isolation from
input and output by operation of static interrupters or causing shut down of faulty
module. Protection is to be provided against, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Input over and under voltage and power line surges

Output over voltage and voltage surges
Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions
Short-circuits at output terminals
Inverter and rectifier overcurrent
Auxiliary Control Circuit Overcurrent.
M.
UPS Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current.
N.
Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system is to disconnect the input filters in
case of interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating at light
loads (less than 25%).
O.
Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic
encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically reclosing explosion proof safety vents rated for 500C ambient Temperature. Electrolyte
specific gravity is not to exceed 1.25 when fully charged at 500C Ampere-hour rating
is to be sufficient for emergency period specified with all inverters operating at full
rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell. Cells are to be
normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life is not to be less than 10
years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected
service.
P.
Battery Cabinets: Steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at points of contact
with battery cases. Cabinets are to be painted with electrolyte resistant paint, are to
be of appropriate design for space in which installed, and directly accessible for
maintenance. Cables are to be rubber insulated electrolyte resistant type.
Q.
Mimic Panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED
displays, indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
R.
Local panel instruments shall have serial communication interface for BMS
integration and are to include at least the following (digital readings):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inverter input voltmeter, measuring d.c. bus volts.

Battery ammeter, measuring charge/ discharge current.
A.C. voltmeter to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or
system output.
UPS output ammeter and frequency meter.
E/77

S.
Local Panel Indicators are to include at least the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
T.
System on battery supply

Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and
normal a.c. supply input.
Static switch on normal a.c. supply (bypass mode).
Static switch inhibited.
Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for
transformers, rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load
to by-pass circuit).
Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure
of any stage, D.C. bus earth fault, and inverter output earth fault.
Local built-in controls are to include at least the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inverter on/off.
Battery input circuit breaker.
Auto/manual reset-test switch.
Manual reset switch.
Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to
inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to
inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode.
7. Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0-30 hours adjustable, with
automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and
to be used only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of battery
specified).
8.
Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to
maintenance personnel only).
9. Indicator test/reset switch.
10. Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
11. Alarm test-accept-reset.
U.
Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, are to
include at least the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
Fan failure: Alarm only.

Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe
preset period.
D.C. Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication.
Fuse Failure: Alarm.
Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only.
Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each
rectifier/inverter unit.
Normal a.c. Supply Failure: Alarm only.
Hybrid Switch Operation to by-pass Mode: Alarm only.
Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.
UPS LOAD OUTPUT PANELBOARD

A.
Type: Separately mounted or built-in, sheet steel enclosed, generally in accordance

with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" of the Specification, MCCB panelboard
construction.
B.
Ratings: Main and branch circuit breaker selection and ratings are to be time-current
coordinated with inverter protection and overload requirements of critical loads to
avoid interruption of power to healthy circuits in case of faults. Provide circuits as
shown on panelboard schedule.
E/78

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for
fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B.
Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases
or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly
installed.
C.
Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
D.
Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a

qualified technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and
putting into satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the
factory.
GROUNDING
A.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Identify components and wiring according to Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A.
3.5
Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 16

Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.
Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Record individual-cell voltages.

A.
Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to

manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and
performance of each component of the UPS:
1.
Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:
a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.

b. Component type and labeling verification.
c. Ratings of installed components.
2.
3.
Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and
alarm functions.
Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.
B.
Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and

monitor and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency.
Instrument details are to be submitted for approval.
C.
Test Periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to

verify and obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and
switching conditions within the criteria specified.
E/79
3.6
D.
Data logging is to include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and
spike bursts, drop-outs; high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on
cassette tape for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or printout.
E.
Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload
condition, and measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave
shape, and harmonic content and frequency stability.
F.
Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
G.
Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and
inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test
and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.
E/80

CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
SECTION 16265
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Illuminate the escape routes and immediate external areas at discharge points.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly as per the requirements of the NFPA.
Provide the exit signs on all the exits.
Illuminate lighting fixtures in offices and technical areas for ambient lighting level, to
ensure an average lighting level of 10.8 lux with a minimum uniformity of 0.4.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment's and other life saving
equipments on the premises are illuminated as required.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures and to shut down any
hazardous processes as required.
Provide emergency illumination in Electrical rooms and control rooms 100 lux.
Provide a separate central battery control panel for substation areas of HV,
transformer and generator room having 12 hours autonomy.

1. Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each
product specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing
control and indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of
operating modes and any load limitations that may apply.
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/
manufactures authorized representative and the contractor, including all necessary
documentation as called for.
C. Record of field tests covering tests and commissioning efforts required by Part 3 of this
Section.
D. Carry out specified tests and submit test sheets as per attached Annex.
E. Maintenance Data: For central battery inverters to be included in maintenance manuals
F.
1.4
As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

central battery, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed and installed
to meet the local civil defense and the respective DIN VDE 0108 and NFPA 101
standards applicable to this Project.
E/81

B. The system shall have the approval of the Local Civil Defense Authority.
C. All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO
9001 certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards and
shall bear the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility.
D. All products shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or from authorized
dealer/agent.
1.5
DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions

have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
1.6
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and
may be used interchangeably: "Emergency Central Battery System" and "Central
Battery Inverter".
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Annexure-1 below that match product installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra products to the Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 1 Section 01600, paragraph 2.1
2.2
A. Emergency lighting system shall provide an average of 10.8 lux illumination level with
0.4 minimum uniformity, throughout the facility.
B. Emergency lighting of average 100 lux shall be provided in control rooms and electrical
rooms.
C. Emergency lighting system shall operate on maintained, non-maintained or switched
maintained mode for 3-hour duration as per the requirement of the particular facility
operation.
D. The system shall be certified to provide a light output of at least 75 % of the connected
fixtures, for the 3-hour period of emergency operation envisaged.
E.
In general emergency lighting shall be provided by using lamps from the luminaires
used for the main normal illumination, unless agreed otherwise.
F. Equipment shall be certified EMC compliant to IEC.

G. BMS interface: ECBS (Emergency Central Battery System) shall interface to the
Management Level Network through a BACnet/IP to third party gateway. The gateway
shall be provided by the ECBS supplier and shall be connected into the Management
E/82

Level Network by the BMS contractor. The BMS contractor shall obtain a list of the
BACnet object IDs/names from the ECBS supplier.
2.3
MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP 21 with removable
screwed front, rear and top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The
electronics section shall have IP 54 sheet steel enclosure with transparent
polycarbonate window for all central systems and IP 54 sheet steel enclosure with full
metal.
B. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries
from top via multiple undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables and
looping circuits shall be connected on protected and fused terminals as per DIN VDE
0100. All outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components
via plug-in type terminals 2.5 sq.meter.
2.4
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The system shall be built-up in a modular with all modules being encapsulated plug-intype design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. 1 module
shall be used for circuits with maximum load of 6 Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108. 1
module shall not be used for more than two circuits. It shall be possible to mix and
connect maintained lights and non-maintained lights to each circuit. Each circuit shall
be protected within the system on mains and battery side via screw-in type cartridge
fuses on each module. The fuses shall be accessible via front plate of the module.
The mains supply and battery mains cable shall be protected by knife-edge fuses. The
fuse holders shall have handles for simple removal of the fuses. 25 percent spare
capacity shall be available in terms of circuits and modules.
B. Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with at least 3 fuses for each size used in
respective panel.
C. Each Change-over module shall have its own short-circuit protection.
2.5
CONTROL MODULE
A. The control module shall be composed of a microprocessor control module with plain
text 4 line LCD displays with a minimum of 20 characters per line, to provide operative
status and luminaire failures.
B.
Displays to indicate Circuit earth leakage failure, battery current drawn in emergency
mode, battery current drawn in test mode, battery voltage, battery test, battery charge
failure, luminaire failure with text address location, sub-circuit board supply failure with
text address location.
C. Functions to include Earth leakage test on each circuit, display and programming the
status of each circuit, Monitor and control of all weekly/daily cycle tests and functions,
monitoring of battery at five minute intervals, communication and programming with
each addressable ballast at the luminaires, automatic logging of all test results and
incidents. Manual test feature in addition to automatic.
D. Touch-pad keys shall be provided for programming and monitoring of the panels.
E. Memory facility to be provided for two-year logbook.
F. Central monitoring through LON network, with each ECBS panel equipped with a LON
terminal. Plug-in LON module for complete integration on the BMS with full data
transfer to BMS. Central monitoring shall be IBM compatible PC with latest Pentium
processor. Function testing to be accomplished from BMS.
E/83

G. LEDs shall indicate:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main operation.
Mains failure.
Battery operation.
Summation fault.
H. Potential free indicator contacts shall be provided for:

1. Operation.
2. Battery operation.
3. Summary fault.
I.
Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the front
of the control module.
An electronically controlled 24 V output for the voltage
monitoring of lighting sub distribution panels shall be provided.
J.
Electronically isolated mains monitoring shall be provided for maintained and non
maintained light circuits, with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to
emergency light operation. As a standard following programming modes shall be
available.
1. Manual reset.
2. Time delay of mains return.
3. Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation.
K. Individual changeover shall be provided per emergency circuit with free programming
for maintained or non-maintained light and 2 pole fusing conforming to VDE.
L.
2.6
CHANGEOVER MODULE
A.
2.7
Each changeover module shall be freely programmable to suit type of luminaires

connected on outgoing circuits i.e. maintained, non-maintained or switch maintained.
The individual lamp monitoring circuits shall be included in the changeover module.
Each changeover module shall have LED indications for Circuit On and Lamp failure
and shall be fit to monitor up to 12 luminaires maximum as required by DIN VDE
0108/prEN 50171. All outgoing circuit terminals shall be provided to monitor the sub
distribution boards.
FINAL CIRCUIT MONITORING MODULE

A.
2.8
Failure recognition for each individual safety/exit luminaire in conjunction with

proprietary electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional
data line.
Final lighting circuits shall be monitored for operation and when failure is detected in
supply voltage the circuit shall be automatically be transferred from normal supply to
battery mode. The feature shall be incorporated in ECBS.
CHARGER
A. Charger module shall be microprocessor controlled Switch Mode Rectifier (SMR)
module with temperature compensated constant voltage charging. Automatic boost
charging facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total battery
capacity. It shall have charging and supervising method for failure indication of battery
circuits as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90 percent
recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours. It shall come complete with
earth leakage monitor for battery circuit monitoring. It shall be provided with LED
indications for:
E/84

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Battery Operation.
Charger on.
Boost Charging
Mains operation.
Battery capacity >10 percent, >50 percent, 100 percent.
Charger failure.
Insulation fault.
Earth Fault
B. It shall have potential free indicator contacts for:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Charger failure alarm.

High charging Voltage Alarm
Low Voltage Charging Alarm
Charger fault alarm.
C. It shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. It shall include plug-intype terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and battery accessible via the
front plate of the charger.
2.9
BATTERIES
A.
Batteries shall be maintenance free, rated 500C sealed leak-proof lead acid gas
recombination (GRC) type battery with following system features.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Extremely low gas generation, requiring no special ventilation.

Acid density between 1.24 kg/l and 1/26 kg/l.
Low self discharge rate.
Maintenance free special connector with pole covers meeting the rules of
prevention of the accidents.
Pole ducts tight to electrolyte and atmospheric oxygen.
Absolutely maintenance free over the whole service life.
Immobilized electrolyte design, with Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) separators.
Permanently sealed pressure release safety vent.
Operates at extremely low internal pressure.
B. Date of manufacture to be stamped on each battery cell/monoblock.

C. Guaranteed life is not to be less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less
than 80 percent under normal expected service
2.10
CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE

A.
2.11
The central monitoring shall be via central group monitoring hardware and software,
monitoring and programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of latest technology PC
with monitor, keyboard and printer. The unit shall operate with latest visualization
software to give detailed text, address and information of all luminaires connected to
system. It shall have programming/automatic testing facility for time duration test,
function test, location of luminaire, manual rest and acoustic alarm. It shall have facility
for software interface to the BMS to provide transmission of all data records as desired.
EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE

A. Exit luminaires shall have metal body and shall be installed along the defined escape
routes and shall be visible from all points of the escape route. The luminaires shall be
placed above each exit door, at each intersection with other escape routes and
corridors and near each change of direction. All exit luminaires shall be operated via an
emergency central battery system (ECBS).
E/85

B. All exit luminaires shall have pictogram legends as per DIN 4844/CEN TC. 169 or
markings as per local civil defence requirements with viewing distance of 36 m or 16 m
based on the length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built according to NFPA
101/NFPA 170and shall have a contrast factor of 0.2.
C. Special focus shall be given to the location of the safety luminaires to cover specific
hazards and to highlight safety equipment installed. Intersections with other corridors,
changes in floor level, staircases (each flight has to receive direct light), fire alarm
operation equipment, fire fighting equipment and other life safety equipment as
identified.
D. Safety luminaires shall be as well installed in toilets with areas more than 8 sq.m, lifts
cars, generator room, electrical control or plant rooms, and in other areas where
hazards are encountered by the occupants of the facility. All areas shall be illuminated
with a uniformity factor of Emin/Emax = 0.4 to provide a minimum lighting level to 10 lux
and 100 lux in electrical and control rooms.
2.12
E.
Unless otherwise stated, this lighting level shall be achieved by integrated safety
luminaires operated by an emergency central battery system.
This shall be best
achieved by using high frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load. Alternatively
subject to the approval of the engineer and architect, purpose designed and optimised
safety luminaires including high frequency electronic control gear for lower power
consumption fittings may be used.
F.
All exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible
addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built-in or
separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label
(red/white) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed.
HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROL GEAR

A. All safety and exit luminaires shall have an electronic ballast with monitoring facility and
easy accessible address module shall have an automatic cut-out fuse for failures within
the lamp circuit. All electronic ballasts for the EIT and safety luminaires shall be
manufactured by the emergency lighting system manufacturer.
B. Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting, the Contractor
shall ensure coordination between both manufacturers.
2.13
LOCATION OF MAIN CENTRAL BATTERY PANEL

A.
2.14
The central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room
temperature of 25 deg C. The room shall be air conditioned using a recirculation airconditioning system without any special battery room ventilation requirements. The
panel shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of 25 deg C. All
panels shall be connected to the central station for central group monitoring.
LON MODULE
A. All Central Battery panels shall have the facility to transfer complete data to the building
management system in LON works standard or approved equal. LON module should
facilitate complete integration at automation level with BMS system to indicate the
Voltage, Charge, Current, battery capacity, failure information including individual light
faults with location details from the Central battery system. It should be possible to
conduct function and duration tests from the BMS computer.
2.15
SUB CIRCUIT MONITORING

A. For circuits in non-maintained mode a single or 3 phase voltage monitor, as the case
may be, shall be installed in the lighting sub-distribution boards or a single phase
E/86

control relay shall be installed in final circuit when required. The 24 V monitoring loop
shall be interrupted if the supply line in the sub-distribution board fails or the monitored
circuits fails and shall trigger the emergency lighting supply system over to maintained
(ECBS) mode.
B. Each panel shall have the facility of additional monitoring loop(s) when required.
2.16
AUTOMATIC AND CYCLIC FUNCTION MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY

A. An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic
charger and battery monitor at intervals of 5 minutes or less with daily/weekly, function
test of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaires,
registration and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also
be provided in addition to the automatically operated testing feature. The monitoring
system and data transfer shall be carried out based on a current multiplexer system in
DC mode.
2.17
WIRING
A. Wiring, both power and control wiring between the central battery, panels and
luminaires shall be carried out in fire retardant silicone rubber insulated cable, with
overall PVC sheath bonding to coated aluminum foil, MICC to BS EN 60702: Part 1, BS
6387 Cat B, with at least 2 hours fire rating or equivalent cable of suitable size as per
the local civil defence requirements.
B.
All wiring shall conform to the requirements of Division 16, relevant specification
sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm
in front of unit.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
B. All emergency luminaries shall be labeled with 100mm width yellow color labels
containing black lettering clearly identifying the circuit number and the ECBS unit.
3.3

A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
Supervision of unit installation, connections, and
adjustments by a factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.
B. Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test
unit functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies
with Specifications. Perform tests on completion of unit installation and after building
circuits have been energized. Provide instruments to permit accurate observation of
tests. Include the following tests:
1. Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.
2. Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers due to normal source
failure and restoration.
3. Verify emergency-supply duration.
E/87

4.
Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this
Project without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation
of the load or its output. All light fixtures (E), ceiling roses, modules, wires, etc are
to be identified.
C. Retest:
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match
original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1. Conduct a minimum of 2 hours training as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
2. Schedule training with the Employer with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.6
COMMISSIONING
A.
Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to the

battery manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
E/88

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 16289
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control,
and communication equipment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral transient voltage
surge suppressors.
Division 16 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed transient voltage surge
suppressors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transient voltage suppression devices,

certifying that products furnished comply with the following testing and labeling
requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.4
UL 1283 certification.
UL 1449 listing and classification.
Test procedures used.

Test results that comply with requirements.
Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing

to repair, restore or replace any defective components of surge suppressers that fail in
materials or workmanship during the specified warranty period
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
E/89

1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low
Voltage AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide for
Surge Suppressor Testing."
B.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices."
C.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and

UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors."
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under the
following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal
system operating voltage.
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 deg C.
Humidity: up to 85 percent, non-condensing.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for

maintenance.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Refer to Section 16999 Lists of Approved and Recommended Manufacturers.

SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A.
Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type, provided where indicated with
the following features and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
B.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 kA per phase.
C.
Connection means: permanently wired.
D.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits.
E/90

2.3
PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A.
Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type provided where indicated with
the following features and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
One set of dry contacts rated at 5 a, 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
B.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per phase.
C.
Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits.
2.4
CONTROL AND DATA TERMINALS

A.
2.5
Protectors for copper control, data, antenna, telephone conductors entering the building
from the outside shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of line being
protected.
ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A.
Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
B.
Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible.
Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1.
3.2
Provide multipole, 15-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for the

suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A.
A.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
B.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1.
2.
3.
C.
After installing surge protective devices, but before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
ATS, Section 7.19. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest after repairs or replacements are made.
E/91

D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1.
3.4
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation

requirements.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
installation.
E/92

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SECTION 16350
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
B. Kahramaa Specification ED-04-035 (11/0.433 kV) latest version during the Construction
Stage.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes distribution and power transformers with medium-voltage
primaries.
2. Division 16 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for transformers integral to
substations.
3. Division 16 Section "Busways" and/or Busducts for busway connections between
transformers and secondary distribution equipment.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified.
Include dimensioned plans,
sections, and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and
features. Submit Manufacturers' catalogues.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards.
E. Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the manufacturer's
works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports, prior to
shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of
equipment under site conditions.
F.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Plans and elevations, with dimensions and weights.

Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
One-line diagram of power system.
Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
G. Sound-Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound-level tests

applicable to equipment for this Project.
E/93

requirements.
I.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing transformers
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following
Standards:
1. Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC 694.
2. Power transformers: IEC 76, 354, 726.
3. Kahramaa Specification ED-04-035 latest version during the Construction Stage.
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer
agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
1.6

A. Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat according
to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit
throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that
is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of transformers with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1
MANUFACTURERS
B. Kahramaa Approved Manufacturers.
1.2
DRY TYPE CAST RESIN POWER TRANSFORMER

A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, solventless cast epoxy resin, vacuum
pressure impregrated windings, with minimum class F insulation on inner LV cores and
class F on outer MV cores, rated for continuous operation under worst site ambient
conditions at full load, and complying with IEC 726.
B.
Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and fire-resistant, selfextinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic gases in the event of fire.
E/94

C. Tapping is to be provided on MV and LV side by means of re-connectable links (offcircuit) for +/-2.5, +/-5% of rated voltages, giving +/-5% tapping on transformers with 5%
impedance voltage, and +/-4% tapping on transformers with 4% impedance voltage.
D. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil assemblies, and
between base and housing.
E. Cooling fans, where specified, are to permit 30% increase in rated power.
F.
Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting hooks or
lugs, towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
G. Temperature monitoring is to be provided by externally mounted tripping units giving

alarm and trip at two stages with about 20C temperature difference, actuated by three
embedded thermistor sensors in LV windings (hot-spot).
Additional thermal
monitoring/control is to be provided for cooling fan operation.
H. Terminals: Arranged as described in paragraph 1.2K hereof and/or as shown on the
Drawings, and are to be compatible for copper or aluminum cable termination.
I.
Earthing bolts or copper pads are to be provided on main frame of transformer.

Earthing busbars are to be provided on LV and MV sides of housing.
J.
Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with roof fans for indoor installation.
K. Characteristics:
1. Rated Power (net without fans): As shown on the drawings at 45 ambient.
2. Frequency: 50 Hz.
3. Rated Voltage:
a. MV Side (primary):
Nominal Voltage:11kV
Maximum Voltage: 12kV
b. LV Side (secondary): 380 415 V /240Vas per the local Authorities.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Winding Connections: Dyn11 with neutral insulated and brought out.

Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 6% for 1600 kVA.
Rated Power Frequency Withstand-Voltage: 75 kV.
Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 28 kV.
Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 2 seconds.
Terminal Connection System as required.
L. Accessories are to include the following:

1.
Earthing switch, fault-making type, on MV side of housing, interlocked with door,

visible from outside the enclosure, with trip contact for tripping MV circuit breaker
before closing earthing switch.
2. Fans and fans control for extra rating of transformer.
3. Four re-orientable roller rim wheels and attachment accessories.
4. Winding temperature sensor with 4 steps alarms to be connected to BMS (preheat,
heat, overheat, shutdown).
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved,
E/95

provided the required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the
identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building
maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation
of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and
provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases,
cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they
are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F.
Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Division 16 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
I.
2.2
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
2.3
CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
2.4

A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to
Engineer.
B. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
C. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and
manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is
suitable for energizing.
E/96

E. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated
and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test
commencement.
G. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials
and installation.
H. Tests:
Include the following minimum inspections and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
I.
2.5
tests according to
Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity,

and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been
removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers for drytype transformers.
Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's
published torque values.
Insulation Resistance: Perform meg-ohmmeter tests of primary and secondary
winding to winding and winding to ground.
Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from
20 deg C standard.
Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios
deviating more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio for an adjacent
coil is not acceptable.
Winding Resistance: Measure for windings at nominal tap setting.
Measured
resistance, deviating more than 1 percent, from that of adjacent windings, is not
acceptable.
Liquid-Filled Transformer, Insulation Power-Factor Test: Determine overall
dielectric loss and power factor for windings' insulation. Limit test voltage to line-toground voltage of windings being tested.
Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet
specified requirements.
GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation
requirements.
2.6
CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
2.7
ADJUSTING
A.
After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original
finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment

throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages
and tap settings and submit with test results.
2.8
DEMONSTRATION
E/97
Train Employers maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.
E/98

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 16410
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers
used for the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.
2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and
toggle switches used for disconnecting means.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular,
complying with one set of approved Standards.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions
and special features, as applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker,
accessory, and component indicated.
B.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Differentiate between
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
E/99

D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise
agreed in writing by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components
to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
In addition to
requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the
following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment
access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)

A. Rating: 500 V, 2, 3 or 4 pole, load break, short-circuit make, in accordance with IEC
408, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting loads, category 23 for motor
circuits, and with ampere rating shown on the Drawings.
B. Design: non-fused, air-break switch disconnector, single throw, safety type, housed
in separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
C. Operating Mechanism: quick-make, quick-break, independent of operator, with
external operating handle mechanically interlocked to prevent opening the door
unless switch is in open position. Switch disconnector is to have provision for bypassing interlock. Position of handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on cover.
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 42, and weather-proof type
cast-metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP 65, unless otherwise required or
shown on the Drawings. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and
closed positions.
2.2
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit Breaker: Refer to respective type specifications in Division 16 Section
"Switchboards".
B. Enclosures: Meet environmental conditions of installed location in accordance with
IEC 529.
2.3
FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
enclosures before shipping.
E/100

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers
for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would place
equipment in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and
connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment.
damage after installation and until handed over.
3.3
Protect equipment against
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminatedplastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with
ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B.
Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and
control and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

3.5

A. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at
full load without any signs of heating.
C. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
E/101

3.6
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove

paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air
to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
E/102

TRANSFER SWITCHES
SECTION 16415
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switch.
2. Bypass/isolation switch.
1. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer
switches for fire pumps.
2. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic
transfer switches for fire pumps.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations
showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed
features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.
C. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation
switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined
transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit
closing and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic
and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration
instructions, including software, where applicable.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a
locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for
professional advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately
supply spare parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements.
Failure to satisfy the Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
E/103
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and

related control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC 947-6.
D. Comply with UL 1008, NFPA 70 and 110.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
B. Locally assembled transfer switches meeting the Specifications are not acceptable.
2.2
MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)

A. Type: Conforming to IEC 947-6 or UL 1008 and to applicable standards. Wall or floor
mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle,
comprising two main contractors and controls necessary for automatic transfer of power
supply from normal source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control relay and time
delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights
etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system.
B.
Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable
setting (85- 100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power
failure relay is to actuate engine starting control, whilst normal mains contactor is to
open. After an adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated
voltage and frequency of generator at the ATS, (Voltage pick-up adjustable from 85% to
100% nominal); frequency pick-up adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the
emergency contactor is to close. Upon restoration of normal mains supply to above the
preset limits, adjustable between 90% and 100% of rated voltage and/or frequency, for
an adjustable preset period of 2 - 30 minutes, emergency contactor is to open and after
a presettable pause 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum, normal mains contactor is to close;
time delay is to be effective in both directions.
C. Engine Shutdown: Initiate after retransfer of the load to normal source. (Refer to
generator set controls upon shut-down).
D. ATS for Large Motor Loads: Include factory-installed and factory-wired internal motor
control under-voltage and timing relays. Relays control designated starters to deenergize motors prior to transfer and re-energize them selectively at adjustable time
intervals after transfer. Control connection to motor starters is to be through wiring
external to the ATS. Time delay for motor starting is to be individually adjustable
between 1 and 60 seconds. Relay contacts are to be rated for actual motor-control
circuit inrush and seal currents, or for pilot duty as indicated.
E. ATS for Large Motor Loads: Where indicated, include factory-installed and factory-wired
internal in-phase monitor relay. The relay controls transfer so it occurs when the 2
sources or source and load are synchronized in phase. The relay compares phase
relationship and frequency difference between the normal and emergency sources and
initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if the
transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. In-phase transfer is initiated
only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of
nominal voltage. Where an in-phase monitor is to be provided, this is to defeat the
'pause' in the transfer contactors and assume control of the switching operation.
E/104
F. Mechanical and Electrical Interlocks: Required to prevent contactors from being closed
simultaneously at any time. Transfer mechanism is to be powered from the source to
which the load is being transferred.
G. Selector Switches are to be provided as follows:
1. Operating selector switch is to include the following:
a. Normal: Generator set is set for automatic operation and the generator set
starts if a power outage occurs, as described above.
b. Test: Stimulates a power outage, starts and runs the generating set as Normal
position.
c. Stop: Shuts down the generating set and prevents it from starting. This is used
when servicing the generator.
2. Another selector switch is to be provided for two positions, "With load" and "Without
load" for testing or exercising:
a. "With Load": the generating set is to carry the load during testing or exercising
periods.
b. "Without Load": generating set is to start but not assume the load.
H. Pilot Lights are to indicate which contactor is on.
I.
Instruments are to include voltmeter and ammeter with selector switches.
J.
Contactors are to comply with IEC 947, and UL Standard 1008, and be 3-phase, 4-pole,
magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current
inductive or non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to have
replaceable main arcing contacts and arc quenching devices.
Contactors are to
withstand, without welding or burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal
rating for 4 seconds upon closing and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest
short-circuit of the system and withstand the short circuit for period required by
upstream short circuit protective device to operate. Three N.O. and three N.C. spare
contacts are to be provided on each contactor.
K.
Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper
conductors, modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable
numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring is
to be used on all hinged/draw-out components.
L. Connections are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed.
Power cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to
receive specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates are to be provided.
M. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or
terminal.
N. Earthing: Earthing bar is to be provided for connection of protective earthing
conductors, using set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
O. Ferrules: Wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.3
ATS WITH MANUAL BYPASS SWITCHES

A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation
with a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of non-automatic Kirk-key
interlocked switches, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same loads as
automatic transfer switch.
E/105
B. Bypass switch is to provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a

selector switch and a permanently mounted external lever, mechanically interlocked to
prevent paralleling of sources.
C. An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator set to be started when
bypass is on emergency sources.
D. Bypass switch is to be of the make-before-break type. A dead source lockout is to
prevent any possibility of bypassing the load to an unenergized source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.
B. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.2
WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS

A.
3.3
Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase
raceway sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required
wiring.
CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.
3.4

A. Testing:
Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to tests
recommended by the manufacturer:
1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:
a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with
insulation-resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Meet manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
c. Inspect For:
I.
II.
III.
d.
e.
Physical damage.
Proper installation and connection
Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

Perform manual transfer operation.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational

function for each switch at least three times.
a.
Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
E/106
d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transferswitch operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine
cool-down and shutdown sequence.
3.5
3.6
B.
Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings
and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or
tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
CLEANING
A.
After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint

splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
B.
Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's

written instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
installation.
E/107

SWITCHBOARDS
SECTION 16441
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution,
ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.
B. Connection to BACS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,
etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BACS schedules and /or shown on
the Drawings.
C. Requirements of the following Sections apply to this Section:
2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. MDB: Main distribution board.
B. CT: Current Transformer.
C. VT: Voltage Transformer.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. RMS: Root mean square.
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards
including all components supported by manufacturers catalogues, indicating
compliance with the Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment
characteristics, details of construction, operating data, dimensions and weights etc.
Give details of miscellaneous items including incoming and outgoing feeder terminal
arrangement, connections at busbars, isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices,
indicating and metering instruments etc. Boards are to be factory assembled and tested
and shipped as complete package (s).
B.
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and
weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
E/108

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and

busbars and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs
etc.)
Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments,
busbar connections etc.
Utility Companys metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
Mimic-bus diagram.
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for
equipment manufacture:
1.
Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and

characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault
currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective
short-circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for
microprocessor controlled trip units.
D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color selection.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F.
Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturers type and routine test
records, in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
H. Manufacturers field service report.
I.
Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution board
load connections have been made, for record.
J.
Maintenance Data:
For main distribution boards and components to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in
Division 1 include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturers written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five years of
successful installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards units
similar to those required for this project.
E/109

B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main
distribution boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. IEC 439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies: Type-Tested and
Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
2. IEC 947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Circuit Breakers.
3. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.
4. IEC 831-1 & 2 for power factor correction capacitors.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local regulations/code
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have precedence over other
codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise approved in writing.
E.
1.6
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
main distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
Deliver MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to
facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings
for MDBs and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to
ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components.
Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of
excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment
contained therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace
damaged equipment with new.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with
other construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent
surfaces, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
E/110

1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts:
Provide manufacturers recommended spare parts for emergency
replacement and/or one years maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable)
contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B.
Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as
appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
Important: The form and type of Main Switch boards shall be Form 4B Type 7.
A.
Generally: Main distribution boards are to be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multicubicle, floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, and 600 V
rated operational voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear, manually or manually and
electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form
a continuous integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections are to be of equal width.
B.
Generally: Coordinate with Building Management System (BMS) supplier and provide
all necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions specified
in the BACS schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel
enclosures, minimum thickness 1.5 mm, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting
primer and finished with thermal polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray
color (RAL 7703 or ANSI 61) to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and rodent
proof, IP42 protection to IEC 144 for indoor installations, with adequate lifting means
and base-frames and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor
without additional sills.
D. Ventilation: Compartments are to be ventilated, by approved methods complying with
the Standards.
E. Main Distribution Boards are to have a short circuit withstand current of 44kA for 1 sec.
F. Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.
G. Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure
as indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without
inconvenience to installation or maintenance.
H. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be provided
for extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type
of switchgear.
E/111

I.
Spare and space positions are defined as follows:

1. Spare position:
2. Space position:
J.
Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site rated
to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a symmetrical rms
short-circuit duty as specified.
Busbars are to be copper, of sufficient size to limit
temperature rise to allowable insulation or equipment temperature ratings, and to
maximum 90 deg C.
Connections and buswork are to be bolted with copper alloy
hardware and are to be accessible for inspection and maintenance unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by Engineer. Contact surfaces are
to be Electro-silver plated.
K. Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full continuous current
rating of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
L.
Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be insulated
and separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus
section. Links are to be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
M. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance
with the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each
end), and required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
N. Earth bus is to be half size of phase buses
O. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) are to be of the following type(s) unless otherwise
stated specifically in drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
P.
Form 4B Type 7.
Incoming: Withdrawable type.
Tie: Withdrawable type.
Outgoing: Fixed type.
Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section is to consist of compartmented

unit(s), stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and front
draw-out circuit breaker assembly. Partitions between sections are to be bolted steel
plate and partitions between compartments are to be tough solid insulating removable
bolted barriers. Each unit is to have hinged lockable front door with grip-handle and
door mounted instrumentation.
Q. Drawout circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and

interlocks to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open
position, and to prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three
positions (connect, test, disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to be
approved worm and lever mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door with
breaker in any of the three positions and when removed. External position indicator is
to be provided.
Fixed disconnecting primary contacts are to be accessible and
replaceable from front and are to be silver plated copper. Moving primary disconnect
contacts are to consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster,
copper contact fitted on line and load studs of circuit breaker.
R. Front and rear accessible, front and rear aligned, individually mounted fixed MCCB
distribution sections as basic construction for form 3 and form 4 switchboards, are to be
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker
compartments, busbar system compartments and rear cable termination compartments
(as per the form type selected), with insulating barriers between front compartments
and busbar compartments and between rear compartments and busbar compartment
(removable for maintenance). MCCBs are to be closely coupled to busbars (to
E/112

minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to rear cable terminals, through compatibly
frame-sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules are to be covered on the front, by
recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, to protect circuit
breaker handles. Top, sides and rear are to be covered with removable screw-on
plates having formed edges all around.
2.3
POWER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (PACBs)

A. Type: Encased in high strength, high temperature resistant, molded plastic insulating
materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosure at point of
application, tested to approve standards, manually operated for normal functions, and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip power is to be derived from
main power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip circuit breaker. Fixed
mounted circuit breaker is to be rear connected.
B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the
Drawings, with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make, quickbreak type, electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining circuit breaker
closed against over-current condition whether under manual or automatic operation.
Electrically operated circuit breakers are to have integrally mounted, spring charging
motor mechanism automatically recharged upon closing. Both manually or manually
and electrically operated circuit breakers are to have mechanical built-in charging lever
and are to include open and close direct acting push buttons. Stored energy provision
is to allow open/close/open sequence of operation without use of external energy.
Circuit breaker is to have arc-quenching device on each pole and replaceable arcing
contacts.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device,
where required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB control
power transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker. Where shunt
trip and/or under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip device is to be
provided.
D. Rating: 4-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 600 V class, with continuous
current rating (frame size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between 400 A and 4000
A (400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, and 4000 A), fully rated (100%) for service
under worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated for a symmetrical rms service
short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the Drawings, to IEC 947-2 sequence II
(rated service short-circuit breaking capacity) at specified voltage and frequency,
meeting IEC 947-2, sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization
category B), tested in an enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in which
they are to be installed.
E.
Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with
transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to measure sinusoidal and nonsinusoidal
current wave forms (fundamental to thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each
phase through out every cycle. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current
transformer operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external power. It is
to have adjustable current setting (0.5 - 1.0 times trip unit rating) with adjustable longtime delay, short-time pick-up and short-time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay
instantaneous over current pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of
replaceable trip-units within the maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit
breaker is to remain in the trip-free position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range
10% to 60% of normal current rating of the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A,
with adjustable time delay between 0.1 and 0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be
adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with pre-settable or adjustable time band
having maximum delay of 0.3 to 0.5 seconds. Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in
steps at least 2 13 times the trip unit rating. Over-ride protection is to allow full
sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of Circuit Breaker.
E/113

F. Trip Unit shall have the metering functions for each phase comprising:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Voltage.
Frequency.
Energy.
Total power.
Peak power demand.
Trip Unit shall have protective relays including:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Over-voltage
Voltage unbalance.
Current unbalance
Reverse power.
H. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation,
long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over
current trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long
time, short time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
I.
Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator is to be

mechanical and is to give indication even when control power has been lost.
J.
Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase.
Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in
epoxy filled plastic housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be
integrally mounted in breakers.
K. Neutral Current Transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or
outgoing circuit having earth fault protection. Rating and characteristics of the neutral
current transformer are to be suitable for proper operation of the earth fault protection
system.
L. Circuit breaker accessories are to include the following:
1. Padlocking or key-locking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test,
connected, closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. Operations counter.
5. On/off pilot lights.
6. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. Bell alarm for remote over-current trip indication.
M. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for
remote monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
N. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers
(as shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker is to be
disabled in the connect position and an additional electrical push button is to be
provided for the closing of the circuit breaker through the breakers shunt close coil.
The electrical interlock is to be provided on both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit
breaker in order to perform simultaneous tripping and inhibit closing functions on the
interlocked breaker.
2.4
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

A. MCCBs generally are to be thermal-magnetic type for ratings below 400 A frame size,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. MCCBs 400 A and larger are to be
E/114

electronic solid-state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 3-pole unless otherwise
shown on drawings.
B. Construction: Totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at
70 deg. C within enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-make, quickbreak, trip-free switching mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have
common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are to be
non-welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of approved construction.
Cable terminals are to be solder-less anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws
suitable for copper or aluminum cables.
C. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are to include, on each pole, a bi-metallic inverse
time-delay over current trip element for small overloads and instant magnetic over
current trip elements for operation under short-circuit conditions. Circuit breakers 250 A
frame size and larger are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.
D. Thermal over-current trips are to be compensated to allow for ambient temperature
higher at breaker than at protected circuit or device. Compensation is to be applicable
between 25 and 50 deg. C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment
is not to exceed maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
E.
Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay
setting range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time delay
range 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds,
and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid
state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20
and +55 deg. C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is
to be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up with maximum time
delay of 0.2 seconds, and is to be suitable for connection to external current sensor.
Push-to-trip button is to be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
F.
Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by
the handle between on and off positions.
G. Interchangeable Trips: Circuit breakers 250 A to 400 A frame size is to have

interchangeable thermal and electronic trip units.
H. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers are to have sealed covers. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trips are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
I.
Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC 947-2,
sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and maximum trip rating as
shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are
to meet IEC 947-2 test sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization
category B (with intended short time withstand capability).
J.
Accessories: Circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator, control

and interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary
switches, padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
E/115

2.5
METERING INSTRUMENTS
A.
Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation.
Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed.
Accuracy of
instruments is to be within 2% unless otherwise specified or dictated by Kahramaa.
CTs shall be rated and of class stated on drawing and dictated by Kahramaa.
B.
Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal
system voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.

D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with nominal
current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and
secondary fuses and disconnecting device.
I.
2.6
Frequency Meter
POWER FACTOR (PF) CORRECTION

Provide an automatic power factor correction system for each switchboard as shown in the
drawings.
The automatic power factor correction system shall be housed in a separate section of the
switchboard. The enclosure shall be top entry access, forced air cooled, ventilated and
furnished with earthing lugs. An external door operator shall be provided to de-energize the
unit when the door is open. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with key lock
provisions.
Controller shall be a solid state programmable multi-step reactive current sensing unit with
digital display capabilities of power factor, active current, reactive current and number of
energized steps. The controller shall provide the following features:
-
Front panel control buttons for manual capacitor switching.

Programmable capacitor switching delay from 10 seconds to 120 seconds.
Loss of voltage dropout when a 15 ms Power interruption occurs.
Front panel LED indicators for leading or lagging current.
Non-sequential capacitor switching.
The controller of capacitor shall be stepped in 50 KVAR maximum steps.

Fuses shall be provided in each phase of each capacitor. Fuse shall be current limiting
type, installed on the line side of the contractor and have a 80,000 ampere symmetrical
rating. Fuses shall be located to facilitate safe replacement. All capacitor fuses shall be
rated to protect the contractor, capacitor and interconnecting wiring and mounted in 3 pole
fuse blocks and must be replaceable without removal of power wiring.
Torroidal choke coils shall be included in all three phases of each capacitor bank to
minimize the effects of voltage spikes on sensitive electronic equipment. The choke coil
shall be designed to limit the capacitor inrush current to a value equal to or less than the
E/116

capacitor switching rating of the contactor. The toroidal choke coils shall be braced to
withstand a 80,000 symmetrical ampere short circuit.
A blown fuse indicating light shall be provided for each capacitor branch fuse. The neon
light will illuminate when a capacitor branch fuse operates. The neon light shall be door
mounted with an engraved black plastic with 6mm white lettering identifying the branch
capacitor fuse circuit affected.
Capacitors shall be total dry-type self-healing metalized propylene dielectric type with
double insulation and resin casing vacuum. The capacitor shall be completed with built-in
internal protection electric fuse with each coil and overpressure disconnection device. The
operating temperature from 40deg.C to 50degC> the discharging resistor shall be selfcontained for each capacitor. It shall be withstand for voltage overload for 1.18 miminal
voltage for 24hr.day.
Contactors shall be three pole, 600 VAC rated with 240 operating coils. The contactor shall
be capacitor rated to withstand the inrush currents imposed by dynamic capacitor switching.
Main breaker shall be mounted inside the enclosure and have AL/CU terminal lugs, thermal
magnetic trip and door operators handle.
2.7
GROUND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Provide ground fault protection on all circuit breakers whether incoming, outgoing or tie,
which are rated 1000 A or more. Ground fault protection shall be as specified for
particular breaker type used.
2.8
WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards
with suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by bare
copper conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for
multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables
are to be used in proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.
E.
2.9
Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be provided in
switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
E/117

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable
requirements of applicable standards or codes approved.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation
of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings and equipment manufacturers drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and
provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and
components.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
E.
Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases,
cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they
are properly installed.
F.
Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for power and control cables.
H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturers instructions and in accordance with an
approved scheme.
3.3
I.
Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and
two finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as
required by Engineer.
J.
Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
main distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and
emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
IDENTIFICATION
A.

Methods."
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment
with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with ground

continuity to main electrical ground bus.
E/118

B.
3.5
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to
Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types,
sizes, and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturers
torque tightening specification.
D.
Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical
inspection and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the
Engineer may require to check compliance of installation with the Specification,
including, but not limited to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where
possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and
retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check
insulation resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and
between neutral and earth.
F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay
characteristics of circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure
and record all test results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturers
data.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current
primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with
the Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled from
standardized components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are
also to be carried out on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by Engineer.
3.6
CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution boards.
Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
E/119

PANELBOARDS
SECTION 16442
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Panelboards for distribution and subdistribution of electric power and for protection of
circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of
feeders, sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
2. Distribution panelboards.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,
etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on
the Drawings.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
C. LP, PP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power panelboards and subdistribution
panelboards respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either
miniature circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on
sub-feeder or branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
D.
DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB protection on main
incoming and outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.
E.
Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from emergency

source are prefixed with the letter E.
F. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.

G. RMS: Root mean square.
H. CDC:
Change-Over-Contactors board for distribution of power to Apartment final
branch circuit panelboards from two sources: Utility side (already metered by EDL) and
Generator side (metered within the CDC itself).
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected
E/120

2.
Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and

ratings compensation at and above 40 deg C ambient conditions and
corresponding temperatures within the enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations
of circuit breakers.
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine
test records in accordance with the Standards.
1.
Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip
ratings of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and
materials used.
D. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation
of the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
F.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load
balancing.
G. Maintenance Data:
For panelboards and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1
include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective

devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current
protective device.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
IEC 439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".

IEC 947-2 "Molded case circuit breakers"
IEC 898 "Miniature circuit breakers"
Other components where not specified are to comply with the relevant IEC
standards
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other
types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements.
E/121

1.7
SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard
using the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.

Voltage, number of phases and wires.
Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum continuous rating) for
MCCB and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A. Rated insulation voltage is to be in accordance with the respective standards.
B. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 42 for indoor
installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 144, and are to
be factory designed and assembled.
C. Earthing bar is to be half size the phase busbars.
D. Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars.
E. Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
F. Circuit breakers are to be non-fused type.
G. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards are to have one main incoming circuit
breaker and the required number of branch circuit breakers, arranged as shown on the
schedules, including spare circuit breakers and spaces for future expansion. Threephase panelboards are to be designed for sequence phase connection of branch circuit
devices.
H. Branch Circuit Numbering: On 3-phase panelboard schedules, circuits 1 and 2 are to be
connected to red (R) phase, 3 and 4 to yellow (Y) phase, 5 and 6 to blue (B) phase etc.,
to conform to branch circuit numbering shown on the drawings.
2.3
PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B.
Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-galvanized sheet
steel of gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded
joints are to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to the
standards, adequate for the utilized cables/wires subject to the engineers approval and
in no case less than 100 mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or
threaded end studs to support and adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
E/122

C. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by
quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of
box is not acceptable). Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush.
Trims for flush mounted panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20
mm. Trims for surface mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to
box.
D. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder
lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple
point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid
and alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the
approval of Engineer.
F.
Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to be

provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are
specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of load.
G. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5 mm thick,
fully weatherproofed (IP 55), without knockouts, but with removable sealed/gasketed
bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4
BUSBARS
A.
Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or
clamped contact surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding
requirements of the approved standards. Aluminum is not to be used for busbars or
panelboard parts.
B.
Design: Busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch

circuit devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without
additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size without reduction.
Busing and blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices, where
indicated on the drawings.
C. Rating: Busbar rating is to be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size. Where
no main circuit breaker is required, busbars are to have main lugs or disconnect switch,
with nominal rating equal to standard circuit breaker frame sizes, and as shown on the
drawings.
D. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit level
at point of application for one second, without showing any signs of degradation.
E. Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type.
Screws and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to be hard copper
alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
F.
Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less box
type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit and
one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main incoming
neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
E/123

G. Earthing bar is to be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure
connector for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing
conductor, to provide secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and enclosure.
2.5
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

A. Type: Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from
high quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for
normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and
provided with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation
of main contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions.
Multi-pole breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of
all poles. Ampere rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp
type with set screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, circuit
breakers up to and including 400 a frame size, are to be thermal-magnetic type, having
bi-metallic inverse time delay over-current element for small overloads and
instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit
conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers 250 A and larger are to have adjustable
instantaneous trips.
C. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation
so that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or
automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved arcquenching devices of metallic grid construction.
D. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element
is set to operate.
E. MCCBs for LPs, PPs, SDPs and DPs Type 2: Comply with IEC947-2 test sequences I,
II, utilization category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with
preferred ratings in accordance with following tables.
F.
MCCBs for DP Type 1: Rated for maximum voltage of 600v A.C., 250 v D.C. and
utilization category b (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have
rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence ii) with suitably selected frame
sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard
location and schedules shown on the drawings, with declared ratings as percentage
(100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker
manufacturer marked on the circuit breaker rating plate.
G. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which is to be related to
minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting
duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
H. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at
specified voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:
Trip range
frame size(amperes)
Thermal-magnetic
15-100 (1p)
15-100 (2,3p)
15-160 (2,3,4p)
Minimum Symm. rms rated

Rating
breaking capacity (ultimate in kA) volts(A.C.)
N
H
L
18
18
35
60
E/124
100
220/240
380/415
380/415

70-250 (2,3,4p)
160-400 (2,3,4p)
Electronic
400-800 (2,3p)
800-1250 (2,3p)
35
35
60
60
100
100
380/415
380/415
40
50
60
65
100
100
380/415
380/415
I.
Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by
the handle between on and off positions.
J.
Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers 250 A frame size to 400 A
frame size are to have interchangeable trip units.
K. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
L.
Compensation: Thermal over-current trips are to be ambient temperature compensated

between 25 and 50 deg C.
M. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 400 A frame size and larger, are to
be solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip
rating, short time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum
clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10
times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in
ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg C. Earth fault protection is to be built
into trip unit where specified, and is to be suitable for connection to external current
sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
N. Accessories: Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard
attachments including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm
switches, and electrical operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and
over. Padlocking devices are to be provided, where shown on the Drawings.
O. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) (GFCI) are provided as
add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown on the
Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current and shortcircuit protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on
breakers for branch circuits is to be 10 mA, and for main breakers ratings are to be as
shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers are to include current transformer with
tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker
cannot be held closed against earth faults.
P.
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When
operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is to be less than
1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with
breaker construction.
Q. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse timedelay over-current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for
short-circuit protection. Operation of main contacts is to be based on Electro-magnetic
repulsion forces between contacts created by fault current. Ratings are specified at
rated voltage for an rms value of prospective short-circuits current.
2.6
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 898.
B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities (to IEC 947-2) are to be as follows:
E/125

1. 6 - 100 a MCB:
6, 10 or 16 kA at 240/415 v A.C.
C. Construction: MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to

70 degree C within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and are to be
constructed from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating materials.
Guaranteed duties and characteristics are to be submitted for temperatures above 40
deg C.
D. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of
insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip is to operate at 7 10 times normal rated current (type 3 characteristic). Magnetic operation is to be in the
current limiting region and opening time is not to exceed 5 milliseconds.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 and 100
a, calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating
above 40 deg C is not to exceed 1% per deg C and loading is not to exceed 70% of
circuit breaker rating.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on
devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker.
Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 10mA, 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA are to be available for all ratings of
2-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers. RCDs used in final branch circuit panelboards shall
be rated for personnel protection and shall have a 10mA sensitivity.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.
2.7
MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)

A.
2.8
Molded Case Switch: Non-automatic on/off switching device of equal construction to

equivalent circuit breaker, having no over-current or fault protective elements, but
marked with maximum current withstand and voltage rating.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (DP)

A. DP Type 1: Form 1 to IEC439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 1000V and a
rated operational voltage of 600V A.C., 240 V D.C., surface mounted to wall or free
standing , with doors (unless otherwise shown on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of
main breaker and busbars ranging from 225 A to 1200 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire
where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly arranged for any selected
combination of branch MCCBs ranging from 150 A to 1200 A frame size and shortcircuit interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 225
A frame size, where indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted
to main chassis.
B.
DP Type 2: Form 1 to IEC439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 750V and a
rated operational voltage of 440V A.C., 240 V D.C. Panelboard is to be recessed or
surface mounted type, as shown on the Drawings, complete with trim and door,
adjustable trim fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of main circuit breaker and
busbars of 100 A, 225/250 A, 400 A or 600 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch
circuit breakers, 100 A or 150/160 A frame size for voltages up to 600 V A.C., and 100
A to 225 A frame size at 240 V A.C.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and minimum 2 mm
thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin covers to shield circuit
breakers, terminals and live ends.
E/126

D. Interior of panelboard is to be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel
chassis minimum 2 mm thick, folded, flanged and reinforced, with busbars vertically
arranged and mounted on molded insulators.
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation
grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.
F.
2.9
Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit
breakers) and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.
FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUB-DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS GENERALLY

A. Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile
and base, and one main circuit breaker. Single and multi-pole circuit breakers or other
devices are to occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-bus
arrangement or other devices is not to change regularity of standard box width.
B. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum 1.5
mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim are to be adjustable to
allow for mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces (gutters) are to
be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided where tap-off insulated split
connectors are required. Knockouts are to be provided in top or bottom of enclosures
and are to provide a neat and uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.
2.10
FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUBDISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS - TYPE

MCCB
A.
Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 750V and a rated operational voltage of 600V
A.C. .250 V D.C. single-phase and neutral (SPN) or 3-phase and neutral (TPN), with
bolted 1, 2, or 3-pole MCCBs on branch circuits and 2, 3 or 4-pole MCCB on main
incoming, listed by UL File No. E2269 or equal, and meeting USA Specification W-P115b Type 1 Class 1.
B. Branch circuit breakers are to be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with trip ratings
between 15 A and 100 A, and compatible ICs, selected from normal (N), high-break (H)
or current-limiting (L) range.
C. Main circuit breaker is to be 2 or 3-pole 100 A, or 2, 3 or 4-pole 160 A, 225/250 A or
400 A continuous rating (frame size), with trip ratings and fully rated non-current limiting
ICs of normal (N) or high-break (H) ranges, with or without residual current device
(RCD) as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Assembly: Busbars are to be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan in vertical
arrangement. Branch circuit breakers are to be bolted in twin arrangement to rigid
copper cross and center bus connectors. Back pan assembly is to be removable and
fixed to four threaded studs integral with cabinet.
2.11
FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB

A. Type:
600V.
B.
Rated insulation voltage rating of 600V and a rated operational voltage of
Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one
piece insulated bolt-on/comb-type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3phase with spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker.
Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current
E/127

for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the
Standards. Panelboards are to comply with BS 5486 Part 12.
C. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
busbars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and onepiece insulated phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade
connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to be
high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second
without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards.
D. SPN type panelboards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltages, singlephase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.
E. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without earth leakage
device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
F. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6
A and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.
G. TPN type panelboards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage,
3-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole MCB or MCCB main
incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.
H. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with
IC as required in the Schedules.
I.
TPN type panelboard main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A continuous
current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB with trip range 70 A
to 225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without RCD as shown on the
Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure
2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring
supporting members do not prevent flow of air
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.
B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet
have been completed.
C. Wiring inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent
tension on circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type,
fully insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush
with wall surface finish.
E. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application
of waterproof compound prior to installation.
E/128

F. Mounting Heights:
indicated.
Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise
G. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to
create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
I.
3.2
3.3
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
IDENTIFICATION
A.

Methods".
B.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminatedplastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main
electrical ground bus.
B.
3.4
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published


A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and
standards. Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by
use of a megger.
B. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually.
Check automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by
applying necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit
breaker as applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves.
Measure and report ambient temperature inside enclosure.
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth.
Record all
readings, using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for
equipment on systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
E. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F.
Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
E/129
3.5
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove

paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
E/130

BUSDUCTS
SECTION 16466
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Busducts and fittings
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each component. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting
position, mounting method, vertical supports, materials, fire stops, and weather stops.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of busways, including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction
elements.
Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and
panelboards. Detail supports and connections to building.
D. Coordination drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to accurate scale.
Submit with shop drawings.
Show busway layout and relationships between
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.
Show support
locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field
measurements.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with
project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information
specified.
F.
Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with
specified requirements.
G. Full type test certificates ampacity, temperature performance, short circuit, high
voltage, etc.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Quality Control Services," an independent testing agency shall be ASTA or
approved equal.
B. Comply with IEC 439 Parts 1 & 2 for materials construction.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
E/131

D. Single-Source Responsibility: All busway components shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
1.5

A. Deliver in fully enclosed vehicles and store in spaces with controlled ambient.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
Verify existing dimensions by field measurements.
Verify
clearances and locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances of
busway.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
BUSDUCTS
A. General
1. The busducts system shall be of low impedance and sandwiched typed technology.
It shall be totally enclosed prelacquered galvanised steel sheet with copper
conductors; suitable for a 3 phase 4 conductor 415 volts system with full neutral
and continuous internal copper earth bar of half size.
2. The system shall be complete with all necessary fittings, tap-off unit brackets, etc.
All busducts fittings (elbow, tees, end Cable Tap Box, etc.) shall be IP54 (IP65 for
wet areas and areas exposed to outdoor ambient condition) in accordance to IEC
529 and from the same manufacturer as the busbar trunking system.
3.
The busducts system shall be capable of being mounted in any position without
derating. Plug-in and feeder sections shall be interchangeable without the use of
special adapter joint covers. The complete installation shall be coordinated
throughout and where possible, shall consist of standard 4m sections with special
sections and fittings provided to suit the installation.
4. Horizontal runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers at every 2

meters. Vertical runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers not
more than 4m apart.
5. Busducts shall have Class F insulation with polyester film or equivalent.
6. Provide expansion means of seismic effects with stand.
7. Busducts system shall be terminated by end closure.
8.
The adequacy of busducts to meet the thermal and building movement stresses
shall be verified and proven by the manufacturer.
B. Conformity To Standard
1. It shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the latest
IEC 439 Part 1 and Part 2.
E/132

2.
Conservation of the integrity of electrical circuits under fire conditions and

verification of fire barrier in accordance of the latest ISO 1182.and ISO 834
3. Resistance to flame propagation conforming IEC 60332 Part 3.

4. Resistance of the materials to abnormal heat conforming IEC 60695 Part 2.
C. Environment
1.
The busducts system selection and size shall be suitable for continuous operation
without derating at an average ambient temperature of 50o C for 24h (55C
maximum). Ratings stated on drawings refer to ratings at 48C ambient.
D. Conductors
1. Conductors shall be of hard drawn 99.9% purity electrolitic copper Cu-ETP. Copper
live conductors shall be insulated by multiple layers of class F 155C insulation.
2.
Full size neutral of the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductor shall be
provided for all ratings of the busducts.
3. The busducts system shall have the following characteristics:

Paint Finish
Rated Insulation Voltage (A/C)
RAL 7032
:
Rated Operating Voltage (A/C)
1000 Volts
1000 Volts
Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2/50s) :
8 kV at 2000m
Frequency
50Hz
E. Protective Conductor
1. Integral continuous internal copper conductor of cross-section area equal to 50%
that of the corresponding phase conductor shall be provided.
F. Short Circuit Capacity
1.
The whole busducts system shall be capable of withstanding at least 100 kA as

well as the short circuit capacity of the electrical installation without damaging the
electrical, mechanical and thermal stress under fault condition at a service voltage
of 415V 50Hz. Co-ordination of the distribution should be guaranteed such that the
Circuit breaker / trunking combination will limit the peak current to a value less than
the rated peak current of the busducts.
The busbar trunking shall be designed and constructed for use on a 415V, 3-phase
4-wire, 50 Hz system. The minimum rated insulation voltage shall be 1000V. Each
rating of busbar trunking shall be ASTA type tested and certified for short circuit
ratings for one second covering phase, neutral, earth conductor and the housing as
an additional protective conductor.
Copies of ASTA test certificates shall be provided to the Engineer for each rating.
E/133
The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the busducts trunking shall be as
follows:
Rating
800A
1000A
1250A
1600A
2000A
2500A
kA/1 Sec.
35
50
60
70
88
88
kA Peak
74
105
132
154
194
194
KA, N & PE
21
30
36
42
53
53
G. Temperature Rise
1.
The maximum hot-spot temperature rise at any point of the busducts enclosure at
continuous rated load shall not exceed 55o C above the maximum ambient
temperature of 50o C in any position.
H. Expansion Joint
1. Busbar expansion units shall be use in cases when it crosses a building expansion
joint or as recommended by the vendor to reduce the stress on the system by
differential expansion between the bursbars and the casing; particularly for long run
of the busbar.
2.
I.
It shall be consist of a flexible joint in the middle on the conductors and a sliding
casing in 2 sections which can absorb the relative movements of each section of
the length.
Joints
1.
All busbar contacts (connection joints or tap off unit jaws) shall be of silver plated
copper.
2. The electrical joints shall be of one or two bolt type designed for even distribution of
contact pressure and with inspection covers provided on each side of the joint and
can be dismantled to facilitate removal or extension.
J.
3.
It shall be possible to make up a joint from one side in the event that the busbar
trunking system is installed against a wall or ceiling. The joints shall be so designed
as to allow removal of any length without disturbing adjacent lengths.
4.
Belleville spring or similar device shall be provided to give positive pressure over
complete contact wear. The tightening torque shall be dictated by the manufacturer,
and the bolt shall include an external breakable head which breaks when the
correct torque is reach.
Enclosure
1.
The metal enclosure of the busbar trunking system shall be of 1.5mm thick hot dip
galvanised sheet steel to provide high protection and mechanical resistance for the
phase conductors along the entire length.
2. Resistance to corrosion shall meet the following test:

Tropical test
Salted Marine Fog
: 1000 hours
: 360 hours
E/134

3.
Both vertical and horizontal runs of busbar trunking system shall be of degree of
protection to IP 44. The enclosure shall be made of four steel sections assembled
by clinching.
4. In order to limit magnetic field around the busbar system, aluminium enclosures are
not acceptable.
K. Tap-Off Outlets
1.
Tap-off outlets for horizontal distribution busway shall be able to open and close
automatically when plug-in units are plugged in or removed. When the cover is
opened, no live part can be accessed and the degree of protection provided shall
be at least IP52, with no additional accessories.
L. Tap-off unit
1.
Tap-off units shall be from the same manufacturer as the busbar trunking system
and shall be provided with off-load isolator suitable for fuses or circuit breakers
according to ratings as indicated in the drawings.
2.
All circuit breakers used shall be able to operate normally when mounted upside
down or at any angles. The tap-off units shall also have the provision to mount the
earth fault relay together with the breaker. Tap-off units shall be of dust and damp
proof version, degree of protection IP 54 with silver plated contacts suitable for all
ratings of busbar and shall be suitably earthed.
3.
The earthing contact of the tap-off unit shall always be made before that of the live
conductors and the last to break during removal.
4.
The tap-off unit and the busbar trunking system shall be interlocked to ensure that
the device is in the OFF position prior to installation or removal of the unit.
5. The tap-off unit shall have an interlock which prevents the cover from being opened
while the device is in the ON position and to prevent accidental closing of the
device when the cover is opened.
M. Voltage drop along the busduct system
1.
The line-to-line voltage drop of the 3 phase 415V 50HZ, under evenly distributed
load at power factor of 0.8 lagging, shall not be over the following values:
The maximum voltage drop, maximum resistance, maximum fire load and heat losses
should be as follows:
Nominal
Current A
Max voltage drop

with distributed
load at 0.9
PF(V/m/A)
Max phase
resistance at
20oC m /m
Fire Load
KWH/m
Maximum heat
losses at nominal
current W/m
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
43
42
38
29
24
18
0.033
0.032
0.029
0.022
0.018
0.014
4.8
5.8
6.2
8.5
10.0
11.0
85
125
175
225
270
360
E/135

N. Test Reports/Certificates
1.
Test Reports/Certificates by recognised independent test laboratories (such as

ASTA Certificate Services, ASEFA, KEMA) on the proposed equivalent type of
busbar trunking system must be submitted to prove compliance with the
specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install busway level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, shop
drawings, and referenced standards.
B. Support busway independently from supports for other elements such as pipe, conduit,
ceilings, and ducts.
1.
Design each fastener and support to carry 200 pounds (90 kg) or 4 times the
supported weight of the busway, whichever is greater.
2. Support busway with not less than 3/8-inch (10-mm) steel rods. Install side bracing
to prevent swaying or movement of busway. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
3.
Support busway independently from equipment enclosure at connections to

panelboards and switchboards.
C. Coordinate busway terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,

connection, and closure.
D. Tighten busway joints with torque wrench or similar tool recommended by busway
manufacturer. Retighten joints after busways have been energized for 30 days.
E.
3.2
Connect busway and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL
Standard 486A.

A. Testing Agency: Owner will employ and pay an independent testing agency to perform
specified field quality-control testing.
B. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to
perform specified field quality-control testing.
C. Testing:
After installing busway and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
stated in NETA Standard ATS, Section 7.4. Investigate any insulation resistance
reading less than 100 megohms divided by busway length in feet (30 megohms
divided by busway length in meters). Certify compliance with test parameters.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
E/136

3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Align busway runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists.
additional stiffeners if required to restrict excessive movement.
3.4
Provide
CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged
finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.5
COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan
of busway including joints and plug-in units.
1.
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detects

significant deviations from normal values.
Provide documentation of device
calibration.
2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of busduct 4 months and 11 months after

3.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.7
Prepare a certified report identifying busduct checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
rescanning observations after remedial action.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
Manufacturer and Installer to ensure that moisture does not enter busway prior to
E/137

INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 16511
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior
building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and
connection to circuit wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.

1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions,
operating characteristics and principles
Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and
to the Specification
Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
Dimensions of fixtures.
Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical
ratings and photometric data.
Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric
performance.
Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and
sound transmission class.
Types of lamps.
Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
Wiring details, circuit and panelboard references, special lighting control
arrangements etc.
Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,
method of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Detail wiring for
fixtures and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required,
together with color and texture samples of each fixture.
E/138

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and
coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other
components in the vicinity. Include work of all trades that is to be installed near lighting
equipment.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that products
F. Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying
that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are
used.
G. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with
the Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 598 and CISPR 15.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans
are to be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural
members, ducts, pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required.
Certain fixtures are shown in provisional positions, pending preparation of final
equipment layout drawings. Such fixtures are to be located in coordination with final
equipment layout so that illumination is as intended by the design.
B.
1.6
Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting
fixtures with ceiling system and other construction.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on Drawings.
E/139

2.2
LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL

A.
Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label is to be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
B. Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting Fixture

Schedules shown on the Drawings, or equal.
C. Sheet Steel Housings: Not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required by the
Specification or the Standards.
D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. Aluminum Reflectors: Not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless otherwise approved.
F. Fabrication: Metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs.
Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during
fabrication. Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with
corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat
before application of final finish.
H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on
fixture frames and trims are to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I.
Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor
not less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished,
anodized aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J.
Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and
cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling
or loosening from base metal.
K. Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Finish is to withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultraviolet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping,
and is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
L.
Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified
materials to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 1.5 mm2, and insulated for 240 V application.
Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside
fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, terminal blocks.
N. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges
and catches, and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable
products may be submitted for approval.
O. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
P. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or
ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
E/140

R. Removal of parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.
2.3
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A.
Lamp Holders Generally: To IEC 400, heavy duty, molded white plastic with noncorroding spring contacts.
B. Lamp Holders for Industrial Fittings: Spring loaded turret type, heavy duty, dust
protected.
C. Ballasts Generally: To IEC 82. Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to be used in any
one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag, series type. Equipment is to be
enclosed in sheet steel casing with corrosion resistant finish.
D. Ballast thermosetting compound is not to soften, liquify or support combustion under
any operating condition or upon ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and
dampen vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to
exceed 55 deg. C above maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg. C.
E. Ballast Protection: Each ballast is to have one-time external fuse and fuse holder rated
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Ballast Type: Switch start, rapid start or dimming type, as stated in fixture description
and as shown on the Drawings, power factor corrected to above 0.9, having
manufacturer's lowest case temperature. Sound rating is not to exceed level given in
the Standards.
G. Ballast Rating: Ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp it
controls and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and frequency equal
to nominal voltage and frequency of distribution network.
H. Capacitors: To IEC 566, having snap-type connectors and fastening, bolt type M8, for
fixing to fixture.
2.4
I.
Starters, if required, are to comply with IEC 155, and are to be selected in conjunction
with respective ballast and lamp.
J.
Electronic ballasts for use on 26 mm and 38 mm diameter krypton or argon filled tubes
are to be used in conjunction with electronic dimming controls. Dimming is to be
possible down to 5% of normal output. Ballasts are to be as manufactured by Helvar or
Osram or other equal and approved, with service life in excess of 10000 hours.
INCANDESCENT LAMP FIXTURES

A. Incandescent Lamp Sockets: To IEC 61 and IEC 238, high-grade porcelain; E27 (ES)
screw sockets for lamps not exceeding 200 W and E40 (GES) screw sockets for lamps
300 W and over.
2.5
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMP FIXTURES
A. Type: Fixtures are to be complete units including integral ballasts (and ignitors for HPS
lamps where indicated) and lamps of required number and type, and are to have
lighting distribution characteristics equivalent to model and manufacturer indicated in
the fixture description.
B.
Accessories: Fixtures are to have mounting accessories, such as suspension rods or

chains, rails or brackets, and protective glass covers with gaskets for protection against
dust and humidity or type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the location.
E/141

C. Ballasts and ignition devices are to be power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging, and type specially selected for lamp type and size used. Lamp is to be able to
start with at least +/-10% variation from nominal line volt-age and continue in normal
operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to ensure there is
no great increase in operating current during starting and that gear losses do not
exceed 10% of normal wattage. RF suppression circuit is to be provided.
2.6
LED TYPE FIXTURES
A.
Type: Fixtures are to be complete units including LED drivers and bulb of required
number and type and are to have lighting distribution characteristics equivalent to the
model and manufacturer indicated in the lighting fixture schedule. Minimum protection
rating IP 20 is required.
B. Accessories: Fixtures are to have mounting accessories as required for the installation
such as brackets, rails, protective glass cover with protection against dust; humidity or
any type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the location.
2.7
LAMPS
A.
Rated voltage of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to nominal voltage of

distribution network. Lamps with different rated voltages are not acceptable.
B. Incandescent Lamps for General Lighting Service (GLS): To have screw base type ES
for lamps 200 W and below and type GES for lamps 300 W and above. Inside frosted
(IF) lamps are to be used unless otherwise specified. Guaranteed rated life is to be
above 800 hours and luminous output above the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
950 lumens for 75 W lamps

3100 lumens for 300 W lamps.
C. Reflector Lamps (R): For indoor and outdoor use, with silver reflector and prismatic
lens. Light beam is to be narrow (spot), wide (flood) or extra-wide (wide flood) as
indicated in the fixture description.
D. Tungsten-Halogen Lamps: Tubular, quartz, resistant to high temperatures. Guaranteed
rated life is to be above 2000 hours and luminous output above the following:
1. 9500 lumens for 500 W lamps
3. 44000 lumens for 2000 W lamps.
E. Straight Tubular Fluorescent Lamps: To IEC 81 (SSA 138 and SSA 139) and, unless
otherwise specified, are to be switch start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture
description and with improved fluorescent internal coating. Color of light is to be 'superb
quality white' equal to Philips Nb 84 unless otherwise specified. Lamps are to be low
energy type with tube diameter 26 mm. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000
hours and luminous output above the following:
1. 1300 lumens for 18 W lamps (600 mm long)
3. 5200 lumens for 58 W lamps (1500 mm long).
F.
Straight Tubular T5 Fluorescent Lamps: operated with electronic control gear. Color
rendering index 85. Lamps are to be low energy type with tube diameter 16 mm.
Guaranteed rated life is to be above 10,000 hours and luminous output above the
following:
E/142

G. Circular Fluorescent Lamps: 32 W, 305 mm diameter, or 60 W, 406 mm diameter as
shown on the Drawings.
H. SL Lamps: Compact, low pressure, discharge lamps, integral with control gear, housed
in opal prismatic glass bulb, with ES screw base, and rated as indicated in the fixture
description. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and luminous output, for
clear prismatic lamps, above the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Lamps are to be type SL as manufactured by Philips or other equal and approved.

I.
PL-C Compact Lamps: Single ended, compact-miniature lamp, consisting of four

narrow fluorescent tubes welded together, with integral instant starter and capacitor and
with special two-pin plug-in base and socket. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000
hours and luminous output above the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
600 lumens for 10 W lamps (95 mm long)

1800 lumens for 26 W lamps (170 mm long).
Lamps are to be type PLC as manufactured by Osram, Philips or other equal and
approved, with warm color impression.
J.
High Pressure Mercury Vapor Lamps: To IEC 188, and to include quartz discharge tube
in an internally coated ovoid outer tube. Coating is to be yttrium vanadate phosphor
with color temperature of 3300 deg. K. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours
and luminous output above the following:
K. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Type Sont (tubular), with guaranteed average rated life
(down to 80% output) above 10000 hours, and having initial luminous output above the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
L.

Metal Halide Lamps: Comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hardglass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide
additives indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in
three spectral bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high color rendering. Lamps are
to be to IEC 188 with E40 base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than 10000
hours and luminous outputs, after 100 hours burning, are to be above the following:

E/143

Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C, and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp burning position for 2000 W, 220 V
lamp is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
M. LED Bulbs - Guaranteed rated life is to be 50,000 hrs @ 250C ambient temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final
height adjustment after installation.
B. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of
hangers etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on
outlet boxes to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for
proper installation. Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud
for individually mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
C. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures.
Stems are to have suspension aligners and are to be of suitable length for suspending
fixtures at required height.
D. Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures
without strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
E. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture
dimensions and structural elements.
F.
Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
G. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or
structure when left unused.
H. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
I.
Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the
design of the fixture.
J.
Earth metal frames of as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
K. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed,
and completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather conditions.
L.
Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to
hand-over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not
to be used for final lamping of fixtures.
E/144

M. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in
each fixture.
N. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
3.2
INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A. Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and
nameplates etc.
B. Illumination Measurements: Taken at selected locations, to determine level and
uniformity.
C. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
D. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with
discharge lamps.
E. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
F. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
G. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
H. Tests: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
Report results in writing.
I.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest.

procedure until units operate properly.
J.
Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.
Repeat
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E/145

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 16521
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts,
poles/support structures, and accessories and related power distribution and control,
protective earthing and related builder's work including column foundations, cable pits,
cable trenches and ductwork.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts,
emergency lighting units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally
mounted on buildings.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common

support, including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.
B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and

ballast(s), when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position
and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for
approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and control
gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material
specification, overall dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any
modification to a standard product if applicable
Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape,
base/mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and
calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker etc.
Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of
utilization, efficiency and depreciation factors.
Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and
photometric data.
Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric
performance.
High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts.
E/146

1.
Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details,

concrete foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of ductbanks and trenches, backfill and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution,
protection and control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.
C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of luminaire or other materials or components if
required by Engineer.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the
applicable local regulations and design standards.
1.6
B.
Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written
C.
Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and

derated for continuous and trouble-free service at 50 deg. C ambient temperature and
100% relative humidity, with temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct sunlight and with
high content of ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst
exposed to sun.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

A.
Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and
vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air
circulation.
B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation.
Handle poles with web fabric straps.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole
unit) of installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers,
special bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage
or failure.
B.
contents.
1.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
E/147

3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on plans.
LIGHTING COLUMNS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel,
electrically welded, and of height specified. Columns up to 12-m height are to be one
piece section. Columns above 12 m and up to 20-m height may be supplied in two
piece sections, of the slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical
alignment of column after assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3
mm at base. Sheet steel is to have minimum rupturing resistance of 37 kg/mm2 and
minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2.
B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other
arrangement required, supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings.
Bracket arrangement is to be designed to ensure that failure, due to wind induced
oscillations, does not occur and that rotation from desired alignment is not possible.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to
be designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most
unfavorable direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped.
Fatigue of steel is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic
stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly
welded onto lower edge of column as shown on the Drawings, and is to have specified
number of holes for holding down bolts together with central cable access hole not less
than 150 mm diameter.
D. Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column base and is to
be suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable terminations and protective
device.
Door is to be flush fitting with retaining mechanism and positive locking
arrangement with removable hexagonal key.
Column is to be reinforced at door
opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to accept
appropriate equipment is to be fixed to inside of column by purpose-made brackets.
Stainless steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column
near the access door.
E.
Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and outside surfaces of
column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel
components of columns to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness
of zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column.
Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91 121 or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be
rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust
converter to the satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of
column base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.
F.
Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected over
one phase and neutral. Columns with three or more luminaires are to be connected
over 3 phases and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals
and cable lugs are to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and
outgoing 3 phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings. One circuit
E/148

breaker, single pole 6 A is to be provided for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit
breakers are to be compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient with interrupting
capacity of at least 9 kA, and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at
baseboard. Wiring is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor
temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm2 copper conductor.
G. Lighting poles shall be provided with a loop-in and loop-out junction box, complete with
circuit for each phase leading to a luminaire.
2.3
FLOODLIGHTS
A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 64 of IEC 529.
B.
Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy, closed on front by hinged framed
protector highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks, and set in position by at
least eight heavy duty stainless steel spring clamps with silicon sealing gasket.
Enclosure is to be in accordance with IEC Publication 598-2-5 and BS 4533-102.5, and
is to be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature of 70 deg. C.
C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision
aligned internal tracks to provide beam distribution required.
D. Connection box is to be located at rear of floodlight body with gland connections to
accept 4 mm2 PVC/PVC three core cable. Lamp and control gear to be mounted in two
separate and isolated compartments.
E.
Control Gear: Plug-in type, 240 V, 50 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging. Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps
selected. Ignitors are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp is to be able to start with at
least +/-10% line voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds.
Compensation is to ensure that there is no large increase in operating current during
starting. Control gear losses are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in
control gear compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm2 copper conductors with high
temperature insulation and sheath.
F.
Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with corrosion and heat
resistant paint, resisting operating temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is
burning.
G. Mounting: Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and mounted on

specially designed brackets to allow swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly
in final position. Protractor scale is to be provided for accurate setting.
H. Earthing Terminals: Bolted earthing terminal is to be provided in each fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Equipment: Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and
repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no
changes are to be made without the approval of Engineer.
B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.
C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless
steel or cadmium plated.
E/149

D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical
profile of road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be secured
to the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to longitudinal axis
of road.
E. Install poles as follows:
1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding
concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space.
5. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
F.
Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and

supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.
G. Mounting Adjustments: After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting

requirements have been met, carry out final setting and locking in position of the
floodlights.
H. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
3.2
I.
Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Replace malfunctioning lamps.
J.
Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly buried except at crossings
with other service work or roads.
INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A.
Visual inspection is to include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment,

quality of workmanship, alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in
conformance with the Specification.
B. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece
of equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps
not installed.
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with
lamps installed, including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of
each circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
D. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to
include measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated surfaces.
E. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with
the Specification.
F.
Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at

final points of circuits and continuity of protective conductors.
G. Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.

H. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
E/150

I.
Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing
luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
1. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated.
Use calibrated photometers.
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
3. Check excessively noisy ballasts.
J.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating

and interpreting results.
K. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest.

procedure until units operate properly.
3.3
Repeat
CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Equipment:
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."
1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.
Connect luminaires to grounding system with conductor as shown on plans or in
accordance with Regulations.
3.4

A. Clean units after installation.
manufacturer.
Use methods and materials recommended by
B. Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide
required light distributions and intensities.
E/151

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
SECTION 16739
1.1.-
General
The entire building shall be provided with a complete sound management system consisting of
voice alarm/evacuation, public address and background music system.
The Contractor shall appoint specialist system supplier and installer to carry out installation,
testing and commissioning of the system.
The location of speakers and equipment are indicated on drawings.
The specialist system supplier shall lay the cables/wires in trunking or conduit as detailed in the
drawings to complete the system.
The contractor shall supply, install all equipment, accessories and materials complete in strict
compliance with the specification and drawings.
1.1.1.- The system shall be integrated with the fire detection system and be capable of providing public
address and background music of a high quality. The primary function of this system shall be to
provide voice evacuation, voice alert and security warning. However, public address and
background music facilities shall be provided as well. The system shall be centralized based on a
concept of modular construction, each system function shall be carried out by a series of
pluggable modules.
1.1.2.- The system offered shall be compatible to be integrated with Building Management System to
monitor the status continuously.
1.1.3.- The voice alarm, public address and back ground music shall be supplied as an integrated
system by the same manufacturer.
1.1.4.- In the event of a fire alarm, the automatic Cause and Effects function shall be initiated providing
multi-channel staged alarms via true speech reproduction messages and tones. Once the
automatic Cause and Effects has been initiated, the user/fire officer shall have the total flexibility
to control the incident as necessary. This shall be achieved via the fire alarm control panel.
1.1.5.- The fire alarm control panel shall provide a complete overview of the Systems Cause and Effects
by illuminating active push buttons, which shall have priority to ensure that a minimum level of
alarm is maintained whilst a fire alarm signal is still present.
1.1.6.- The system operation shall be achieved from the multi-zoned paging system accepting
microphone, or automatically initiated from the fire alarm control panel with option of selection.
1.1.7.- A series of monitored voice alarm (VA) loops shall be installed throughout the building. The VA
shall be installed into segregated zones. Each VA zone shall comprise of a twin circuit
intermittently wired. This is to provide a high level of protection so that if one circuit fails
evacuation procedures can be maintained.
1.1.8.- The specialist equipment supplier will be responsible for ascertaining final surface acoustic
properties, the reverberation times associated with each space and providing a PA/BGM system
to provide clear intelligible speech and music in all areas.
1.1.9.- The PA/BGM systems will comply fully with the requirements of NFPA 72 and BS 5839 part 8
with no detriment to the quality of audio output.
E/152
1.1.10- The Public Address / Voice Alarm (PAVA SYSTEM) shall provide clear announcements during
public addressing and one-way voice communication during an emergency; the secondary
function shall be to provide background music where required.
The Public Address and Voice Alarm System shall:
Be designed to make manual and automatic public broadcasts of routine, situational,

important and emergency announcements.
Be designed to broadcast background music to all or selected locations.
Deliver clear, un-distorted announcements to selected areas during public addressing.
Deliver clear, un-distorted paging to all zones, either individually or collectively. Selection
of groups of zones shall be programmable.
Be designed to provide control and priority setting for all announcements.
Be a networked sound management, digital system providing digital audio signal
processing capability and transmission of audio signals via a simple network.
Be capable of using web-based technology for the access, diagnostic and configuration
of the system components and system functions. However, It shall also be possible to
use the system as a standalone, with or without a PC.
Be modular in design to enable system expansion.
Be designed to be fail-safe such that a break in the system does not affect the system
performance or induce a failure in another. It shall be configured in a closed loop for
redundancy to ensure that the audio path is always available.
Be able to broadcast emergency announcement to all areas in the event where Network
and/or PA Controller fail.
Provide a high level Interface to a Security Management System (SMS) for interfacing
with other subsystems for announcement broadcast or alarm broadcast.
Be designed to work continuously, 24hours a day and 7 days a week, throughout its life
1.1.11.- The contractor shall appoint an Audio/Video System Specialist for the design, supply, install, test,
and commission of the AV System comprising but not limited to Equipment Racks, AV Equipment, pipes,
cables, speakers, projectors, smart boards, plasma monitors, in accordance with the basic requirements
shown in the tender drawings for a complete functional acceptable system.
1.2.-
VA Control
1.2.1.- All modules within the VA system shall be duplicated and interactive, they shall be continually
monitored for any trouble conditions. The System shall have diagnostic display to assist the
user/engineer in fault finding in the event of a failure.
1.2.2.- The following functions shall be available to the user/engineer:
- Display Status of Amplifiers
- Display Status of Data Loop
- Display Control Interface Software
- Display Isolated Devices
- Display Loop Settings
- Set Alarm Test and Reset
- Set Alarm Test to a particular Zone or group
- Force Check Handset Operation
- Select and Control Sub-Masters
- Reset Individual or Global Units
E/153

1.3.-
System Control and Supervision
1.3.1.- The system shall have a Common Audio Module to regulate the input power via
dual current limited regulators, to provide isolation of power on all channels. A
fault causing excessive current draw from a single channel power source shall not
disable the other channel power sources.
1.3.2.- An open or short circuit in the microphone audio circuit or an open on the keying
(push to talk) circuit shall light the associated LED and shall sound the common
fault signal.
1.3.3.- All channels shall constantly monitored. Each tone generators, pre-amplifiers, and
tone control amplifiers shall be supervised for output degradation to approximately 75% of
normal. If this level is achieved an LED shall illuminate and the common audible fault signal shall
sound.
1.4.-
Digital Voice
1.4.1.- The Digital Voice Module shall automatically sound a pre-encoded message and
tones upon alarm activation. It shall store a digitized recording of an actual human
voice. When an alarm or message test condition arises, the digital information shall
be reconverted to analogue mode and pre-amplified to sound completely natural.
The digital messages shall be stored on plug-in EPROM chips, which shall be
recorded at the manufacturers works.
1.4.2.- The Module shall be programmed to start after an adjustable delay of 0-8
seconds, during which time the alert tone shall be transmitted to the speakers. The
message shall be capable of 32 seconds duration and shall be repeated at the end of
the delay or after the tones.
1.4.3.- The message shall be stored and replayed in Arabic, as well as in English.
1.4.4.- When live voice communication is used, the system microphone shall be
automatically overridden and take priority over the pre-recorded message or tones.
At the conclusion of the live voice transmission, the system shall revert to an alert
tone, eliminating the possibility of conflicting instructions.
1.4.5.- The audio output level shall be monitored constantly for proper signal strength.
If the signal is missing or falls below a pre-set level for a specific length of time,
the system shall revert to the alert tone or transfer to a stand-by DV Module.
1.4.6.- The batteries and charger shall maintain the entire system, plus 20% for a minimum
period of 24 hours stand-by, in the event of mains failure. After 24 hours has
elapsed the system shall be capable of initiating a full global alert and evacuate for
a minimum period of 30 minutes.
1.5.-
Public Address
The system shall provide public address capabilities. The PA shall be zoned in the
same configuration as the VA system. A fully selectable paging microphone shall
be provided within the security room. Additional paging microphones shall be provided as
required.
1.5.1.
The PAVA SYSTEM proposed shall be a fully digital system and it shall be inter-connected using
the Structured Cabling system within the Building.
E/154

The audio transport from the microphone position to the power amplifier shall be in digital audio
and up to the amplifier circuit before it is converted to analog audio. All audio processing shall be
done in the digital domain.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be a networked configuration with the following system elements:
Network Controller (NC) which controls and monitors all activities in the system.
Power Amplifier, for the amplification of audio signals for the loud speaker, in four
different types of 1 x 500W, 2 x 240W, 4 x 120W and 8 x 60W. The amplifier channels
shall provide 100V, 70V or 50V audio outputs.
Call stations with keypad control, which can initiate any actions in the system such as
making manual or pre-recorded announcements to any pre-assigned zone or executing
any pre-defined action. Automatic messages stored in the NC shall be able to be
activated by the call station. The system shall have the possibility to provide custommade call stations using the standard available hardware.
Audio Expander, to expand audio channels inputs and for inserting/extracting audio
inputs/outputs from the system and control inputs/outputs for external interfacing.
Network Splitter, for tapping off two runs from the main cable run and as a power feed for
external DC power supply.
Fiber Interface, to convert from plastic fibre optics to glass fibre optics and vice versa, for
different cable distant run.
1.5.2. The interconnection between the DAU and Central Source equipment rack units shall be
achieved by using either plastic or glass optical fiber cable. The system shall support both audio
and data communications via the fiber cable.
1.5.3. The cable connections between the system units shall be arranged in a closed loop for
redundancy to ensure the audio path is always available and that a single failure on the system
cable shall not affect the proper functioning of the system. Each system unit shall have individual
addresses, which are automatically checked and verified by the NC configuration.
1.5.4. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be configured from PC running Windows-based software connected to
the NC. The system shall be configurable using the configuration software supplied by the
manufacturer. The file transfer between the PC and the NC shall use the standard Windows
applications with a user-friendly user interface. It shall be possible to assign an IP address to the
NC. The NC shall be able to be connected to LAN and shall be accessible by any of the
workstations connected to the network with PAVA Systems word protection.
1.5.5. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be easily expandable by adding new hardware and reprogramming the
configuration data. The construction of the PAVA SYSTEM shall be modular in design to enable
system expansion. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be possible to be combined with similar PAVA
SYSTEMs in different locations to support multiple satellite systems and to provide a reliable
distributed audio communication system.
1.5.6. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be freely programmable to route any inputs to any outputs. All inputs
and outputs shall be provided with digital parametric equalizers.
1.5.7. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to make selective and preset group announcements, live
paging, and emergency broadcast to all zones from any of the call station position.
1.5.8. The PAVA SYSTEM shall allow programming of time-scheduled activities for chimes, automatic
digital announcements, background music, routing of audio input to any zone output or audio
output, and activation of any control outputs. It shall be possible to enable and disable any of the
system's inputs/outputs and any equipment in the system even though it is still physically present
in the system.
1.5.9. The PAVA SYSTEM shall be designed to route up to 28 simultaneous audio channels using
dynamic channel allocation to minimize any call conflicts in the system.
1.5.10. The NC shall have automatic message storage, with an audio storage capacity depending only
on the memory size of the compact flash (CF) card. Up to 4 audio messages shall be allowed to
be played simultaneously.
1.5.11. The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide recording facilities to produce professional quality messages.
It shall be possible for the user to give names to pre-recorded messages. The pre-recorded
E/155
1.5.12.
1.5.13.
1.5.14.
1.5.15.
1.5.16.
1.5.17.
1.5.18.
1.5.19.
1.5.20.
1.5.21.
1.5.22.
1.5.23.
messages shall be stored as wav files. It shall be possible to allocate multiple pre-recorded
messages to a selection key.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall have built-in and configurable facilities for manual and automatic
volume control. The individual zones shall have different volume settings for background music
and announcement call.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be designed in such a way that the individual PA/emergency/functional
zone be addressed. Each functional zone shall consist of single or multiple PA/Emergency zone.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of routing multiple background music to different zones or
audio outputs. Background music shall be selectable from local music sources or common music
channel. The background music volume shall be able to be controlled from a call station, for
zones that are pre-assigned to the call station.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of controlling and executing calls and other activities based
on different level of priority settings in the system. The central NC shall have a configurable
system of priorities such that, should a conflict situation arise, the station or user key with the top
priority will override the others. The Fire Command Center shall have the highest priority over the
use of the PAVA SYSTEM.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to monitor all its equipment and cabling in the system and
report to the NC for any faults detected. Once a fault is detected, the SMS shall also be notified to
allow the maintenance team to carry out the investigation.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide fail-safe function whereby in the case of a power amplifier
failure, the system will be able to monitor, detect and change over to a standby amplifier
immediately and automatically. When the fault is rectified, the standby amplifier shall be restored
to the original state.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall monitor the loudspeaker lines for short circuit, open circuit and short to
ground and the fault shall be displayed on the front panel of the power amplifier and the NC. The
NC shall be able to operate in stand-alone mode. The system shall be able to make emergency
calls (i.e. all calls) even if the NC has failed.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be able to auto restart upon restoration of power after a power failure.
It shall be possible to inject power to the system at any part of the system cabling using the
network splitter or fibre interface.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall have an internal real time clock, which shall be synchronized with the
SMS server.
The power amplifiers shall be provided with control outputs that can be locked to the amplifier
channels (zones) so that these can be used for amplifier channel- related functions such as
volume control override.
The power amplifiers shall have the provision to connect a 48V DC supply, and the availability of
the 48V DC supply shall be monitored. It shall be possible to monitor the audio output of the
power amplifier using the headphone socket of the power amplifier. The display shall show the
VU meter reading of all the amplifier channels in the default mode.
All loudspeakers shall be wired up in zones and shall be designed with individual amplifier
channels. The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide a high level Interface to a Security Management
System (SMS) such that any alarms or inputs generated by other subsystems managed by the
SMS can be use to trigger a broadcast or announcement by the PAVA SYSTEM.
1.6.-
System Requirement
1.6.1.
For general office and public areas, the PAVA SYSTEM shall be capable of delivering a sound
pressure level of 77 dB at the listening level at 1Khz at at a level variation of 2dB & sound
pressure level of 73 dB at the listening level at 4Khz at at a level variation of 6dB
For areas such as plant rooms, basement area etc where the noise level is higher, the PAVA
SYSTEM shall be able to deliver 90 dB at the listening level.
The listening level shall be taken to be 1.5 m above floor level.
E/156

The reinforced sound shall be distributed evenly throughout the listening area; the total variation
in each area shall not exceed 4 dB.
An articulation loss of consonants of less than 15% shall be maintained. (Generally, the
reverberation time of the various locations shall be assumed to be not more than 1.9 seconds).
Paging announcements shall be possible from any of the microphone call stations, or from the
microphone paging station to any zones within the network systems.
Each call station shall have three colour LEDs, one to monitor the status of the system that signal
an announcement being made or the selected zone is engaged (that is, with another
announcement) and the second one to indicate the status of the call station and the third one to
monitor the power to the call station.
The microphone paging station shall have the flexibility of selecting any number of user keys
(selection buttons) at any one time. It shall be able to program each user key for any function.
1.6.2.
The central NC shall be an Ethernet-based controller. It shall be using web technology for the
user interfaces and system interaction. It shall have a means of monitoring, to continuously
monitor the system from the microphone of the call station onwards; any faults shall be displayed
on the screen of the Alpha-Numeric Display as well as the Central Monitoring, Configuration and
Diagnostic PC. It shall come with dual cabling connectivity for redundant cable connection.
It shall be able to deliver high quality signals to the loudspeakers; all individual audio equipment
shall have its own Digital Signal Processing modules.
High quality signals shall be maintained at the output of the power amplifiers to compensate for
losses in the audio distribution lines.
Each power amplifier with 30% spare capacity shall be provided to drive all loudspeakers during
an emergency without overloading.
Each power amplifier shall have a built-in self-restoring protection circuit to guard against hazards
of operation such as mis-loading at its input, short-circuiting of its output and connection
mistakes. It shall come with dual cabling connectivity for redundant cable connection.
The power amplifiers shall also have built-in line transformers for 100V loudspeaker matching,
DC input of emergency operation, headphone monitor output, adjustable input sensitivity, and
shall conform to the safety standard of IEC 65489 or equivalent. It shall have amplifier monitoring
and auto-changeover circuits & automatic volume control features built-in.
The power amplifiers shall have control inputs and audio inputs for interfacing for fire alarm
signals. This control inputs shall be supervised, freely programmable for any system actions and
with priorities setting. Each power amplifier shall have digital audio processing to ensure good
audio quality being delivered to the loudspeakers.
A built-in amplifier monitoring circuits shall continuously monitor the functioning of the power
amplifiers and shall automatically switch in a spare power amplifier in case of failure of any of the
amplifiers. Upon detection, the status of the fault shall be indicated by the LCD display on the
amplifier itself as well as in the Central Monitoring, Configuration and Diagnostic PC. The number
of spare power amplifiers to be provided shall be 10% of the total quantity of each range of power
amplifiers.
All speaker lines shall be supervised for open circuit fault, short circuit fault, and short to ground
fault. Upon detection, the status of the fault shall be indicated by the LCD display on the NC and
E/157

amplifier itself as well as the PC monitor in the Central Monitoring, Configuration and Diagnostic
PC.
The loudspeakers shall be located such that they meet the necessary requirements. In general,
one ceiling speaker shall be provided for every 25 square meters in each room such as offices
and corridors, while a minimum of one ceiling speaker shall be provided for areas less than 25
square meters such as booths, pantry and toilets. Horn speakers shall be provided for all plant
rooms, generator rooms and outdoor areas with high ambient noise.
1.6.3.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall also have the means to cut-off the music sources during emergency
paging and shall enable the emergency announcement to be heard in that area.
There shall be background music to selected areas. It shall be possible to pre-program any of
the input music sources to any of these zones. Sources provided shall be a continuous cassette
player, an integrated compact disc player with digital tuner.
All equipment such as the central NC and power amplifiers shall be housed in 19-inch equipment
racks.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall provide a High Level Interface (HLI) to a Security Management System
(SMS) via a server connected to an Ethernet LAN/WAN network.
The PAVA SYSTEM interface to the SMS shall provide a bi-directional HLI which include time
synchronization and all alarm interfaces from other subsystems. (E.g. Fire Panel)
1.6.4.
The PAVA SYSTEM shall be network based and in digital domain and shall be flexible and easy
to operate. Specific functions shall be easily programmed and changed by non-technical
personnel through Internet Explorer to access the system configuration software.
A. Network Controller (NC)
B. The basic system shall be based on a 19" rack frame and shall comprise at least the following
features:
1.
Central Digital Signal Processor module
2.
2 x 16-character LCD Display
3.
8 Supervised Control and 4 Audio Inputs
4.
Ethernet interface for Configuration and Diagnostic & Logging functions
5.
Digital message storage
6.
Automatic Messaging
7.
Stores up to last 200 faults messages and last 200 system status changes
8.
Ethernet Interface for logging
9.
Power Amplifiers
The power amplifier shall be of Class-D type designed for the amplification of audio
signals for the loudspeakers. It shall be possible to select the output voltage between
100V, 70V or 50V by changing jumpers.
The power amplifier shall be designed for redundant network wiring.
The amplifier monitoring and changeover facility shall be incorporated in the power
amplifier. The changeover relays shall be included in the unit. The unit shall be
incorporated with digital audio processing and audio delay.
The power amplifier shall meet the following minimum requirements:
Interfaces
: 2 x system network connection
Indication & Controls
: 2 x 16-character LCD display for status display
: Rotary/push control for selection of system
enquiry mode & headphone volume
: Power supply for ON/OFF switch
E/158
10.
Inputs
between
Outputs
Audio inputs
Frequency Response
(Audio inputs)
Frequency Response
(Audio outputs)
Mains supply
Emergency battery supply
Output power
Type of Amplifiers
:Control Inputs & Audio Inputs selectable

microphone & line
:Selectable 100V, 70V or 50V
:Control ouputs
:Headphone outputs
:Mono, balanced
:Line- -3dB at 20 Hz and 20KHz
:60KHz to 20KHz
:220 or 240V + 10% at 50-60Hz
:+48V (-earth)
: 1 x 500W, 2x240W, 4x120W, 8x60W
: Class D
Conversion Interface Unit

The main function of the Conversion Interface Units shall be to convert digital audio
signals for transmission over the Ethernet network. The unit shall be certified to be
compliant to IEC60849 and compliant to other relevant local standards.
The Conversion Interface Units can route audio channels between itself and other
Conversion Interfaces, in the same or in other networks, or to third party Conversion
Interface units.
Only audio channels are routed via the Conversion Interface Unit, no control data. If
Conversion Interface Units are used as a link between multiple systems, the open
interface of the network controllers should be used for control by a PC master.
The Conversion Interface Units provides sample rate conversion between 44.1 kHz
sample rate and 48 kHz sample rate. Volume levels are preserved.
The 8 control inputs are freely programmable for system actions, and priorities can be
assigned to these inputs.
The 5 control outputs are freely programmable for faults and calls.
The 2 x 16-character display and the rotary control enable status enquiries relating to that
particular unit. The display shows the VU meter reading when the audio monitoring mode
is selected. The audio can be monitored by headphone. The fault status of the unit is
monitored and continuously reported to the network controller.
The control inputs can be programmed for momentary or toggle operation. This selection
can be made using the configuration software.
Each control input has the ability to monitor the cable between the control inputs and the
external switch for open-circuits and short-circuits.
The Conversion Interface Units is designed for redundant network cabling.
The unit is powered from the network controller via the network cable.
11.
Call station basic

The call station is used for making a manual or pre-recorded call to any pre-assigned
zones or executing a predefined action. The call station shall have one key. The call
station shall have a fixed microphone to transmit speech over the network and a press-to-
E/159

talk key. The call station shall also have a headset socket. Once the headset is
connected the microphone will be muted. The unit shall be certified to be compliant to
IEC60849 and compliant to other relevant local standards.
The call station unit can be connected with a maximum of 16 call station keypad units via
serial data communication links.
The call station unit can be connected with a maximum of 16 call station keypad units via
serial data communication links.
The call station shall be programmable for momentary actions on make contact and
toggle actions without repeat on make contact.
The call station shall be a fully functional system.
12.
Numeric Keypad
The call station numeric keypad shall have a serial digital interface to connect it to a call
station or call station kit with loop through facilities for additional keypads.
The call station keypad shall provide 12 keys (0 9, *, #) and an alphanumeric LCD with
backlight, that can be configured via the network to provide various functions for the call
station, it is connected to.
The configuration shall allow for configuration of the following functions:
user access to the call station with user number and PIN, configurable for
multiple users with time-out and manual lock facilities;
zone and zone group selection as destinations for calls with up to eight zones or
zone groups that can be entered into a string.
The LCD shall give feedback to the user about the selections and the
accessibility of the selected zone and zone groups.
The numeric keypad shall get its power from the call station it is connected to.
13.
14.
Line supervision set

The system shall use the same loudspeaker line for communicating with the end-ofloudspeaker-line unit. The monitoring principle shall not be based on DC current or
impedance measurement.
The line monitoring unit shall be incorporated in the power amplifier unit itself to
avoid any non-monitored parts of the cable.
Loudspeaker line monitoring shall be provided without any additional wiring.
The tone generator for loudspeaker monitoring shall be incorporated in the
amplifier so that a single failure of the tone generator will not affect the
monitoring of other amplifier channels.
Loudspeaker line monitoring can be switched on/off from the configuration
software.
The power for the end-of-line monitoring units shall be supplied from the power
amplifier.
Integrated Compact Disc Player with Digital Tuner
The CD-player shall be designed to play normal audio CDs and CD-Rs with MP3encoded files. The CD-player shall allow for high quality uninterrupted music to be played
from a single MP3-disc.
Music shall be organized on a disc in multiple folders with music selection for different
occasions, with programming facilities for up to 999 tracks. Repeat and random play
modes shall be provided.
E/160

The digitally controlled FM/AM tuner shall use frequency synthesizer for the accurate
capturing of radio stations. 10 presets channels for FM and 10 presets channels for AM
shall be provided to store favorite radio stations.
Both the CD-player and the tuner shall be able to operate simultaneously on different
outputs to facilitate two-channel BGM distribution.
The CD-player shall meet the following minimum requirements:
15.
Frequency response
(Tuner)
Distortion
S/N ratio
Output level
Frequency response (CD)
Distortion
S/N ratio
Output level
Combined outputs
: 30 Hz to 15 KHz
: <1%
: >63dB
: 200mV
: 20 Hz to 20 KHz
: <0.1%
: >85dB
: 200mV
: 200mV
Digital Audio Server

Provide 2 number 4 channel audio servers with the following specifications:
Storage Size: 500GB per channel
Channels: Four, discrete
Supported Formats: Uncompressed (44.1 kHz/16 bit) MP3 (128, 160, 192CBR, 192
VBR, and 320 kbps) WMA
S/N ratio: 100dB @ 1 kHz (A-Weighted)
Frequency response: 20Hz - 20 kHz +/- 0.5dB
Channel Separation: 110dB @ 1 kHz
1.7. -
Speakers
All loudspeakers should be designed to withstand operating at their rated power for 100 hours in
accordance with IEC 268-5 Power Handling Capacity (PHC) standards, and BS5839 part 8 for
safety standard.
A1. Ceiling Mounted (6W)

The speaker shall be a 5 (12cm) cone-type speaker suitable for
ceiling mounting. Ease of installation shall be insured by a SUS
spring-based installation clamp mechanism. Cable connection
shall be by means of a push-in connector (bridging terminal).
The speaker shall include a transformer having multiple taps
(0.8W, 1.5W, 3W, 6W at 100V and 0.4W, 0.8W, 1.5W, 3W at 70V)
adjustable. The output sound pressure level at a distance of 1m
with a 1W input level applied shall be 90 dB SPL. The speaker
shall have a frequency response of 55 18,000Hz (-20dB).
The speaker baffle shall be constructed of steel plate. The grille
shall be surface-treated steel plate.
E/161
B1. Wall Mounted (6W)

The speaker shall be a 5" (12cm) cone type enclosure suitable for
wall mounting with a supplied plug-in speaker receptacle
accessory. The input connector shall be an M4 screw terminal,
with an 11 mm distance between barriers.
The speaker impedance shall be 1.7k (6W) or 3.3k (3W) for a
100V line, and 1.7k (3W) or 3.3k (1.5W) for a 70V line. The
output sound pressure level at a distance of 1m with a 1W input
level applied shall be 90 dB SPL. The speaker shall have a
frequency response of 120 18,000Hz (-20dB).
The speaker enclosure shall be constructed of fire resistant HIPS
resin. The grille shall be constructed of surface-treated steel plate
net.
C1. Pendant/Suspension (30W)
The speaker shall be a 5" (12cm) cone type, plus balanced dome
tweeter, suitable for ceiling suspension mounting.
Input impedance shall be easily adjustable with rotary switch on
the upper side of the speaker. The speaker shall include a
transformer having multiple taps (5W, 10W, 20W, 30W, at 100V
And 70V at 8). The output sound pressure level at a distance of
1m with a 1W input level applied shall be 91 dB SPL. The speaker
shall have a frequency response of 70 20,000Hz (-20dB).
the speaker enclosure shall be constructed of HIPS
net.
D1. Projection (30W)
The speaker shall be a bass-reflex 5" (12cm) cone type, with a
balanced dome tweeter, suitable for ceiling, wall and pole mounting.
Input impedance shall be easily adjustable with rotary switch on
the upper side of the speaker. The speaker shall include a
transformer having multiple taps (5W, 10W, 20W, 30W, at 100V
And 70V at 8) adjustable. The output sound pressure level at a
distance of 1m with a 1W input level applied shall be 91 dB SPL.
The speaker shall have a frequency response of 70 20,000Hz (-20dB).
The speaker enclosure shall be constructed of HIPS
net.
1.8.
System Sofwares
1.8.1.
Configuration software
The configuration software is used for configuring the system. The configuration software shall be
located in the network controller except for the file transfer facilities. Any PC with Internet Explorer
version 5.0 or above will be able to connect to the network controller to access the configuration
and logging functions. No special software shall need to be installed in the PC for configuration or
logging. The system shall be able to operate without the configuration PC. The configuration
software shall be required only during the installation and when changes are to be made in the
existing system.
Diagnostic & logging software
1.8.2.
E/162

The diagnostic & logging software has the main function of monitoring and recording the status of
all the units in the PA system. It shall log all events such as calls and status changes of system
units, and provide a current view of the system status. This software section can be used for realtime logging by connecting a PC with web browser.
1.9. -
Electrical Installation
The installation shall use fire rated audio cables. The fire rated audio cables shall be a minimum
2
of 1.5 mm PVC insulated PVC over sheath. However specialist system supplier
shall be totally responsible to determine the exact size of fire rated cable as per
requirement, without cost variation entitlement.
The cables shall be run in suitable GI trunking and where cables have to be run on
vertical surface galvanized conduits shall be used. Embeded or concealed installation shall be in
PVC conduit.
The cable clips shall be fixed firmly and distance between clips shall not be greater than 300 mm.
Correct corresponding termination devices and boxes shall be used. All devices shall be
terminated using a compression lock gland. Where devices are surface fixed a suitable shroud
shall be used.
Before any devices are connected the Contractor must fully demonstrate and prove
the quality of the installation for loop integrity, continuity, resistance and capacitance.
The system specialist shall install all devices, this shall include second and third fixes. Prior to
completion of the project the system specialist must demonstrate the entire system to the
approval of the Engineer. The entire system shall be 100% tested independently prior to the
demonstration to the Engineer. Should any items fail during the test a new and complete 100%
re-test shall be carried out. The specialist will be responsible for any costs involved with re-testing
of the system.
The system specialist will be responsible for providing complete and detailed manuals for the
entire system. The manuals shall be fully detailed and shall describe the operation and function of
each part of the system.
1.10.-
Communication To The BMS

The entire voice alarm system must directly communicate with the BMS system.
The system shall communicate via pre-proven intelligent digital gateway supplied
by the system specialist.
The system shall have also the ability to work independently of BMS. The system
shall pass to BMS all the device information including, current status, history,
ambient levels, routines, alarm events, faults events etc.
1.11.-
Specialist Supplier
The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer prior to appointing a system
specialist.
1.12
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of main
background music system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in
E/163

satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years. Provide main background music
system produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC
and BS EN.
C.
1.13
Any item of equipment of material not specifically addressed on the drawings or in this
document and required to provide a complete and functional installation shall be provided in a
level of quality consistent with other specified items.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data and installation instructions for the public address
system.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C.
Riser diagram : Submit riser and block diagrams for the main background music system
indicating type of different components in the system, interface with other systems and also
the arrangements of the central equipment inside the rack cabinets.
D. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification.
Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or
specification in a manner different from that described and specified, a full description of the
deviation shall be provided.
1.14
WARRANTY
A. Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by the Employer
during the installation and commissioning period.
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All manuals shall
be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment supplied will be
free of defects in labor, materials and workmanship and will perform satisfactorily in
compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of one year after commissioning.
D. During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to advise on the
operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be provided by the manufacturer.
1.15
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. After compiling with the procedures set out in the preliminaries, the contractor shall carry out
full tests on the contract works to demonstrate that the works meet the requirements of the
contract documents.
B.
The contractor shall allow a minimum of 2 days (7hours per day) for demonstration of
equipment and attendance, plus:
i.
ii.
2 days for instruction of operation staff.

2 days for system tuning and adjustment if found to be necessary.
C. The contractor shall have available at commissioning the following electro-acoustic test
equipment:
E/164
1. Calibrated sound level meter, compiling with BS 5060 (IE 651) Type 1 or 2
2. 1/3 octave band spectrum analyses (minimum range 40HZ 16 KHz at ISO center
frequencies, display resolution increment not more than 2dB
D. The contractor shall have available at commissioning the following electro-acoustic test
equipment:
1. Calibrated sound level meter, compiling with BS 5969 (IEC 651) Type 1 or 2
2.
1/3 octave band spectrum analyses (minimum range 40HZ 16 KHz at ISO center
freq2uencie, display resolution increment not more than 2dB).
3. Pink noise source (minimum bandwidth 20Hz 20 KHz, 0.5 dB)

4. Oscilloscope for wave form analysis.
5. Loudspeakers phase checker.
6. Impedance meter for checking the impedance of the loudspeakers lines.
7. Portable wireless intercom approved for use on sale.
8.
Amplifier for use with (3), and sufficient loudspeakers to produce overall sound pressure
level that is more than the noise level by 10dB of the mean, measured 1.5m above the
floor,
E. If required by a consultant ( in the event of apparent non-compliance of the installed system

with the specification ), the contractor shall provide precision test equipment for verification of
voltage, power, frequency response, single noise ratio, total harmonic distortion and RASTI.
1.16
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Provide three (3) operation and maintenance manuals, book binded for consultant
review/approval.
E/165

VOICE AND DATA NETWORK (FTTClass Unified Communication Infrastructure for IP Services)
SECTION 16740
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Related documents
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.2
Supported systems
A. The applications that shall be supported include, but are not limited to:
1. Ethernet Applications
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
10BASE-T LAN
(10 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
100BASE-TX LAN
(100 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
1000BASE-T LAN
(1 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3
100BASE-FX LAN
(100 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3
1000BASE-SX LAN
(1000 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3z
1000BASE-LX LAN
(1000 Mb/s) IEEE 802.3z
10GBASE-S LAN
(10 Gb/s) IEEE 802.3ae
10GBASE-LX4 LAN
10GBASE-L LAN
10GBASE-E LAN/WAN
10Gb/s 850 nm 4-Lane Parallel
(HP 10GBASE-CX4 Optical Converter Model J8439A)
2. IEEE 802.3af Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Power via Media Dependent Interface
(MDI)
3. Fiber Channel Applications

A. 1 Gb/s Fiber Channel FC-PI
B. 2 Gb/s Fiber Channel FC-PI
C. 4 Gb/s Fiber Channel FC-PI
D. 10 Gb/s Fiber Channel 10GFC
4. IBM FICON Application

5. OIF (Optical Internetworking Forum) Applications
A.
B.
40 Gb/s SONET OC-768 / SDH STM-256

10 Gb/s SONET OC-192 / SDH STM-64
6. InfiniBand Applications
A. 30 Gb/s InfiniBand IB-12X-SX
B. 10 Gb/s InfiniBand IB-4X-SX and IB-4X-LX
C. 2.5 Gb/s InfiniBand IB-1X-SX and IB-1X-LX
7. IEEE 1394b High Performance Serial Bus Applications

8. IEEE 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN Applications
E/166

9. Video Applications
A. Baseband Video
1) Composite Analog Baseband Video (including S-Video/S-VHS)
2) Red-Green-Blue (RGB) Component Video
B. Broadband Video
C. Digital Video/Audio (including High Definition Television, HDTV)
10. Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) Applications

11. Voice and ISDN Applications
A. Voice Applications
B. ISDN Applications
12. Building Automation Systems (BAS) Applications

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3
Generic BAS Guidelines

Andover Controls System
Carrier Systems
Echelon Corporation FTT-10A Free Topology Transceiver
Honeywell Systems
Johnson Controls Metasys System
Legrand SwitchPlan SP500 Lighting Control System
Matsushita Electric Works NAIS FP3 Wire (W)-type Link System
Siemens Cerberus Division Pyrotronics
Siemens Building Technologies Landis Division Staefa Control System
VingCard Hotel Security System
Summary of work
A. Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured Cabling System (SCS). The
SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, voice, video and any other low voltage
signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at
various desks, workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and
described herein.
B. 1No Data and 1No Telephone Points are required in every Lab and Classroom. For the
offices 1No data and 1No telephone is required for every office desk. Additional for the IT
labs, Canteen, Auditorium and Library, Wireless availability is required as indicated in the
Points List Schedule Provided.
C. Inside the Library, Auditorium and Kitchen a 24 port 10/100/1000 Autosensing switch is
required for additional services once operated. For the Electrical Rooms a Din Mounted
Industrial Switch is to be provided so that it can be used to monitor and control CCTV
cameras, SCADA System and other IP controls which will be required later on during the
project. Specifications as per Active Part Section further down.
D. This Section includes passive equipment such as wire, cable, connecting devices,
installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice and
high-speed data transmission suitable for local area networks (LANs).
E. Scope of work consists of the installation of a generic structured wiring system based upon
a star topology to connect all manner of applications covering voice, data and video
E/167

transmission, including, but not limited to the following:
Voice and data outlets,
Horizontal cabling, Backbone cabling.
Horizontal cross connect (HC cable termination and cross connect cabling hardware)
located in telecommunications closets (IDF).
Main distribution frame (MDF) in equipment room (IT Room).
Main data cross connect (MDC) in equipment room (IT Room).
Necessary patch cables, jumpers and ancillary equipment.
F. Wiring utilized for data and voice communications shall originate at owner provided hubs
and concentrators either wall mounted, in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/or
enclosed wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at the Telecommunications
Equipment Room (IT Room), the Main Cross-connect (MC) , the Intermediate crossconnect (IC), and/or the IDF Room location(s). Wiring, terminations and patch bays
between these designated demarcation points and outlet locations designated on the plans
shall be considered part of the contract. Telecommunication Outlets (TO) shall be
furnished, wired and installed by the SCS system contractor.
G. The system shall utilize a network of fiber optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie and
station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in the
quantities indicated on the drawings.
H. Fiber cables shall terminate on fiber patch panels and/or modular patch panels located in
all demarcation and termination points shown on the drawings.
I.
All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations.
J. All cables shall terminate in an alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations.

K. All balanced twisted pair cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to
TIA/EIA568-B standards for Category 6A installations.
L. Available and unused pairs between the IT Room and IDF shall be terminated and shall be
identified as spare at each location.
M. Station cables shall terminate on one, two or three gang wall plates equipped as shown on
the drawings.
N. The contractor shall include coordination works and necessary required structured cabling
work adjustment in compliance with the Data Center Specialist requirement.
1.4
References
1.4.1
European Committee for Electro technical Standardization (CENELEC)

a. CENELEC EN 50173, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling Systems, 1996.
(Refer to Comparison between ANSI/TIA/EIA, ISO/IEC, and CENELEC Standards in
this chapter.)
b. CENELEC EN 50173, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling Systems
Amendment to Clauses 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 and Annexes A, B, H of EN, 2000. (Refer to
Comparison between ANSI/TIA/EIA, ISO/IEC, and CENELEC Standards in this
chapter.)
E/168

c.
CENELEC EN 50173-1, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling SystemsPart 1:

General Requirements and Office Areas (work in progress).
d. CENELEC EN 50173-2, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling SystemsPart 2:

Industrial Premises (work in progress).
e. CENELEC EN 50173-3, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling SystemsPart 3:
Small Office Home Office (SOHO) (work in progress).
f.
CENELEC EN 50174-1, Information TechnologyCabling Installation Part 1:

Specification and Quality Assurance, 2000.
g. CENELEC EN 50174-2, Information TechnologyCabling Installation Part 2:

Installation Planning and Practices Inside Buildings, 2000.
h. CENELEC EN 50174-3, Information TechnologyCabling Installation Part 3:
Installation Planning and Practices Outside Buildings (work in progress).
1.4.2
i.
CENELEC EN 50310, Application of Equipotential Bonding and Earthing in Buildings

with Information Technology Equipment, 2000.
j.
CENELEC EN 50346, Information TechnologyCabling Installation Testing of

Installed Cabling, draft.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

a. ANSI/ICEA S-80-576-2000, Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair Indoor
Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems, 2002.
b. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2002, Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated
Copper Conductor, 2002.
c.
ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair

Indoor Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems,
2002.
d. ICEA S-102-700-2001, ICEA Standard for Category 6 Individually Unshielded TwistedPair Indoor Cables for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems Technical
Requirements, 2001.
1.4.3
International Electro technical Commission (IEC)

a. ISO/IEC 11801 Ed.2:2002, Information TechnologyGeneric Cabling for Customer
Premises.
b. ISO/IEC 14763-1:1999, Information TechnologyImplementation and Operation of
Customer Premises CablingPart 1: Administration.
c.
ISO/IEC TR 14763-2:2000, Information TechnologyImplementation and Operation of

Customer Premises CablingPart 2: Planning and Installation of Copper Cabling.
d. ISO/IEC TR 14763-3:2000, Information TechnologyImplementation and Operation of

Customer Premises CablingPart 3: Acceptance Testing for Optical Cabling.
e. ISO/IEC 18010:2002, Information TechnologyPathways and Spaces for Customer
Premises Cabling.
E/169

1.4.4
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC ), 2005.

b. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces,
2002.
c.
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code , 2002.
d. NFPA 75, Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing

Equipment, 1999.
e. NFPA 76, Recommended Practice for the Fire Protection of Telecommunications
Facilities, 2002.
f.
NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,
2002.
g. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code , 2003.

h. NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials, 2000.
i.
NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables
for Use in Air-Handling Spaces, 2002.
j.
NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems, 2000.
k. NFPA 5000, Building Construction and Safety Code, 2003.

1.4.5
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)

a. ANSI X3T9.5, Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps.
b. TIA/EIA TSB-125, Guidelines for Maintaining Optical Fiber Polarity Through ReversePair Positioning, 2001.
c.
TIA/EIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of
Optical Fiber Cabling Systems (pending).
d. TIA/EIA568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart 1:

General Requirements, 2001.
e. TIA/EIA568-B.1-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart
1: General RequirementsAddendum 1Minimum 4-Pair UTP and 4-Pair ScTP Patch
Cable Bend Radius, 2001.
f.
TIA/EIA568-B.1-2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart

1: General RequirementsAddendum 2Grounding and Bonding Specifications for
Screened Balanced Twisted Pair Horizontal Cabling, 2003.
g. TIA/EIA568-B.1-3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart

1: General RequirementsAddendum 3Supportable Distances and Channel
Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type, 2003.
E/170

h. TIA/EIA568-B.1-4, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart
1: General RequirementsAddendum 4Recognition of Category 6 and 850 nm
Laser-Optimized 50/125 m Multimode Optical Fiber Cabling, 2003.
i.

1: General RequirementsAddendum 5Telecommunications Cabling for
Telecommunications Enclosures, 2004.
j.
TIA/EIA568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart 2:

Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, 2001.
k. TIA/EIA568-B.2-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart

2: Balanced Twisted Pair ComponentsAddendum 1 Transmission Performance
Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling, 2002.
l.

2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling ComponentsAddendum 2, 2001.
m. TIA/EIA568-B.2-3. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart

2: Balanced Twisted-Pair CablingAddendum 3Additional Considerations for
Insertion Loss and Return Loss Pass/Fail Determination, 2001.
n. TIA/EIA568-B.2-5, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart
2: Balanced Twisted-Pair CablingAddendum 5Corrections to TIA-568-B.2, 2003.
o. TIA/EIA568-B.2-3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling StandardPart
2: Balanced Twisted-Pair CablingAddendum 6Category 6 Related Component
Test Procedures, 2003.
p. TIA/EIA568-B.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, 2000.
q. TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard Addendum 1
Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125m Optical Fiber
Cables, 2002.
r.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces, 2003.
s. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, 2001.

t.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-604.2, FOCIS 2Fiber Optic Connector Intermateablility Standard,

1997.
u. TIA/EIA606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructures, 2002.
v.
ANSI J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications, 2002.
w. TIA/EIA758-A, Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure

Standard, 2005.
x.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-854, A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000 Mb/s (1000BASE-TX)

Operating over Category 6 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling, 2001.
E/171

y.
1.4.6
TIA/EIA-862, Building Automation Systems Cabling for Commercial Buildings, 2002.
Other Reference Materials

a. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (COOSP), 3rd edition.
b. BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Reference Manual (ESSDRM), 1st edition.
c.
BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Manual (ITSIM), 4th edition.
d. BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM), 6th edition.

e. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), 10th edition.
f.
BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM), 1st edition.
g. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
i.
1.5
Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program.
Definitions
A. Structured Cabling System (SCS):
A SCS is defined as all required cabling including

hardware, termination blocks, cross connect wire or cordage, patch panels, patch cords,
telecommunication outlets, work area cords, UTP and fiber optic cable installed and
configured to provide computer data and voice connectivity from each data or voice device
to the network file server or voice network/switch designated as the service point of the
local area network.
B. Work Area Subsystem:
The connection between the telecommunications outlet and the

station equipment in the work area is provided by the Work Area. It consists of cords,
adapters, and other transmission electronics.
C. Horizontal Subsystem:
The Horizontal subsystem Provides connections from the

horizontal cross connect to the Telecommunication Outlets (TOs) in the work areas. It
consists of the horizontal transmission media, the associated connecting hardware
terminating this media and TOs in the work area. Each floor of a building is served by its
own Horizontal Subsystem.
D. Riser Backbone: The Riser Backbone subsystem links the main cross connect (MC) in the
equipment room to intermediate cross connects (IC) and horizontal cross connects in the
telecommunications rooms (TR). It consists of the backbone transmission media between
these locations and the associated connecting hardware terminating this media. It is
normally installed in a star topology; with first-level backbone cables beginning at the main
cross connect.
If needed, second-level backbone cables begin at intermediate cross
connects.
E. Equipment Subsystem:
The Equipment Subsystem consists of shared (common)

electronic communications equipment in the equipment room, main cross connect or
telecommunications room and the transmission media required to terminate this equipment
on the distribution hardware.
E/172

F. The Administration Subsystem: The Administration Subsystem links all of the subsystems
together. It consists of labeling hardware for providing circuit identification and patch cords
or jumper wire used for creating circuit connections at the cross connects.
1.6
Submittals
A. Product Data
1. Provide manufacturers catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
2. Submittals shall include all items called for in PART 2 PRODUCTS of this document
and the manufacturers cut sheets for the following:
A. All fiber optic and balanced twisted pair cable: to include patch cords, cross
connect wire and cross connect cordage.
B. All connectors and required tooling.
C. All termination system components for each cable type.
D. All IT Room and IDF equipment frame types, hardware (and LAN equipment if
applicable).
E. All grounding and surge suppression system components.
F. All test equipment to be used for fiber and balanced twisted pair channels
3. A technical data sheet showing manufacturers Guaranteed Channel Performance
over the full swept frequency range.
4. Technical data sheets shall include the physical specifications as well as the following
electrical and transmission characteristics for balanced twisted pair channels:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Mutual Capacitance
Characteristic Impedance
DC Resistance
Insertion Loss (IL)
Pair-to-Pair Near End Crosstalk (NEXT)
Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT)
ELFEXT (ELFEXT)
Power Sum ELFEXT (PSELFEXT)
Return Loss (RL)
Propogation delay
Delay Skew
B. Manufacturers Instructions
1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing
agency specified under regulatory requirements.
2. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,

operation and installation of product.
C. Pre-Qualification Certificate
1. Contractor shall submit the following documents with project proposal:
A. A letter of approval from the manufacturer indicating completion of pre-qualification
requirements.
B. Training certificates for design, engineering and installation of the proposed
products, for the relevant staff involved in the design and installation of this project.
D. Bid
E/173

1. Vendor shall submit complete detailed bids. Lump sum bids will not be accepted.
E. Material Guarantee
1. The wiring vendor (installer) shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6A
and fiber optic cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including
installation) of TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 568-B.2, 568-B.3 and 569.
F. Material Provided
1. The successful wiring vendor (installer) shall be certain that all correct parts are
ordered per Products Section of this document and installed in accordance with
manufacturers design and installation guidelines. Vendor shall submit complete parts
and part numbers prior to installation of equipment.
G. Warranty Documentation
1. Warranty shall be for 20 years.
2. Complete documentation regarding the manufacturers warranty shall be submitted as
part of the proposal. This shall include, but is not limited to: a sample of the warranty
that would be provided to the customer when the installation is complete and
documentation of the support procedure for warranty issues.
3. A systems application assurance manual documenting the vendor supported
applications and application guidelines shall be provided as part of the submittals
1.7
Coordination
1. Coordinate with the Local Telephone Authority to confirm location of service entrance
arrangement of public telephone exchange lines into the premises.
2. Coordinate work of this section with Employer:
Telephone switch (PABX).

Telephone instrument.
Workstations.
LAN equipment suppliers.
3. Meet jointly with representatives of above Local Telephone Authority and Employer to
exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation
interfaces.
4. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
5. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects
in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and
space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
1.8
Qualifications
B. Contractor
1. The contractor selected to provide the installation of this system shall be certified by
the manufacturing company in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the
products described herein.
2. The contractor shall utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution
channels in provisioning this Project.
3. Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of recent experience on structured
E/174

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
cabling systems of similar type and size.

Contractor and design firm shall be in compliance with all federal, state and
local statutes regarding qualifications of firms.
The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required
to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size.
The contractor shall own and maintain the tools and equipment approved by
the cabling system manufacturer for successful installation and testing of optical and
and Category 6A balanced twisted pair distribution systems.
The contractor shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the usage of
such tools and equipment.
Contractor shall submit a resume of qualification with the Contractor's
proposal indicating the following:
A. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names
and telephone numbers for each.
B. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of
metallic and fiber optic cable systems on this project.
C. A technical resume of experience for the contractor's Project Manager and onsite installation supervisor who will be assigned to this project.
D. A list of technical product training attended by the contractors personnel that will
install the SCS system.
E. Any sub-Contractor, who will assist the SCS contractor in performance of this
work, shall have the same training and certification as the SCS contractor.
1.9
Cabling basic requirements
A. Cable Pathway
1. Extension of all data and voice cables shall be within raceway, conduit, cable tray
or other designated cable delivery system provided and installed by the main
contractor where concealed in walls and exposed above ceilings in plenum spaces.
B. Hardware
1.
1.10
Required hardware includes, but is not limited to, termination blocks, fastening
devices, data outlets, voice outlets, connectors and all required accessories to
comply with this specification.
Grounding and bonding

A. All grounding and bonding shall meet the National Electrical Code (NEC) as well as
local codes, which specify additional grounding and/or bonding requirements.
B. Bonding and Grounding

1. Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and
NFPA. Horizontal cables shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70
and local requirements and practices.
Horizontal equipment includes cross
connect frames, patch panels and racks, active telecommunication equipment and
test apparatus
and equipment.
When required by local code,
provide
a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or
larger bonding conductor that
provides
direct
bonding
between
equipment
rooms
and telecommunications rooms (See J-STD-607-A). This is
part of the grounding and bonding infrastructure (part of the telecommunications
pathways and spaces in the building structure), and is independent of equipment or
cabling.
1.11
Product warranty and application assurance

A. The Structured Connectivity Solutions Extended Product Warranty and
E/175

Application
Assurance
1. Extended Product
Warranty
A. The Extended Product Warranty covers all passive components (i.e., cable
and connectivity components that make up the passive data and
telecommunications signal transmission infrastructure). Passive Components
are defined as SCS components that exhibit no gain or contribute no energy.
Manufacturers Solutions warrants, from the original installation completion date,
provided a registration certificate is issued by the Manufacturer to the customer,
the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
that the Passive Components of Registered SCS components will be

free from manufacturing defects in material and workmanship under normal
and proper use;
that all Passive Components in the Registered SCS components meet
or exceed the relevant component specification of the TIA 568-B series and
ISO/IEC 11801: 2002 standards;
that the Registered SCS components links/channels will meet or exceed
the applicable requirements of the TIA 568-B series, and ISO/IEC 11801:
2002 standards for cabling links/channel configurations specified in
these
standards;
that the Registered SCS solution channels will additionally meet or exceed
the Guaranteed Channel Performance in the SCS Performance
Specifications Addendum in effect at the time of installation.
B. Under the Extended Product Warranty, the Manufacturer will (or will authorize
a BusinessPartner to) either repair or replace the defective Registered SCS
product at Manfacturers cost. The Manaufacturer will pay the BusinessPartner
for the cost of labor to repair or replace any such defective product on behalf,
provided, that such repair or replacement and associated labor costs receive the
prior written approval of the manufacturer. If the manufacturer chooses to repair
products, may use new or reconditioned replacement parts. If the
manufacturer chooses to replace products, may replace such products with
new or reconditioned products of the same or similar design. Any such repair or
replacement will be warranted for either
1)
90 days or the remainder of the original twenty-year warranty

period, whichever is longer.
2. Application Assurance
A. The Application Assurance covers the Registered SCS components to
support operations of the application(s) that the system was designed to
support, as well as additional application(s) defined below. The manufacturer
should warrants that the Registered SCS components will be free from defects
that prevent operation of the specific application(s) for which the Registered SCS
components was initially designed as long as the design is in compliance with
the SCS Performance Specifications for said applications and is in compliance
with all other terms and conditions of this warranty.
B. The Application Assurance also covers the following additional applications:
1) those as specified in the current (at the time of installation) SCS

Performance
Specifications and Addendums;
and
2) in accordance with application standards specifications, any application
introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use the
relevant TIA/EIA 568-B series or ISO/IEC 11801 2nd edition
(September
2002) components and link/channel specifications for cabling, to the
E/176

extent that such applications are defined to operate over the guaranteed
channel performance and/or the installed channel topologies.
B. Term of Warranty
1. Twenty years from the date of issuance of the registration certificate or installation,
whichever is earlier.
2. Moves, additions, or changes are covered by the original registration certificate if
performed by an authorized BusinessPartner in compliance with the SCS design,
installation and registration requirements.
3. Administration of SCS cords by the end user is covered by the original registration
certificate if performed in compliance with manfacturers SCS guidelines.
C. Person / Entity Covered

1. This warranty is for the sole benefit of the person or entity to whom the registration
certificate is issued and any successor in interest to the site in which such Registered
SCS system was originally installed.
1.12
Special requirements for cable routing and

installation
A. Cabling
1. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the
requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) Articles 725, 760,
770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes.
2. All balanced twisted pair cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR
(Riser
Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are
installed.
3. All fiber optic cabling shall bear OFNP (Plenum Rated), OFNR (Riser Rated) and/or
appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.
B.
Cable Pathway
1. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, horizontal cabling
with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry.
Cable bundles shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing
building structure and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals.
Plenum rated cable ties shall be used in all appropriate areas.
The contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers requirements for bending radius
and pulling tension of all data and voice cables.
Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the
ceiling grid.
Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery
systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.
C. Fire Stopping
1. Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or
created by the contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the
contractor.
2. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such
a manner, which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having
jurisdiction over this work.
3. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations
as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor's work.
4. Any openings created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed
as part of this work.
E/177

D. Contractor Responsibility
1. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as
a result of his work.
necessary.
1.13
Repair of surfaces, including painting , shall be included as
Work external to the

building
A. Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall
be governed by the provisions of this specification and the applicable drawings.
B. Only cabling products approved by the manufacturer for outside use shall be installed
in locations external to the confines of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Equivalent products
A. Equivalent product(s) may be considered for substitution for those products specified,
however, any equivalent cabling product(s) must be approved by the cabling system
manufacturer and show demonstrated and documented equivalence to the product(s)
specified.
B. Documentation shall include, but is not limited to: product samples, data sheets, and
actual test data.
C. The request for product substitution, and supporting documentation, must be submitted,
in writing, prior to submitting the bid.
D. Written approval for product substitution must be submitted with the bid.
2.2
Guaranteed channel performance
A. Category 6A Guaranteed Channel Performance

1.
All balanced twisted pair cable and apparatus shall conform to the Category
6A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
component specifications an the installed channels shall comply with the

Category
6/classE A Channel Performance Specification.
The balanced twisted pair cable and apparatus channel performance shall
be guaranteed up to the maximum 100 meters (328 feet) length, including up to 4
connection points.
The Category 6A, 4 pair UTP channel shall support emerging highbandwidth applications, including 10 Gbps Ethernet, potentially 1.2 Gbps ATM and
2.4 Gbps ATM, IEEE 1394B S400, Multi-Tasked Split Screen Computing, Virtual
Holographic Video Conferencing, Instant Access Telemedicine, 3D CAD/CAM
Engineering, Internet-Intranet Communications/Commerce, as well as all 77
channels (550 MHz) of analog broad band video.
The Category 6A cable and Category 6A channel components shall be
manufactured by a single manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the
Category 6A channel cable, components, and applications for a period of 20 years.
The 20 year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labor to
replace any defective components as well as the component replacement.
The Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not exceed 40
ns.
The Category 6A cable and components shall be electrically backward
E/178

8.
9.
10.
11.
compatible with existing Category 3, 5, 5e and 6.

The Category 6A components shall be engineered and manufactured to
compensate for any compliant Category 3, 5, 5e or 6 component crosstalk and
shall provide at least Category 3, 5, 5e or 6 performance in all of the customers
existing installed base of voice/data/video, based on the lowest category of
component in the channel.
The Category 6A cable and components shall be physically compatible with
existing installed base of equipment.
The Category 6A cable and components shall not require special cords,
specialty tools or special installation requirements.
The guaranteed channel performance specifications of the Category 6A
Channel described above with cable, cords, outlets manufactured by the same
manufacturer and four (4) connections for 100 meters shall be as shown in the
following tables:
A. Category 6A channel, 4-connection, (High Performance)
Guaranteed Performance Specifications for GigaSPEED X10D Solution
Frequency (MHz)
1.0
4.0
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0
31.3
62.5
100
200
250
300
400 500
5.6
6.3
8.9 10.0
11.2
15.9
20.4
29.4
33.1
36.5
42.7 48.3
71.0
70.0 68.0 67.0 66.0
65.1
62.0
60.0
55.5
54.0
55.8
51.0 49.5
58.9
57.0 52.9 51.0 49.0
47.1
41.1
37.0
31.0
29.0
27.5
25.0 23.0
69.0
64.2
62.6 59.2 57.6 56.0
54.4
49.4
45.9
40.8
39.1
32.7
68.9
65.0
58.5
56.3 51.3 48.7 46.1
43.3
33.4
25.6
11.4
6.0
-3.8
30.6 28.9
-12.2 19.4
69.5
68.0
63.1
61.5 58.1 56.5 54.8
53.2
48.1
44.6
39.4
37.7
31.3
67.4
64.0
57.5
55.2 50.2 47.6 44.9
42.1
32.2
24.2
10.0
4.5
-5.3
29.1 27.3
-13.7 21.0
PSACR-F (dB)
69.3
68.3
57.2
56.2
51.2
50.2
49.3 45.2 43.2 41.3

48.3 44.2 42.2 40.3
39.4
38.3
33.3
32.3
29.3
28.3
23.2
22.2
21.3
20.3
19.7
19.0
17.2 15.3
16.5 14.5
Return Loss(dB)
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0 21.0 20.5 20.0
19.5
17.0
15.0
12.0
11.0
8.0
8.0
Delay (ns)
580
562
557
555 553 552 551
550
549
548
547
546
546
546 546
Delay Skew (ns)
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Insertion Loss (dB)
3.8
4.0
PSA NEXT (dB)
75.0
74.0
PSAACR-F (dB)
75.0
65.0
NEXT (dB)
71.0
8.0
7.9
ACR-N (dB)
PSNEXT (dB)
PSACR-N (dB)
ACR-F (dB)
40
40
40
40
40
8.0
40
Note: The table provides reference values only. All parameters comply with the governing equations
given below over the entire frequency range. All values and equations apply to worst-case channels
utilizing four-pair High Performance EA series cables with full cross-connects, consolidation points
and work area outlets
(4 connectors in a channel) for any channel lengths up to 100 meters.
Electrical Parameter
(1 - 500MHz)
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ACR-F
PSACR-F
Return Loss
PSANEXT
PSAACR-F
B.
Guaranteed Channel Margins to ISO/IEC 11801

Edition 2.1 Class EA
2.0 %
1.0 dB
2.5 dB
4.0 dB
6.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
300 m Laser Optimized 50/125 m Multimode Guaranteed Channel Performance
1. The 50/125 m fiber channel shall support single-channel serial transmission, in
2.
the building riser backbones, to 10 gigabits per second (Gb/s) for a distance of 300
meters withup to 5 LC connections, current and next generation LAN, SAN and WAN
applications.
The 50/125 m fiber channel shall be backward compatible with legacy applications
E/179
3.
4.
5.
6.
such as: 10Gbp/s Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI, Fast Ethernet and ATM for in-building
network distances) ensuring a smooth migration path from 10Mb/s to 10 Gb/s using
achievable technology.
The channel shall support 10 Gb/s short wavelength (850 nm) emerging
technology applications using vertical cavity surface emitting lasers (VCSELs)and low bit
rate LED applications for legacy systems.
The 50 m fiber shall be optimized to control differential mode delay (DMD) so that
pulse splitting at 10 Gb/s is eliminated.
The high performance fiber shall use the same termination and test procedures that
are currently used for the existing industrys lower performance 50 m fiber. Fibers
shall be
manufactured with dual acrylate coating for maximum color retention and protection.
A single manufacturer shall manufacture the 50 m fiber cable, 50 m fiber connectors,
50
m patch cords and apparatus, which comprise the channel.
7. The 50 m fiber shall meet or exceed the following standards, as applicable, for OSP
or
8.
9.
C.
Plenum cables: ICEA S-83-596, ISO/IEC-794, GR-409, TIA/EIA455, TIA/EIA492,

TIA/EIA568-B, ANSI-FDDI, IEEE 802, UL 910, OFNP classification as described in the
National Electric Code (NEC2), OFN-LS Low Smoke Cables, CSA Certified (OFN
FT4/FT6) and approved component industry standards.
The manufacturer shall warrant the 10 Gb/s channels cable, components, and
applications for a period of 20 years.
The 20-year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labor to replace
any defective components as well as the component replacement.
Zero Watre Peak Singlemode Guaranteed Channel Performance (As Applicable)
1. The ZWP-SM Solution overcame the limitations of conventional singlemode fibre.

Adding extra capacity to a traditional G.652C singlemode fibre gives the capability to use
existing Singlemode applications and future applications to maximize the campus
networking capacity.
2. Zero Water Peak Singlemode (ZWP-SM) Fiber, designed to maximise investment
in enterprise campus and metro backbones for next generation equipment.
3. ZWP-SM fiber is designed to operate over the entire wavelength range from 1280nm
to
1625 nm - removing the water peaks (high attenuation) in the 1400 nm window increasing
the useable wavelength range over conventional singlemode fiber by more than
50%.
4. Delivers a cost-effective upgrade path allowing up to 16 channels of CWDM (Coarse
Wave Division Multiplexing), the lowest-cost option to pack more channels on a single
fiber, and up to 400 channels of DWDM (Dense Wave Division Multiplexing).
5. With bandwidth requirements continuing to grow at exponential rates, the ZWPSM Solution is ready to support enterprise campus and metro backbone migrations to
higher speeds and multiple wavelengths.
6. In addition, this full spectrum fiber provides customers with investment protection: if
optical electronics move to higher serial speeds or shift to an increased number of
wavelengths, ZWP-SM provides complete support for both. ZWP-SM fibre cables are
ITU-T G.652.C compliant and support legacy transport equipment and applications.
Fiber Attribute
Core Diameter
Cladding Diameter
Cladding Non-Circularity
Core-Cladding Offset
Coated Fibre Diameter
Colored Fiber Diameter
Test Method
TIA/EIA*
IEC**
TIA/EIA-455-176
IEC 60793-1-20
TIA/EIA-455-176
IEC 60793-1-20
TIA/EIA-455-176
IEC 60793-1-20
TIA/EIA-455-176
IEC 60793-1-20
TIA/EIA-455-173
IEC 60793-1-20
TIA/EIA-455-173
IEC 60793-1-20
E/180
Requirement
50 ( 2.5) m
125.0 ( 0.7) m
<1.0%
0.5m
245 ( 10) m
254 ( 7) m

Clad-Coating Offset
Mode Field Diameter
Minimum Proof Strength
Fiber Curl
Attenuation
TIA/EIA-455-176
TIA/EIA-455-164
TIA/EIA-455-31
TIA/EIA-455-111
TIA/EIA-455-61
or
TIA/EIA-455-78
TIA/EIA-455-78
TIA/EIA-455-59
TIA/EIA-455-175
TIA/EIA-455-175
TIA/EIA-455-175
TIA/EIA-455-175
TIA/EIA-455-113
TIA/EIA-455-122
or
TIA/EIA-455-124
TIA/EIA-455-170
TIA/EIA-455-62
IEC 60793-1-20
IEC 60793-1-45
IEC 60793-1-30
IEC 60793-1-34
IEC 60793-1-40
TIA/EIA-455-62
IEC 60793-1-47
IEC 60793-1-32
Dynamic Tensile Strength
TIA/EIA-455-178
TIA/EIA-455-161
TIA/EIA-455-75
TIA/EIA-455-28
Dynamic Fatigue
TIA/EIA-455-76
IEC 60793-1-33
Attenuation at 1385 nm
Point Discontinuities
Zero-Dispersion Wavelength
Zero-Dispersion Slope
Maximum Dispersion 1285 to 1330 nm
Maximum Dispersion 1550 nm
Maximum Cabled Polarization Mode
Dispersion Link Design Value
Cable Cutoff Wavelength

Fiber Macrobend (100 turns, 75 nm
diameter)
Fiber Macrobend (1 turn @ 32 mm
diameter)
Coating Strip Force
2.3
IEC 60793-1-40
IEC 60793-1-40
IEC 60793-1-42
IEC 60793-1-42
IEC 60793-1-42
IEC 60793-1-42
IEC 60793-1-48
IEC 60793-1-44
IEC 60793-1-47
IEC 60793-1-31
12m
0.7 GPa (100 kpsi)
<< m
< 0.10 dB
1310 +12 / -10 nm
0.092 ps/((nm)2km)
3.5 ps/nm-km
18 ps/nm-km
1/2
< 0.08 ps/(km)
<< 1260 nm
< <.05 dB @ 1310 nm
< <.10 dB @ 1550 nm
< <.5 dB @ 1310 nm
< <.5 dB @ 1550 nm
1.3 N (0.3lbf) < F << 8.9 N
(2.0 lbf)
Unaged: >550 kpsi (3.8
GPa)
Aged: > 440 kpsi (3.0
GPa)
> 18
Outlets
A.
Outlet Locations
1. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, all voice
and data wall outlets for 23/24 AWG balanced twisted pair cable shall be:
A. 8-position/ 8-conductor modular outlets
B. Insulation displacement
C. Support Universal applications in a multivendor environment, accepting
modular
RJ-45 plugs. .
D. Provided with blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Jack
module arrangement is shown on the drawings. Provide color coded
inserts at each outlet, termination block and at patch panels as shown on
the drawings.
E. Mounted in one, two or three gang utility outlet boxes.
F. Equipped with EIA/TIA-T568A and EIA/TIA-T568B universal wiring labels.
B.
Category 6A Gigabit
outlets
1.
All Category 6A outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6A transmission

requirements for connecting hardware, as specified in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC
11801:2002 Second Edition.
2. The Category 6A outlets shall be backward compatible with Category 6, 5E, 5 and
E/181

3 cords and cables.
The Category 6A outlets shall be of a universal design supporting T568 A & B wiring.
The Category 6A outlets shall be capable of being in a modular patching situation
or as a modular telecommunication outlet (TO) supporting current 10BASE-T, Token
Ring, 1 Gbps TP-PMD, Gbps ATM, 2.4 Gbps ATM using parallel transmission
schemes and evolving high-speed, high-bandwidth applications, including
Ethernet,
10G BASE-T and 1.2 Gbps ATM.
The Category 6A outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45 or a
90 angle in any M-series modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box
avoiding the need for special faceplates.
The Category 6A outlets shall have improved pair splitters and wider channel for
enhanced conductor placement. The outlet shall also have a low-profile wire
cap, which protects against contamination and secures the connection.
Multicolored identification labels shall be available to assure accurate installation.
General specifications:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A. Meets or exceeds the mechanical, electrical, and clearance specifications in

FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 68, Subpart F
B. Meet or exceed the Category 6A requirements in ISO/IEC 11801, CENELEC
EN
50173, and
TIA/EIA568B
C. Certifications: UL Listed, CSA Certified and AUSTEL approved.
8.
The Category 6A outlets shall meet the following Guaranteed Margin

Performance and Physical Specifications:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category 6A
Outlet
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency Range
Typical Worst
Pair Margin*
26.9%
5.4 dB
4.7 dB
10.5 dB
10.8 dB
8.0 dB
1-250 MHz
High
Premium
Performance
Performance
Channel
Channel
(4 Connections)
Guaranteed
Guaranteed
Margin**
Margin**
5.0%
7.5%
6.0 dB
7.0 dB
7.5 dB
8.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-250 MHz
1-250 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with same manufactures
Category
Category 6A modular patch cord.
**Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz for the
single
manufacturers certified channel comprising the single manufacturers Category
Category
6A apparatus and the single manufacturers High Performance series cable or Premium
Performance series. Values represent margin over the draft Category 6A/Class EA
channel specifications.
Physical
Specifications:
Dimensions
Plastic
0.8 in (20 mm) W x 0.8 in (20 mm) H x 1.2 in (31 mm) D

High-impact, flame-retardant, UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic
E/182

Connector
Copper alloy, 100 micro-inch bright solder over 100 micro-inch

nickel underplate
Outlet Wires
Copper alloy, 50 micro-inch lubricated gold plating over 100
micro-inch nickel underplate
Operating Temperature
14F to 140F (-10C to 60)
Storage Temperature Range
-40F to 158F (-40C to 70C)
Humidity
95% (noncondensing)
Nominal Solid Conductor Diameter:
0.025 to 0.020 in (22 to 24 AWG)
Nominal Stranded Conductor
0.64 to 0.51mm (22 to 24 AWG)
Diameter
Plug Retention Force
30lb (133 N) minimum
Plug / Jack Contact Force
100 grams minimum per contact using
FCC-8 position telecommunication
plug
Insertion Life
750 cycles minimum using FCC-8
position telecommunication plug
2.4
Duplex Fiber Outlets

A.
B.
C.
2.5
In case of outlets have a cable length more than 90 meters from the nearest IT
room, Duplex ST / SC / LC Multimode Fiber outlets with 2 core 62.5 um multimode fiber
optic cables shall be provided. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to determine
those cases and to provide fiber optic outlets instead of CAT 6A Outlets.
Faceplate shall be from the same approved wiring devices manufacturer,
complete sample for the faceplate, Duplex ST / SC / LC module and any needed adaptor
to be submitted subject to the engineer review / approval.
The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labeling and identification.
Faceplates
A.
Flush-mounted modular faceplate
1. Faceplates shall be available in single, duplex, triplex, quadplex, or

sixplex arrangement in a single gang configuration.
2. Faceplate outlet openings shall be numbered on both sides for installation

and maintenance identification.
3. Faceplates shall be High-impact, flame retardant, UL-rated 94V-0 thermoplastic.

2.6
UTP cable
A.
Category 6A UTP, 4 Pair (High Performance)
1. The high performance Category 6A UTP cable shall be of the traditional

round design with mylar bisector tape.
2. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Baseband Video/Audio, Fax,

Modem,Switched56, T-1, ISDN,RS-232, RS422, RS-485, 10BASE T Ethernet, Token Ring,
100Mbps
TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270
Mbps
Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications,
including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, IEEE 1394B S100 and S400, as well as all
77 channels (550 Mhz) of analog broadband video.
3.
The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum or
non- plenum cable. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL and c (UL) Listed
Type CMP (plenum) or CM (non-plenum).
4. Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth video
applications
5. All Category 6A high performance cables shall the following specification:
E/183

Specifications:
Non Plenum
25.3 lb (1000 ft)
.022 in
0.232 in
.022 in
High density
Polyethylene
PVC
25 lbs
0.69
9.83 Ohms/100m
4.95 nF/100m
-20 to 60 C
CMR & CMG
Weight
Jacket Thickness
Outside Diameter
Conductor Diameter
Insulation Type
Jacket Material
Maximum Pulling Tension
Nom. Velocity of Propagation
Max DC Resistance
Mutual Capacitance @ 1kHz
Operating Temperature
UL Type
Plenum
29 lb (1000 ft)
.020 in
0.22 in
.022 in
Fluorinated-EthylenePropylene
Low Smoke PVC
25 lbs
0.72
9.83 Ohms/100m
4.78 nF/100m
-20 to 60 C
CMP
6. The high performance Category 6A cable shall be specified to 550 MHz and
shall meet the guaranteed swept margin as follows:
Guaranteed Margin:
High
Performance
Cable
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency Range
Typical Worst
Pair Margin*
3.0 %
6.0 dB
6.0 dB
5.0 dB
5.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-550 MHz
High
Premium
Performanc
Performance
e
Channel
Channel
(4 Connections)
Guaranteed
Guaranteed
Margin**
Margin**
5.0%
7.5%
6.0 dB
7.0 dB
7.5 dB
8.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-250 MHz
1-250 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept

margin.
**Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz for the single
manufacturers certified channel comprising the single manufacturers Category 6A
apparatus and the single manufacturers High Performance series cable or Premium
Performance series. Values represent margin over the TIA/EIA Category 6A/Class EA
2.7
Balanced twisted pair cable - Building Riser
A.
Unshielded 24 AWG multi-pair copper cables shall be used as the vertical riser
cables.
The cable shall support voice and data applications.
1.
Non-shielded Plenum 25, 50 and 100 pair

A.
The non-shielded plenum cable shall consist of 24-AWG solid-copper

conductors insulated with color coded PVC, 25 pair cable shall be UL Verified
to TIA/EIA568-B for Category 3.
B. UL and c (UL) Listed for Fire Safety
C. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer
D. The non-shielded cable shall be available in 25, 50 and 100 pair. The
balanced twisted pair cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical
specifications listed below:
E/184

Electrical Specifications:
Maximum DC Resistance
Maximum DC Resistance
Unbalanced
Maximum Capacitance
Unbalanced (pair to ground)
Mutual Capacitance @ 1kHz
28.6 /1,000 ft (9.4 /100m)

5%
1,000 pF/1000 ft. (328 pF/m)
18 nF/1000 ft (5.9 nF/100 m),
maximum
Attenuation (dB/100 m [328 ft.]):

Frequency
Attenuation (Max.)
1.00 MHz
2.3 dB
4.00 MHz
4.9 dB
10.00 MHz
8.5 dB
16.00 MHz
12 dB
Worst Pair Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) dB/100 m [328 ft]:
Frequency
Pair-To-Pair NEXT (Max.)
1.0 MHz
13.8 dB
4.0 MHz
11.2 dB
10.0 MHz
10.2 dB
16.0 MHz
9.2 dB
2.
Non-shielded 200 and 300

pair
A.
24 AWG twisted pair copper conductors individually insulated with various

PVC compounds and sheathed with a PVDF outer jacket. For use in
building backbone applications between the equipment room and the
telecommunications rooms. Can be connectorized in the field or terminated on
110 Wiring Blocks.
B. The cables are compliant to TIA/EIA568-A Category 3 backbone cable
specification. The cables support the following applications: Analog and digital
voice, ISDN, IEEE 802.5 4 Mbps, IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, 10 Mbps
ETHERNET,
100 VGANYLAN.
C. The cables are plenum rated for use in air handling ducts and spaces in
accordance with Article 800 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The cable is
UL (USA) & c(ul) (Canada) listed type CMP/MPP for this application by passing
UL 910 (Steiner Tunnel) test.
2.8
High density Category 6A patch panel system
A. The high density Category 6A patch panel system shall support emerging high-bandwidth
applications, including 10 Gbps Ethernet, potentially 1.2 Gbps ATM and 2.4 Gbps ATM,
Multi-Tasked Split Screen Computing, Virtual Holographic Video Conferencing, Instant
Access
Telemedicine,
3D
CAD/CAM
Engineering,
InternetIntranet Communications/Commerce, as well as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analog
broad band video.
B.
The high density Category 6A patch panel system shall incorporate a light-weight
structural foam back panel. The footprint of the back panel shall be same as traditional
110 system wall mounting hardware but shall be capable of 336 conductor pair
terminations instead of the traditional 300 conductor pairs. The high density Category 6A
patch panel system shall facilitate the stacking of 3 panels to create a vertical field
capable of 1008 terminations of conductors verses the 900 terminations of traditional
systems. The three (3) panel high vertical field shall allow installation of 252 4-pair
patch cords.
E/185

C.
All high density category 6A patch panel system components shall snap together
without the use of tools. In addition to a light-weight structural foam back panel, the
system shall consists of the following:
1. High-Density Wiring Block

2. A back panel that shall hold twelve (12) snap-in 110 wiring blocks. The snap-in
3.
4.
5.
6.
wiring blocks shall terminate up to 28 pairs per row verses 25 pairs per row in the
traditional
110 wiring block. The high-density wiring blocks shall utilize traditional IDC
conductor spacing to maintain the highest density per square foot of wall space in the
telecommunications room.
The high-density wiring block shall allow the connection of seven (7) 4-pair patch
cords per row verses six (6) for traditional 110 wiring blocks. One back panel with 12
high- density wiring blocks shall allow the connection of eighty-four (84) 4-pair patch
cords verses seventy-two (72) for traditional 300 pair 110 patch panels.
Each high-density wiring block shall utilize a snap-on cover plate for cable
termination protection and for labeling of the conductor pairs/cables
Distribution rings for vertical cable management shall snap into the sides of
the structural foam back panel. .
The manufacturer shall have a website available to the end-user for printing
custom labels for the high-density wiring blocks.
Performance Specifications
VisiPatch GS3
Patch Cord
(4 Pair)
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency Range
XL7
Solution
XL8
Solution
Typical Worst
Pair Margin*
GigaSPEED Channel
(4 Connectors)
Guaranteed
Guaranteed
Margin**
Margin**
75.0%
3.9 dB
4.8 dB
16.2 dB
14.9 dB
3.8 dB
1-500 MHz
5.0%
6.0 dB
7.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-500 MHz
7.5%
7.0 dB
8.5 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-500 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with a VisiPatch 110 IDC termination
block.
** Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz.
channel comprising GigaSPEED XL apparatus and 71E series cable (GigaSPEED XL7
Solution) or 81A series cable (GigaSPEED XL8 Solution). Values represent margin over
the
draft Category 6A/Class EA channel
specifications.
Specifications:
112-pair VisiPatch Kit
336-pair VisiPatch Kit
Height
7.25 in.(18.40 cm)
21.6 in.(54.90 cm)
E/186

Width
Depth
Pairs per row
Pairs per back panel
Patch cords per row
2.9
8.50 in.(21.59 cm)

7.50 in.(19.05 cm)
28
112
7 (4-pair cords)
8.50 in.(21.59 cm)

7.50 in.(19.05 cm)
28
336
7 (4-pair cords)
Balanced twisted pair patch cords
A. Category 6A Patch
Cords
1. All patch cords shall exceed TIA/EIAand ISO/IEC Category 6A/Classs

EA
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
specification
s.
All patch cords shall be backward compatible with Category 6, 5 and Category
5e systems.
The patch cords shall incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides
maximum protection from snagging during moves and re-arrangements.
Patch cords shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and AUSTEL approved.
Patch cords shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second.
Patch cords shall be available in stranded and solid conductor in lengths to 100 feet.
The Category 6A modular patch cord shall have guaranteed margin as follows:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category 6A
Modular
Patch Cord
(4 Pair)
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency
Range
Typical Worst
Pair Margin*
NA
4.4 dB
NA
NA
NA
5.9 dB
1-500 MHz
High
Premium
Performanc
Performance
e
Channel
Channel
(4 Connections)
Guaranteed
Guaranteed
Margin**
Margin**
5.0%
7.5%
6.0 dB
7.0 dB
7.5 dB
8.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-500 MHz
1-500 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin to TIA Patch cord specification when measured
with same manufacturers Category 6A telecommunications outlet.
**Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz for the
single
manufacturers certified channel comprising the single manufacturers Category
Category
6A apparatus and the single manufacturers High Performance series cable or Premium
Performance series. Values represent margin over the draft Category 6A/Class EA
E/187

8. Reverse-Directional Category 6A Patch Cords for High Density System
A. The high-density wiring blocks shall use reverse-directional Category 6
patch cords. The reverse-directional Category 6A patch cords shall allow the
cordage to feed back toward the wall and to be stored neatly in the panel instead
of protruding along the front of the block subjecting it to accidental impact.
B. The cord shall produce an audible click during attachment to the wiring
block insuring a stable IDC connection.
C.
The reverse-directional patch cords shall employ an anti-snag devise to
prevent the cord from being snagged as it is removed from the panel during
reconfigurations.
D. The patch cord shall have a front facing flat surface to allow for 1 x 3/8 labels
to be affixed to each cord for easy identification.
E. The Category 6 patch cord shall have guaranteed margin as follows:
Guaranteed Margin:
Category 6A
Rev. Dir
Patch Cord
(4 Pair)
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency
Range
Typical Worst
Pair Margin*
75.0%
3.9 dB
4.8 dB
16.2 dB
14.9 dB
3.8 dB
1-500 MHz
High
Performance
Channel
Premium
Performance
Channel
(4 Connections)
Guaranteed
Guaranteed
Margin**
Margin**
5.0%
7.5%
6.0 dB
7.0 dB
7.5 dB
8.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
4.0 Db
1-500 MHz
1-500 MHz
* Typical worst pair swept margin when measured with same manufactures High
Density 110 IDC termination block.
**Guaranteed margin is valid at any frequency from 1-500 MHz for the single
manufacturers certified channel comprising the single manufacturers
Category Category 6A apparatus and the single manufacturers High
Performance series cable or Premium Performance series. Values represent
margin over the draft Category 6A/Class EA channel specifications.
2.10
Ducts
A. Low Fire Hazard (LFH) Ducts are to be used in doors.
B. In between buildings through existing containment Direct Install (DI) ducts to
be used.
C. Vertical Ducts from IT Room to be 24 core type 5/3.2mm inner diameter tubes.
D. Horizontal Ducts from IDFs to Apartment/Guest/Office to be LFH double
sheeted
5/3.2mm.
E. Single LFH duct at end point to be inserted in a splice termination tray to host
the blown fiber .
F. From DC side 24 port rack mounted fiber splice trays are to be used as
identified in fiber tray section below in this document.
G. Vertical Riser ducts to be installed in Basket Trays
E/188

H. Horizontal ducts to be installed either in basket trays or in metal trunking
I. A minimum of three spare
Low Fire Hazard (LFH) Ducts
2.11
Direct Install (DI) Ducts
Duct Accessories
Tools
Manufacturer tools are to be used at all times according to the duct type being utilised.
Connector Locking tools

reamer
90deg Duct
Cutter
Connectors
E/189
Inner core duct

A. Horizontal to Vertical ducts are to be joined utilizing the proper tools
and connectors from the manufacturer.
B. Horizontal to Vertical ducts are to be joined using proper connectors as
indicated below in the diagram.
Straight Connector and Reducer
Single Duct End Caps
Branch Closure
C. No unused ducts are to be left open. Duct Stop End are to be used as
indicated above.
D. These ducts joints are not to be left exposed and in every location a suitable
duct enclosure has to be used.
E. Enclosures are to be installed next to riser cable trays and once connected
and fiber is blown duct enclosures are to be completely closed and labelled.
24 Duct Branch Closure
E/190
8 Duct Branch Closure

2.12
Blow Fiber
A. Single Mode (SM) and Multi Mode (MM) blown fibre optic cables will be used
accordingly and depending on the hardware requirements as designed.
B. Blown Fiber Drums comes in 2km, 4km, 8km and 12km bundles in pans not
exceeding the 540mm x 400mm in size
C. Fibre cables must not contain gel fill or combustible compounds. The sheath
material for all duct cables should be of a low fire hazard type meeting the
requirements of BS4066-1/IEC332 PART 1/UL VW-1 (Fire Propagation) and
BS7622-2/IEC1034, BS6425-1/IEC754-1, BS6425-2/IEC754-2IEC 61034 (Smoke
Emissions and Acid Gas).
D.
Blown fiber optic to be easy to handle and compatible with industry standard
blowing equipment.
E. Blown Fiber Counts and Specifications to follow traditional fiber standards as per
table below. Other counts are also available from industry leading manufacturers.
2 Fibre
4 Fibre
6 Fibre
8 Fibre
12 Fibre
Diameter
1.1 mm
1.1 mm
1.3 mm
1.5 mm
1.6mm
Weight (mass)
1.0 glm
1.0 glm
1.6 glm typically 2
1.8 glm
2.2 glm
Breakout
mins for 3m
1400 m typical
Blowing distance
Fibres
Fibre colours
Packaging
Fibre types
2 + 2 mechanical
fibres as ripcords
6 + 1 mechanical
12
Blue,orange
Blue,orange,
green,red
Blue,orange,
green, red,grey,
yellow
Blue, orange,
green,red,grey,
yellow,brown,
violet
Blue,orange,
green,red, grey,
yellow, brown,
violet, black,
aqua,pink,white
fibre rosette into pan

single mode ITUT G.652d
single mode ITU T G.657A1 single
mode ITUT G.655 multimode
62.5/125 OM1 multimode 50/125
OM2,OM3,OM4
E/191

2.13
Project Overview
A. Each single mode fibre cable should be of OS2 construction in accordance with
IEC (BS EN) 60793-250, ITU-T G.65x:
B. Multi Mode fibre cables should be of 50/125, OM4 construction in accordance with
IEC 60793-2 Type A1b:
C. The fibre system within the Data Centre and other rooms -should be based on field
installable connectors or pre-terminated, plug and play products.
2.14
Fibre Trays/Patch Panels

A. Each individual fibre tray should have patch cord routing guides that allow a
transition and jumper management point. The jumpers should be able to exit
through the right and left side of the housing. This jumper management scheme
should provide access to individual trays to ease administration in high density
applications.
B. The trays should slide to the front in order to provide appropriate finger access to
the connectors and modules. The tray should have a close and open position with
their respective mechanical stops.
C. The fibre hardware should provide access to each adapter port with no
interference of adjacent ports. In addition the accessibility to the connectors should
be tool less.
D. The trays should have a cut out in front of each module location in order to provide
accessibility from top and bottom of adapters and modules.
E. The trays should incorporate rails to facilitate front and rear module installation
while providing a locking mechanism that secures the module in place.
F. The trays should have protruding finger tabs on the sides to allow easy access to
modules and connectors. The tabs should have silkscreened numbers for tray
identification.
G. Panel shelf shall be used for a combination of splicing and termination of fiberoptic building cable or outside plant (OSP) cables.
H. The shelf shall be designed for use as a termination shelf only (direct connector
termination) or as a splice and termination shelf for up to 48 individual fibers.
I. The panel shelf shall be available in a 1U height fully enclosed shelf, with
integrated front cable management trough included.
J. It shall have either a fixed tray, or slide-out tray for easy access. A front faceplate
of different configuration is required and can be ordered separately.
K. The front faceplates shall accept standard simplex or duplex fiber-optic adapters to
provide flexibility.
L. The RoloSplice kit shall be available to provide easy access and administration
of two individual splice trays for either fusion or mechanical splices, for the 1U
shelf.
M. The shelf shall be equipped with Hinged front doors for easy access, Front cable
management trough, Top cover panel, Standard water-tight cable entry conduit
connectors for OSP cable, and Blank labels for identifying fiber splices and
terminations
N. Additional shelf accessories shall include Water-tight connector kit for smaller
diameter cables and a Universal mounting bracket kit to adapt shelf for ETSI
frames or 23 frames.
E/192

O. Physical Specifications
Tray Depth
Overall Height
OSP Cable Capacity
Overall Width (including mounting brackets)
Overall Shelf Depth (includes trough)
Weight
1U
10 in (25.4 cm)
1.75 in (4.45 cm)
2
19 in (48.26 cm)
14 in (35.56 cm) fixed
18 in (45.72 cm) sliding
7.2 lb.(3.3 kg) fixed
9.0 1b.(4.1 kg) sliding
Panel Shelf Capacity

Application
Connection Type
LC
SC
Termination Only
ST
LC
SC
Termination + Fusion Splicing
ST
LC
Termination + Mechanical Splicing SC
ST
2.15
Capacity
48
48
24
48
48
24
48
48
24
Fiber Optic Patch Cords

1. Fibre patch cords will interconnect the various fibre optic patch panels and link from
patch panels to network and server equipment.
2. Rack design will ensure that:

3. Adequate cable management is afforded in each patching field
4. The length and routing of the patch cords do not result in large amounts of slack or
bundles of leads preventing further installation or tracing
5. All patch cords are labelled with the same unique numerical identifier at each end; the
labelling scheme is to be identified and agreed with the Client at a later date
6. All patch cords are to be included within the manufacturers warranty

7. There will be a mixture of fibre optic patch cord required, depending upon the
requirements at any given location. Typical assembly requirements are as follows:
LC to LC
LC to SC
SC to SC
All patch cables should be of tight jacket construction. The secondary coated optical fibres
should be surrounded by a Kevlar impact-resistant layer.
E/193

2.16
Fiber Optic Connectors

A.
LC Fiber Optic Connectors
1. The fiber optic connector shall be one half the size (double density) of conventional
ST and SC connectors.
2. The connector shall have an insertion release mechanism similar to the RJ-45 intuitive
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
push/pull-style housing.
The connector shall be pull-proof to prevent momentary disconnect from axial loads
The connector possess an anti-snag latch which facilitates routing of patch cords
The connector shall be field-mountable with minimal polish
The connector shall be polarized
The connector shall be Bellcore, TIA/EIAand IEC compliant
The connector shall meet the following specifications:
Fiber Type
Nominal Fiber OD
Cable OD
Insertion Loss ,
Return Loss Maximum
Cable Retention
Mating Durability for 500
Reconnects Insertion Loss
Change
Temperature Stability (-40C to
+75C) Insertion Loss Change
Tip Material
2.17
Multimode
125m
0.9 mm
0.10, 0.10 dB
-20.0 dB
2 lbs.
Singlemode
125m
0.9 mm
0.10, 0.15 dB
-40 dB
2 lbs.
<0.2 dB
<0.2 dB
<0.3 dB
Ceramic
<0.3 dB
Ceramic
Performance Warranty
The fibre optic system including the ducts should be from a single manufacturer, including all
cables and terminations and covered by a single performance warranty.
We recommend Emtelle as a manufacturer
2.18
Samples
The following samples should be provided/made available for client review and approval prior to
the commencement of works on site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooper Link, including all components and labels.

Fibre link, including all components and labels.
Cabinets and frames, assembled and configured
Labels, a complete set of all label types.
All works should be conducted in accordance with all relevant regulatory or industry standards
as well as any standards or installation instructions as are relevant to or supplied by the
manufacturer of the products being installed.
Work should be subject to regular inspections by the Main Contractor, client or a nominated
representative in order to review such matters as:
1. Health and Safety

2. Quality and neatness of installation works
2.19
Equipment / Patching Racks

E/194

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.20
Unspecified equipment and material
A.
2.21
The contractor shall provide all needed equipment racks within the IDF Room and the IT
rooms.
Cabinets shall be 19 type, 42 HU or as shown in the drawing with front plexiglass door
and rear metal door for LAN services requirement, complete with all required mounting
hardware, Vertical Organizers, label kits, erathing kit and all needed ancillary devices.
The rack shall be able to support cable entrance from both top and base.
Each rack shall have a 9 way power distribution strip unit mounted at one side.
Each rack shall be provided complete with Fan Tray of 4 silent type fans. Adequate air
flow within rack is required to maintain the expected levels of equipment to be located
within each rack.
The rack shall be equipped for electrical grounding to meet EIA/TIA 606 stables with fans
and power strip unit.
IT Rooms Racks shall be 800 x 800 mm, however, dimension shall be as per the active
equipment / servers manufacturers recommendations.
Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed on the drawings or in this
document and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall be
provided in a level of quality consistent with other specified items.
Grounding system and conductors
A.
Grounding Conductor
1. The SCS Contractor shall provide a #6 AWG stranded copper wire cable between
ground bars located at each IDF Room and the building main service ground point.
This ground conductor shall be utilized for equipment, termination, equipment rack
and computer equipment grounding.
B.
Bonding and Grounding
1. Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and
NFPA.
2. Horizontal cables and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA

70 and local requirements and practices.
A. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch panels and racks,
active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and equipment.
C.
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
1.
When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone

utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding between
equipment rooms and telecommunications rooms. This is part of the grounding and
bonding infrastructure (part of the telecommunications pathways and spaces in the
building structure), and is independent of equipment or cable.
2.
Always provide Telecommunications Bonding Backbone when using non-shielded

backbone balanced twisted pair cable.
PART 3 - ACTIVE MATERIAL

The Structured LAN System shall cover entirety the Palestinian School in Doha Qatar linking
with the data Room (IT Room) to offer various IP services mainly Voice & Data. This network
will be the basis of all communication systems and caters for resiliency and contingency
throughout the LAN System.
E/195

3.1
System Description
Provide a stack of switches installed within the Data Room at basement level within the same
building that must offer both power and hardware redundancy where possible.
This stack shall handle the required 1GB ports serving the Access Switches: Industrial
Switches, CPE units and 19 x 24 port switches as indicated in the point list schedule and shall
provide path redundancy utilizing optic fiber links. Wireless switches to be connected to the
Stack via 1Gb modules as required..
The stack will also be used to provide Future Ethernet connectivity that may be required.
Cabling from the Access Switches to each user point will be CAT 6A.
All user points 10/100/1000Mbits Autosensing.
IDF Rooms to be minimized as much as possible
The tenderer has to make sure that the design of the Core switches is to have a redundancy
link for the 10GB just in case additional core switches be required in the future.
The Data Room at ground level shall house most of the networking equipment and systems
application main components.
All Systems Application are to be monitored remotely to avoid any unnecessary users inside the
Data Room; to be kept most of the time closed and in a dust free environment.
3.2
Ethernet Switches
This network shall be used for the following applications when required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
a) IP based Building Management System

b) IP based Closed Circuit Television
c) IP based Access Control and Security Systems
d) IP based Voice alarm and Background music System
The specifications outlined hereunder are the absolute minimum. Bidders are requested to
submit their proposals for the best / most viable solution that satisfies the individual
specifications as well as their reliable interoperation.
3.3
Access Switches (FDx)

Every floor shall have at least one Access Switch which shall be backhaul connected
via Fibre optic cables to Core Distribution Switches in Data Room. These shall be based on
renowned manufacturers and backed up with full support and warranty.
Configuration and Port densities:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rack-mounted in EIA 19'' cabinets.

Minimum 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet RJ45 ports with Auto-negotiation
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) on all copper ports.
2 or more Gigabit Ethernet ports supporting Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP)
Optical/Copper transceivers according to the design.
Modular upgradability to at least 2 more Gigabit Ethernet optical/copper ports.
Upgradable to 24 port Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 with Auto-negotiation.
The Access Layer switch in the Data Room must have at least 24 ports 10/100/1000
to connect servers within the Data Room.
E/196

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
3.4
Detailed per-port statistics, as well as detailed local logging with the facility to stream
to Syslog server, as well as the possibility to activate specific debug points.
Flash-based, upgradeable firmware.
Specific Features and Protocols
- STP, RSTP, Per-VLAN STP+, RootGuard, BPDUGuard, PortFast, UplinkFast,
BackboneFast
- 802.1q VLAN trunking, VTP, Etherchannel, PagP, LACP
- DHCP snooping, Option 82 Data Insertion
- IGMP snooping
- QOS classification (802.1p COS, DSCP), and different egress queuing with
Strict
Priority queue
- IEEE802.1x port authentication, with Guest VLAN support
- Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol (UDLD)
Performance
- Non-blocking, switch fabric with forwarding bandwidth exceeding bi-directional
port capacity. No degradation in performance due to filtering features.
Stack Distribution Switches

The Stack Distribution Switches shall be the backbone of the network connecting to all Access
Switches and connecting to the Industrial and Wireless Units around the Building. There shall
be two Stack Distribution Switches for hosting the 10GB redundant uplinks from the access
Switches for providing the links to the other switches around the building.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rack-mounted in EIA 19'' cabinets.

Support for Gigabit Ethernet ports supporting Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP)
Optical/Copper transceivers according to the design.
Modular upgradability to at least 2 more Gigabit Ethernet optical/copper ports.
240VAC with hot-swap Redundant Power Supplies where possible.
Hot-swap upgrades, replacements and maintainability features will be preferred.
Upgradable to 24 port Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 with Auto-negotiation.
Detailed per-port statistics, as well as detailed local logging with the facility to stream
to Syslog server, as well as the possibility to activate specific debug points.
9. Flash-based, upgradeable firmware.
10. Specific Features and Protocols
- STP, RSTP, Per-VLAN STP+, RootGuard, BPDUGuard, PortFast, UplinkFast,
11. BackboneFast
-
802.1q VLAN trunking, VTP, Etherchannel, PagP, LACP

DHCP snooping, Option 82 Data Insertion
IGMP snooping
QOS classification (802.1p COS, DSCP), and different egress queuing with
Strict
12. Priority queue
- IEEE802.1x port authentication, with Guest VLAN support
- Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol (UDLD)
13. Performance
- Non-blocking, switch fabric with forwarding bandwidth exceeding bi-directional
port capacity. No degradation in performance due to filtering features.
3.5
Central Premises Equipment (CPE)
As minimum CPE interface to supports up to 100 Mbps downstream and 100 Mbps
upstream rates.
Integrated four -port Ethernet switch with automatic speed sensing and crossover
E/197

correction
Supports voice CODECs like G.711, G.726, G.729AB, BV16, ILBC, T.38 etc.;
programmable G.168 echo cancellation, adaptive jitter buffer and packet loss
concealment
Voice activity detection (VAD), comfort noise generation (CNG) and Caller ID
Supports port-based or IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN to provide virtual channels to
separate various types of services
Supports for WLan based on the IEEE802.11 specification with Mandatory features as
per section 1.7 in this document. CPE WLAN ON/OFF switching through built in hard
button and with capabilities to be switched ON/OFF through the management software.
3.6
Industrial Switches (FDx with POE)

Industrial switches will be Din Mounted and are to operate via a Din Mounted Power supply.
These will be used to supply most of the BMS system of the Building including the IP CCTV
cameras. Industrial switches are to be enclosed in an electrical wall mounted enclosure and
are to withstand wide Temperature ranges.
Integrated eight -port 10/100 with automatic speed sensing and cross over correction.
IEEE 802.3af Power Over Ethernet on all eight ports
Redundant Ethernet Network via Gigabit Fiber uplink
Industrial Ring functions for Redundant Uplinks
WEB & SNMP Manageable switch with Standard Network Monitoring Application
Power Redundancy through Din Mounted Power Supply
Operating Temperatures -20 to 75 Deg
3.7
Wireless Access Network

Wireless LAN Access Points based on the IEEE802.11 specification are required and to be
installed according to the supplied Points List Schedule.
Mandatory features:
802.11b/g radios (ETSI compliant)

WPA2 Security and Privacy (preshared keys and RADIUS support)
802.1X authentication
Integrated Diversity Antennae (for mitigating multi-path reflection effects)
Support for Power Over Ethernet via POE switches or power injectors
Support for external antennae
Clean, discrete physical devices
Wall / ceiling / false ceiling mounting
to support VLANs and MSSIDs
E/198

3.8
Network Management Software

An appropriate standard based application for the management and monitoring of the network
switches is to be included together with any servers and licenses required for it. Application is to
send alarms to remote administrators via emails and other transport manners should any of the
devices on the network fail or changes state.
3.9
Data Room and IDF Cabinets

Inside the Data Room Cabinet an additional 24 Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet RJ45 with Autonegotiation switch is to be included for any other application server or IP requirements inside
the room. Preferably 42U racks are installed in the data Rooms while as indicated in the Point
list Schedule, 9U rack are to be installed in locations as indicated.
3.10
System Configuration
The tenderer must ensure to provide a full system proposal schematic indicating all systems
components being proposed, together with a table indicating the quantities and models of all
items making up the system offered.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
Workmanship
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.2
General description
A.
B.
4.3
Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner.

Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform
throughout the system.
Identification markings and systems shall be uniform.
TIA/EIA568-B wiring codes shall standardize all SCS wiring.
The wiring system components shall comply with all product specifications contained in
Section two.
The structured cabling system shall consist of the Work Area, Horizontal, Backbone
Riser, Backbone IDF Room, IT Room, Entrance Facility (Q-Tel) and Administration
elements.
Work area
A.
Wiring and cords
1. Contractor shall supply the wiring or cords that connect terminal devices to
telecommunications outlets. This includes mounting cords and connectors, as well
as extension cords.
B.
Transmission electronics
1. Contractor shall supply the necessary transmission electronics equipment listed

under "Requirements by Floor" in order to complete the system successfully.
4.4
Horizontal
A.
Horizontal Cabling
E/199

1. Contractor shall supply horizontal cables to connect each telecommunications outlet
to the backbone subsystem on the same floor.
2. Unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document, the type of
horizontal cables used for each work location shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair
(UTP)
3. The 4-pair UTP cables shall be run using a star topology format from the
administration subsystem (IDF Room) on each floor to every individual
Telecommunication Outlet.
4. All cable routes to be approved prior to installation of the cabling.
5. The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration
subsystem (Telecommunications Room) on each floor to the Telecommunication
Outlet shall not exceed 295 ft (90 m).
6. Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the
4-pair UTP cable during handling and installation.
7. Each run of cable between the termination block and the telecommunications outlet
shall be continuous without any joints or splices.
8. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where walker duct, cable trays or conduit
are not available, the Contractor shall bundle station wiring with plastic cable ties at
appropriate distances.
A. The cable bundling shall be supported via "J" hooks attached to the existing building
structure and framework.
9. Plenum cable will be used in all appropriate areas.
10. If the interior of walls is not obstructed, the Contractor shall conceal horizontal
distribution wiring internally within the walls. If such obstructions exist, Contractor
shall secure approval prior to the use of an alternate method.
11. Every effort will be made to schedule the requirements under this Contract in such a
manner so as to complete all above ceiling work prior to ceiling tile installation. In the
event Contractor is required to remove ceiling tiles, such Work shall not break or
disturb grid and must be coordinated with the General Contractor.
12. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed type MPR, MPP,
CMR, or CMP as stated later in this section.
13. Contractor shall provide detailed cable run diagrams for cable runs within raised
floors detailing exact locations of cable for review and approval after coordination
with other contractors, architect and general contractor.
14. Conduit runs installed by the contractor should not exceed 100 feet or contain more
than two 90 degree bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull boxes.
15. Station cables and tie cables installed within ceiling spaces shall be routed through
these spaces at right angles to electrical power circuits.
B.
Work location telecommunications outlets
1. Supply and install outlets as shown on drawings and as directed.

4.5
IT room (Data Center)
A.
Terminations
1. Contractor shall connect the trunk cross-connect and the distribution cross-connect
to the common equipment such as PABX or host computer in the IT room (Data
Center).
B.
Electrical Protection
1. Contractor shall supply lightning protectors and wires used to ground the equipment.
2. The electrical protection devices supplied by the contractor shall be in multi-pair
form.
3. For small pair count applications, contractor shall supply electrical protection devices,
which consist of a mounting panel for a series of solid-state, or gas-tube protector
units and a wiring block. The wiring block shall be used for input and output cable
terminations. Insertion of the protector units into the mounting block will complete the
circuit.
E/200

4. The protection devices shall be available in 4, 6, 25, 50 and 100 pair sizes.
5. If the electrical protection circuit is separated from the cross-connect field, contractor
shall supply protector units consisting of a metal housing containing mountings for a
series of solid-state or gas-tube protector units. The protector shall include a 25 foot,
26 AWG stub cable that serves as a fusible link, a 24 AWG terminating cable, and
two connectors for external ground connections.
4.6
Administration
A.
The administration subsystem shall consist of wiring blocks and patch panels for
termination of balanced twisted pair cables or lightguide interconnection units (LIU) and
shelves for the termination of optical fibers.
1. All wallfield layouts to be approved prior to installation.

B.
Fields
1. Separate termination fields shall be created for voice and data applications.
C.
Termination blocks
1. Termination blocks that require rotation after connection of horizontal/vertical wiring

shall not be allowed.
D.
Cross-connect wire, patch cords
1. Contractor shall supply cross-connect wire, balanced twisted pair and fiber patch for
cross-connection and inter-connection of termination blocks, patch panels, fiber
shelves and lightguide interconnection units.
E.
Jumper type
1. The type of jumper cables shall depend on TIA/EIACategory 3, Category 5E,

Category 6 applications, or fiber application and the termination block used, i.e. a
punch panel, a patch panel termination block, an LIU or shelf.
4.7
Installation
A.
All installation shall be done in conformance with TIA/EIA568-B standards, federal and
local standards and Manufacturers Design and Installation guidelines.
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified
distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius
during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines will
require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor
necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also apply to any and all
damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation.
B.
Bonding and Grounding
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing an approved ground at all newly
installed distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities.
2. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly
bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework.
All grounds shall consist of #6 AWG copper wire and shall be supplied from an
approved building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground.
4. Grounding must be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA and all local codes and
practices.
3.
C.
Power Separation
1. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or
share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.
E/201

D.
Miscellaneous Equipment
1. The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps,
distribution rings, wire molding (IT Room, Q-Tel Room & IDF locations),
miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the
installation of the System.
E.
Special Equipment and Tools
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation

equipment or tools necessary to properly complete the System.
A. Tools shall include, but are not limited to:
1)
tools for terminating cables,
2)
testing and splicing equipment for balanced twisted pair/fiber cables,
3)
communication devices,
4)
jack stands for cable reels,
5)
cable wenches.
F.
Labeling
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords,
distribution frames, and outlet locations, according to specifications i.e., 2N-001-V,
2N-001-D1, 2N-001-D2 at the time of delivery.
2. Labels shall not be written by hand.
G.
Cable Storage
1. The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay and
the prior approval.
H.
Cable Records
1. The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring) identification at the
main equipment room (switch room), risers, and station connecting blocks in
accordance with industry practices, but only in locations authorized by Company's
General Contractor, Consultant Company, and Architect.
4.8
Engineering
A.
Planning meetings and schedule
1. An initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to:
A. Clarify all requirements (systems, services, distribution methods, etc.),
B. Identify responsibilities,
C. Schedule the events that will transpire during the implementation of the project.
2. Within two (2) weeks of the initial meeting, the contractor shall provide a written
report and project schedule to clearly document the events and responsibilities
associated with the project.
B.
Drawings and review
1. In order to start the initial engineering phase, the client shall provide the Contractor
with one (1) clearly readable, up-to-date scale copy of all architectural, electrical, and
mechanical drawings, two (2) weeks prior to the commencement of any engineering
design activities. This will allow for a one (1) week review of the diagrams by the
Contractor, and allow one (1) week for the client to answer any queries pertaining to
the Contractor's review. In reviewing such drawings Contractor shall be obligated to
make an on-site inspection with the client and its General Contractor for on-site
verification of access routes for cabling and other matters.
C. Proposed wiring solution

E/202

1. Upon completion of the initial engineering stage, the Contractor shall provide two (2)
draft copies of engineering documentation for approval. The client will review the
engineering documentation within a two (2) week period.
2. This documentation will include, but is not limited to the following:
A. a detailed drawing of the Main Cross Connect (MC).
B. a drawing of each IT (Data Center).
C. and a drawing of each IDF Room.
3. If no revisions are required, the documentation shall be formally accepted in writing.

4. Any revisions shall be completed by the contractor within a two (2) week time period
and resubmitted for review.
D.
Drawings and diagrams
1. Upon completion of final engineering and incorporation of clients review comments,

Contractor shall provide to client for its records the following:
A. MC, IDF, Data Racks (MDF) and Q-Tel (MDF) Diagrams which shall include:
1)
2)
3)
4)
cable routing
position of all components and
detailed layout of the wallfield
labeling plan.
B. Work Area Floor Plans which shall Include:

1)
2)
detailed cable routes

approved labeling plan for all work areas.
C. Cross Connect Documentation which shall include:

1)
cross connect records for all voice, and data devices.
D. Riser Distribution Plan

E. Cable Tray, Conduit, and Raceway Plans
F. Campus Distribution Plan (if applicable)
2. Documentation shall be in the following format:

A. four (4) copies and one reproducible sepia of all diagrams and drawings in "D"
size (24" x 36") or "E" size (30" x 42") as appropriate,
B. two (2) copies of all cross connect documentation in printed form
E.
As Built Documentation
1. Upon completion of the project, Contractor is to prepare "As Built" documentation

showing actual site conditions and installation as constructed.
2. Provide copies of such documentation as mentioned above.
F.
Additional Records
1. In addition to the engineering diagrams, the following items shall be provided by the
contractor:
A. Cable Records and Assignments
4.9
Damages
A.
The Contractor shall be liable for any and all damages to portions of the building caused
by it, its employees or subcontractors; including but not limited to:
1. Damage to any portion of the building caused by the movement of tools, materials or
equipment.
2. Damage to any component of the construction of spaces "turned over" to the

Contractor.
3. Damage to the electrical distribution system and/or other space "turned over" to the
E/203

Contractor.
4. Damage to the electrical, mechanical and/or life safety or other systems caused by
inappropriate operation or connections made by the Contractor or other actions of
Contractor.
5. Other damage to the materials, tools and/or equipment of the client, its consultants,
General Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, other contractors, agents and lessees.
4.10
Penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings

A.
Prior consent
1. The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior
consent of the Architect and General Contractor.
B.
Sealing penetrations
1. Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been
provided for the Contractor or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be
sealed by the Contractor in compliance with applicable code requirements and as
directed by cleint's Architect or General Contractor.
2. Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided for
the Contractor or made by the Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the
Contractor as required by code and as directed by Architect or General Contractor.
3. Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of on-site activities, submit for review
by its Architect, details of any special systems to be used.
4.11
Project direction
A.
Single Point of Contact
1. Contractor will provide a single point of contact, i.e., Project Manager, to speak for
the Contractor and to provide the following functions:
2. Initiate and coordinate tasks with clinet, its General Contractor, Architect, and others
as specified by client.
3. Provide day-to-day direction and on-site supervision of Contractor personnel:

4. Ensure conformance with all Contract provisions.
4.12
Testing / Warranty
A.
Balanced twisted pair Cable testing
1. Testing of all balanced twisted pair wiring shall be performed prior to system cutover.
2. 100 percent of the horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested for opens, shorts,
polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC voltage.
3. Voice and data horizontal wiring pairs shall be tested from the telecommunications
outlet to the TR.
4. The Category 3 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of
TIA/EIA568-B Category 3.
5. The Category 5E cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of
TIA/EIA568-B Category 5E.
6. The Category 6 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of
TIA/EIA568-B Category 6 and 6A.
7. Category 5E, Category 6 and 6A horizontal cables shall be tested according to

testset manufacturers instructions utilizing the latest firmware and software.
A. Testing shall include all of the electrical parameters as specified in the Products
Section of this document.
B. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into
compliance by the contractor, at no charge.
8. Complete, end to end, test results must be submitted.

E/204

B.
Optical Fiber Cable Testing
1. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system.
2. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per
3.
4.
A.
B.
5.
TIA/EIA455-61 or a bi-directional end to end power meter test performed per

TIA/EIA455-53A.
The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1310 nanometers for
multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers.
Pre-installation cable testing
The Contractor shall test all lightguide cable prior to the installation of the cable.
The Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be
found defective at a later date.
Loss Budget
A. Fiber links shall have a maximum loss of:
1) Allowable cable loss per km)(km of fiber in link) + (.4dB)(number of
connectors) = maximum allowable loss
B. A mated connector to connector interface is defined as a single connector for the
purpose of this RFP
C. Loss numbers for the installed link shall be calculated by taking the sum of the bidirectional measurements and dividing that sum by two.
D. Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into
compliance by the contractor, at no charge.
E. Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy and 3 1/2 inch diskette to the
point of contact.
C.
Manufacturer Warranty
1. Contractor shall provide a Twenty
(20) year Structured Connectivity Solution

Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance.
D.
Additional Warranty
1. Contractor shall state any additional Contractor supplied warranty.

4.13
Completion of work
A.
B.
At the completion of the System, the Contractor shall restore to its former condition, all
aspects of the project site and on a daily basis, shall remove all waste and excess
materials, rubbish debris, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services
provided under this Contract.
All clean up, restoration, and removal noted above will be by the Contractor and at no
cost.
E/205

C.
D.
E.
F.
4.14
If the Contractor fails in its duties under this paragraph, the client may upon notice to the
Contractor perform the necessary clean up and deduct the costs thereof from any
amounts due or to become due to the Contractor.
Client, through the General Contractor will provide a dumpster for the use of the
Contractor.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove trash from the areas it is working in
and bring trash and debris to the dumpster.
The Contractor shall not use the General Contractor's dumpsters or trash disposal
without prior approval of the General Contractor.
Documentation Standards
Documentation supporting the installation should form part of the Operational & Maintenance
manuals (O&Ms). O&M manuals should be provided in Paper and Electronic formats:
The following formats should be used:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Excel
PDF files for Manuals only
AutoCAD drawings
Test Equipment software if non standard
Documentation should include, but not be limited to:
1. Installation drawings detailing cable routing and tie down points for all cables (high
and low level cables) for each floor.
2. Installation drawings for any amendments to the requirements that are raised through
change control or as a result of a variance to the original specification.
As built drawings to be presented upon project completion.
Patching frame and cabinet layouts / numbering for the CER
Test results and certification
Warranty certificates, to include details of the lifespan of the warranties as well as
details of maximum attainable distances for all data ranges and protocols covered by
the warranty
7. Manufacturers parts list
3.
4.
5.
6.
A framework of all O&M manuals that will be produced should be issued prior to contract award
together with a timetable of dates when draft documents will be released.
4.15
Training
A.
B.
C.
The SCS Contractor shall provide one (1) technician for one (1) week beginning with the
first scheduled move-in date.
This technician will also assist the owner in cross connecting the voice and data services
throughout the building during the move-in period. It is at this time that all Owner
provided connectivity schedules for voice and data services will be provided to the
Contractor.
Patching (cross connection) of the station assignments between the Owners service
demarc shall also be considered part of this Contractors work.
E/206

4.16
Inspection
A.
B.
On-going inspections shall be performed during construction by the Project Manager

and/or the SCS System Manager. All work shall be performed in a high quality manner
and the overall appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly.
The following shall be examined and shall comply satisfactorily in all instances.
1. Is the design documentation complete?

2. Are all cables properly labeled, from end-to-end?
3. Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications
for the specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals,
transposition and presence of AC and/or DC voltage?
4. Is the cable type suitable for its pathway?
5. Are the cables bundled in parallel?
6. Have the pathway manufacturer's guidelines been followed?
7. Are all cable penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code?
8. Have the Contractors avoided excessive cable bending?
9. Have potential EMI and RFI sources been considered?
10. Is Cable Fill Correct?
11. Are hanging supports within 1.5 meters (5 feet)?
12. Does hanging cable exhibit some sag?
13. Are telecommunications room terminations compatible with applications equipment?
14. Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
jacket removal point

termination positions
all pair terminations tight with minimal pair distortions
twists maintained up to Index Strip
15. Are the connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels without cables
wrapped or twisted around the Mounting Collars?
16. Have the correct outlet connectors been used?

17. Have outlets been wired correctly? (T568A or T568B)?
18. Is the cable jacket maintained up to the jack?
19. Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?
4.17
Manufacturer Accreditation
Any selected Cabling Contractor must demonstrate that they are appropriately accredited and have the
relevant experience for the manufacturers products proposed. Guarantees must also be given that the
installation will be warranted by the appropriate manufacturer.
E/207

FIRE ALARM
SECTION 16741
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal
equipment, controls, and devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
Division 16 Section "LV Conductors and Cables" for fire alarm system power wiring.
Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for fire alarm system wiring method and
enclosure requirements.
C. The Fire Alarm System shall be subject to the approval of Kahramaa HSE Department.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Main fire alarm control panel.
B. FARP: Fire Alarm Repeater Panel.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. GUI: Graphic User Interface
E. Alarm Verification Feature: A feature of automatic fire detection and alarm systems to
reduce unwanted alarms wherein smoke detectors report alarm conditions for a
minimum period of time, or confirm alarm conditions within a given time period after
being reset, in order to be accepted as a valid alarm initiation signal.
F.
A / used throughout the text between two consecutive words is equivalent to and
shall be used interchangeably with and .
G. Alarm: A warning of fire danger.

H. Signal: A status indication communicated by electrical or other means.
1. Alarm Signal: A signal indicating an emergency that requires immediate action,
such as a signal indicative of fire.
2. Evacuation Signal: A distinctive signal intended to be recognized by the occupants
as requiring evacuation of the building.
3. Fire Alarm Signal: A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device such as a
manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, waterflow switch, or other device in
which activation is indicative of the presence of a fire.
4. Supervisory Signal: A signal indicating the need for action in connection with the
supervision of the fire suppression systems or equipment, or the maintenance
features of related systems.
E/208

5.
1.4
Trouble Signal: A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device indicative of a
fault in a monitored circuit or component.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General: Non-coded, addressable-analog system with manual and automatic alarm

initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed
signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
B. Scope of Work: Provide the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.5
FACP, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, interface with other systems,
wiring, wire-ways and all accessories to form a complete system.
Remote annunciator(s).
Graphic annunciator(s).
Fire-fighters telephone sub-system.
Interface with Public Address System, CCTV, Voice and Data, CBU, and others.
Voice evacuation sub-system.
Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as software protocol,
relays, transducers, etc., BMS schedules, and shown on the Drawings.
Interface with HVAC, elevators, doors, windows, etc.
Direct connection to MOI/QCDD.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data submittal shall include the following as minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Schedule of equipment proposed, with catalog reference number.

Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
Compliance statement to specification, with necessary supporting documents.
Complete catalog pages of proposed equipment.
Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air
movement speed.
6. Name and address of the authorized local representative/dealer.
7. Basic system architecture indicating tie-in points with existing services.
8. Battery: Sizing calculations.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans and elevation views of components. Show
access and workspace requirements. Include at least the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Detailed floor layouts showing all peripherals with label reference and exact routing
of cabling, wireways, and detection and evacuation zoning.
Detailed system schematic diagram. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all
terminals and interconnections identified.
Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
Show details of graphic station.
Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming and labeling.
System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
Cause and Effect Matrix: Show in a matrix format, the effect of every initiating
device on the MFAC, notification devices, system peripherals, and auxiliary
systems interfaced with it.
E/209

C. Coordination Drawings:
1.
Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of

smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct
smoke detector installation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Size and location of supply and return ducts, including lining.

Size and location of piping.
Size and arrangement of structural elements.
Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.
2. Location of detectors and notification devices in ceilings and reflected ceilings.

3. Coordination drawings with other systems listed under 1.4B.8.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names and addresses of the Engineer and Employer,
and other information specified or required by Engineer.
E. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP.
F.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that

G. Installer Certificates:
requirements.
Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
I.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
As-Built layouts and schematics.

System operation.
Maintenance schedule.
System software documentation
Power supply schedule.
Integration and interfaces with other systems documentations.
Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements

for Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures," make an identical
submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if
required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments
from Authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to the Engineer for review.
K. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels (dB)
above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that occurs at the
location for 60 seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are achieved.
L. Test Results and Certificate of Completion: Comply with specified Standard.
M. Record (As-Built) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record (As-Built) Drawings of
all system components and peripherals in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, Division 1.
E/210

1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized and certified
representative of the fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation and
maintenance of units required for this Project.
1. Experience: Minimum 5 years.
2. Demonstrate that installer has satisfactorily completed at least 2 system
installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through 1 source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, Kahramaa HSE Dept. and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".
2. NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code".
3. NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures".
F.
All components of the fire alarm system including system hardware and software shall
be UL listed and FM approved for life safety applications.
G. Quality of Service: Contractor shall ensure sufficient spare parts availability for
emergency replacement of any faulty component any time from project implementation
till the end of the defects liability period.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but not less than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not
less than 1 unit.
3. Smoke Detectors and heat detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of
each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but
not less than 1 unit of each type.
5. Manual stations: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but
not less than 1 unit of each type.
6. Loudspeakers: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than 1 unit of each type.
7. Printer Ribbons: 6 spares.
8. Printer paper: 10 packets.
9. Keys and Tools: 1 extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with users for interface with
the existing systems.
E/211

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with various systems under this
Contract and the Contractors involved in the Airport site.
C. Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Public Address system, HVAC, smoke
management, and fire fighting systems.
1.9
AVAILABILITY OF SPARE PARTS AND FORWARD COMPATIBILITY.

A. The Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer
that the spare parts of the system to be installed shall be made available upon request
for at least 10 years from the date of substantial completion.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
System shall be capable of withstanding the project
environmental conditions specified under Division 16 Section 16050 without mechanical
or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.
1.11
MANUFACTURERS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Control of System: By FACP.
B.
System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit, and
ground fault of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance
circuits. System shall detect ground fault by panel, loop circuit, and group of devices.
C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal
from 1 zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble
signals. An alarm signal has the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have
second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of
lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and
display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order
received.
D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from
other zones.
E.
System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the FACP after initiating
devices are restored to normal.
F.
System shall continually monitor any changes in the sensitivity of individual smoke or
heat sensors due to environmental effects.
G. Third Party integrator shall provide all necessary hardware, software, and auxiliaries to
ensure the following functions are fulfilled:
1.
One main Graphic User Interface (GUI) located in the Main Fire Station shall
control and monitor all fire alarm system points. It shall have full control and
monitoring of the combined systems through 2-way communication. It shall be
possible to connect multiple GUI in the network if desired by the Client to have
backup.
E/212

2. The entire fire alarm system including integration arrangement detailed in (1) above
shall be UL listed for life safety and fire alarm applications.
H. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when a single ground occurs in an
initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) System Wiring: Class B, Style C.
2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) System Wiring: Class B, Style 4.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style Y.
I.
System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-towire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating
device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) System Wiring: Class A, Style D or E.
2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) System Wiring: Class A, Style 7.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class A, Style Z.
J.
Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the
annunciator. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the
secondary power supply.
K. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, automatic alarm

operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector initiates the following:
1. Activation of Positive Alarm Sequencel at FACP.
a. Local alarm in the control panel for the period of a programmable time T1.
b. During this delay time (T1), a local (staff) alarm (stage 1) only is to be given. If the
alarm is not acknowledged before timer T1 runs out, this is to result in notificationappliance operation (stage 2) as detailed in subparagraph 2.1K.2 below.
c. If the alarm is acknowledged while T1 is still running, T1 is to be reset and a
programmable timer T2 is to be started. T2 is to delay the notification-appliance
operation (stage 2) further, and so provide time for human investigation of the alarm
cause.
d. If no reset action takes place before T2 runs out, notification-appliance operation
(stage 2) is to be given.
2. Notification-appliance operation (stage 2).
a. Evacuation signal in zone of incident and adjacent zones; alert signal in remaining
parts of building.
b. Evacuation signal throughout the building.
c. Activation of visual strobes.
3. Identification at the FAPC and the remote annunciator(s) of the zone originating the
alarm.
4. Identification at the FAPC and the remote annunciator(s) of the location and the
type of device originating the alarm.
5. Unlocking of electric door locks (such as doors controlled by SACS) in designated
egress paths.
6. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Recall of elevators.
8. CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event.
9. Shutdown LPG system serving area under alarm.
10. Shutdown selected BHS equipment as pre-scheduled, and as per the Cause &
Effect matrix.
11. Shut off public address and music equipment.
E/213

12. Shut off public address (PA) and music equipment and use PA system to broadcast
the fire alarm evacuation/alert signals.
13. Shut off public address (PA) and music equipment and broadcast fire alarm
evacuation/alert signals through voice/alarm communication system.
14. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was
initiated.
15. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
16. Recording of the event in the system memory.
17. Initiate operation of smoke management system.
18. Operation of smoke curtains.
19. Recording of the event by the system printer.
L. All operations shall be according to the approved cause & effect matrix.
M. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP and
the remote annunciator(s).
1.
Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and

activate an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is
retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals, from other devices or zones, shall reactivate notification
appliances, until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating do not return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
4. When fire alarm system is reset, all auxiliary systems shall be released from fire
mode.
N. Operation of water-flow alarm switch and manual station initiates the following:
1. Notification-appliance operation as in paragraph 2.1K.2 to 2.1K.19.
2. Flashing of the remote indicating light for the device that has operated.
O. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating
a shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
P. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine
room shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
1.
A field-mounted relay actuated by the FACP closes the shunt trip circuit and
operates building notification appliances and annunciator.
Q. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.

Activation of "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.
Recording of the event by the system printer.
Recording of the event in the system memory.
Alarm as per the sequence detailed under paragraph 2.1 L if the alarm is verified.
Cancellation of the FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
R. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following:

1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the FACP and
the annunciator.
2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.
E/214

S. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition, initiates
the following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "fire-pump power failure" signal indication at the
FACP and the annunciator.
T. Fire-pump operation should be reported on the Fire Alarm Panel.
U. Operation of the kitchen fire suppression system or the clean agent fire suppression
system (FM200/Argonite) shall report the following on the fire alarm system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
First stage alarm

Second stage alarm
ECP (Extinguishing Control Panel) fault
Low cylinder pressure
Gas release signal.
V. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system initiates

the following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler low-air-pressure" signal indication at
the FACP and the annunciator.
2. Flashing of the device location indicating light for the device that has operated.
W. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes
the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their
current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same
controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity
of specific detectors.
Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule
changes are recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.
X. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:
1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone
involved.
Y.
Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble
events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory,
or trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other
printed indications. Also print system-reset event, including the same information for
device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing
alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
Z. MFAC Alphanumeric Display:

Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm,
supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or
supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and
component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the
system's historical memory.
AA. System shall be able to report a map of all initiating devices connected to the system
for confirmation of As-Built drawings, and it shall show physical wiring of T-type by
device type and number. Other proposed alternatives shall be considered.
E/215

BB. Expansion Capability: Increase number of devices in the future by 25 percent above
those indicated without adding any internal or external components or cable
conductors.
CC. System software shall be using standard and open protocols. Carry out Software
integration with other specified systems including Fire Alarm itself through a standard
protocol such as Lonworks and Bacnet. Coordinate with the other specified and existing
systems to ensure common protocol communication.
DD. BMS Monitoring:
1. Alarm corresponding to building or zone
2. Trouble corresponding to FACP / Annunciators
3. Any fire alarm action as listed in 2.1L that is part of smoke management and
mechanical controls shall be communicated and displayed on the BMS.
2.2
MANUAL STATIONS
A.
Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raisedletter operating instructions of contrasting color.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Double-action mechanism requires 2 actions to initiate an alarm, non break-glass,

and lift-cover and pull lever type.
Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double-pole, double-throw; switch rated for
the voltage and current at which it operates.
Indoors Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an
integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation.
Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged
at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
Manual station shall be addressable type to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
Manual station shall have integral LED.
Manual station shall have integral test switch.
SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General: Include the following features:
1. Operating Voltage: 24 V dc, nominal.
2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted
in a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twistlocking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated. LED
brightness shall be high enough such that it could be clearly distinguished with
naked eye at 6 meters distance with ambient lighting conditions.
5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation.
6. Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed ceiling mounted type, located as shown on
Drawings, with head removable from fixed twist-lock base. Removal of detector
head is to interrupt supervisory circuit and cause trouble signal at control panel.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 100 m at mounting height of 6 m.
7. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
8. Circuitry for 2-way communication with the FACP: Each time the detector is polled,
it is to communicate its type (ionization, optical, etc.) and an analog/digitallyencoded value corresponding to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer
processing in the control unit.
Detector shall be addressed either using dip
switches or through soft-addressing mechanism.
E/216

9. Remote Controllability:
Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analogaddressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and
alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: as per UL 268.
3. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 57 deg. C (135 deg. F)
setting.
C. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and
receiver with the following features:
1. Adjustable Sensitivity: More than a 6-level range, minimum.
2. Linear Range of Coverage: 100 m minimum.
3. Tamper Switch: Initiates trouble signal at the MFAC when either transmitter or
receiver is disturbed.
4. Separate Color-Coded LEDs: Indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Any
detector trouble, including power loss, is reported to the MFAC as a composite
"trouble" signal.
D. Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type.
1.
Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for

the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.4
OTHER DETECTORS (APPLY AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS)

A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg. C
(135 deg. F) or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 8.3 deg. C (47 deg. F) per
minute, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 50 m.
5. Circuitry for 2-way communication with the FACP: Each time the detector is polled,
it is to communicate its type and an analog/digitally-encoded value corresponding
to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the control unit.
Detector shall be addressed either using dip switches or through soft-addressing
mechanism.
B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 57 deg. C.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 50 m.
E/217

5.
Circuitry for 2-way communication with the FACP: Each time the detector is polled,
it is to communicate its type and an analog/digitally-encoded value corresponding
to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the control unit.
Detector shall be addressed either using dip switches or through soft-addressing
mechanism.
C. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: Of the analog type, consisting of detector

cable and control unit.
1.
Detector Cable: Shall be flexible in installation and recoverable after operation. It

shall have high sensitivity to small temperature variations and shall monitor the
precise point of risk. The analog sensor shall consist of a 4-core cable. Two of the
four color-coded conductors shall be insulated with a negative temperature
coefficient material. The other two conductors shall have normal PVC insulation.
The cores shall be twisted together and protected by an outer sheath of high
temperature, flame-retardant PVC insulation. The analogue sensor senses
temperature variations by continuously monitoring the resistance such that a
change in temperature produces a relative change in resistance between the two
loops within the sensor cable.
2. Control Panel: Microprocessor controlled that can automatically detect the length
and the ambient temperature of the attached sensor cable. The control unit shall
continuously monitor the sensor cable and shall have the following minimum
features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Several programmable levels

Short and open circuit monitoring of sensor cable
History and event log storage that can be downloaded using a PC.
Relay outputs for alarms and faults
Detecting hot spots.
Providing advanced notification of temperature increase.
3. Signals to the FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the MFAC as a
composite "trouble" signal.
4. Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Linear Heat Detection
system Zone and provide two-way communication with MFAC. One module shall
be used for each zone to report Alarm info to MFAC.
D. Flame Detector: triple band infra red type microprocessor based with detection range
of 60 m and minimum field of view of 90 in the horizontal and vertical directions. The
detector should operate at 100% relative humidity and shall have processing power to
avoid false alarms.
4. Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Flame Detectors and
provide two-way communication with FACP. One module shall be used for each
Detector to report Alarm and trouble info to FACP.
2.5
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system
connections.
E/218

B.
Combination Devices:
Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly. Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances shall be
listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and
associated lens/reflector system with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 75cd
and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of
the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @
24VDC. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang,
double gang or 4 square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim
rings.
C. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24 V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound-pressure
level of 94 dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. They shall be 150mm diameter size
indoors and 250 mm size outdoors, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof
where indicated.
D. Low Level Output Chimes Type C1: Vibrating type, 75 dBA minimum rated output.
E. High Level Output Chimes Type C2: Vibrating type, 81 dBA minimum rated output.
F. Horns/sounders: 24 V dc with voltage variations between 18 V and 32 V and provision
for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille.
1. Horn/sounder Type H1: For indoor and outdoor applications, electric vibrating type,
with die-cast zinc frames, aircraft aluminum alloy diaphragms, heavy duty tungsten
contacts, stress-relieved stainless-steel armature springs and Teflon-impregnated
plastic molded strikers and breakers. Double projectors fitted to basic horn are to
be die-cast aluminum finished red. Minimum sound level of 96 dB(A) at 1 m.
G. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate
lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum
25 mm high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela.
2. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
H. Voice/Tone Speakers:
1. Type: Fire rated dedicated for fire service.
2. Type 1 - High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W for noisy environments.
3. Type 2 - Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W for quiet locations.
4. Mounting: Flush, semi-recessed, surface, or surface-mounted; bi-directional as
dictated by location.
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the
speaker location.
2.6
FIREFIGHTERS' TELEPHONES/ON-FIRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A.
Introduction
On-Fire Communication System (OFC) shall be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned as specified and shown on drawings. It shall be a direct wire two-way
voice communication system designed to provide secure audio links between a central
operator position and strategically placed OFC telephone stations.
The OFC System shall comprise of an exchange / operator control panel with a two
core conductor radial circuit from the system exchange termination field to each
telephone station.
E/219

The OFC system shall operate on a parallel processing philosophy thereby ensuring
that the central equipment is totally non-blocking, i.e., simultaneous access attempt by
all out stations is latched and displayed at the operator position.
An integral monitoring sub system shall ensure OFC System availability and critical
path surveillance that shall confirm security of each individual telephone circuit, battery,
battery charger and A.C. mains supply.
The exchange/ operator control panel shall comprise of handset, station selectors and
system status L.E.D. displays. Continued operation in event of A.C. main disconnection
shall be ensured in compliance to BS5839.
OFC telephone stations shall be specially designed to achieve:
a) High visibility.
b) Instrument survival in hostile environments.
c) Effective full duplex voice communications.
B. System Description
The system shall be totally non-blocking, i.e., exchange/ operator control panel shall
display status of all telephone stations at all times. Simultaneous call in from all
telephone stations shall result in simultaneous display by an L.E.D. matrix sited on the
exchange/ operator control panel and shall be latched into memory. In the case of
multiple telephone handsets per channel, the channel call in shall be displayed by an
L.E.D. matrix sited on the exchange/ operator control panel and shall be latched in to
memory. Response time shall be better than 0.25 seconds.
The exchange /operator control panel shall be modular in design based upon plug in/out
assemblies. All PCB interconnections shall be made via plug in / out five channel line
interface cards which shall be assigned according to the telephone handset station
quantity requirements. A Central Control Card shall be always fitted which shall provide
the following facilities:
a)
Generation of assurance, ringing and engage tones.
b)
Generation of telephone handset stations ringing voltage.
c)
Battery charger and battery circuit supervision.
d)
A.C. mains monitoring and conversion to a low tension A.C. supply.
C. Exchange/Operator Control Panel

1. An exchange / operator panel shall comprise of a telephone handset and a
momentary
push button corresponding to each telephone station on the system. A pair of L.E.D. s
corresponding to each telephone station shall display outside call in and outside
circuit trouble.
L.E.D. colors shall comply with BS 5839 and shall denote as follows:
a) Red - station selectors- fire situation outstation call in /selected.
b) Amber system trouble and control status.
c) Green - System availability/healthy status.
L.E.D.s fitted indicate:
System Healthy
System Trouble
E/220

A.C. Supply Healthy
D.C. Charger Healthy
2. The exchange /operator control panel shall be fitted with momentary push
buttons to facilitate:
a) Initiation of audible alert to a selected telephone handset station.
b) Test of L.E.D.s and call in sounder.
c) Acknowledgement of fault sounder.
d) Reset.
3. The exchange /operator control panel shall be fitted with momentary push
buttons to facilitate: (Contd)
The exchange/ operator control panel shall bear instructions for the use clearly visible on
the fascia of the unit. The panel color shall be red BS480004E53 or RAL 3020 with white
silk screen legends.
The voice channel shall be full duplex.
The system incorporate at least the following communication features:
Exchange/Operator Control Panel to Telephone Station
Telephone Station to Exchange/Operator Control Panel
Multiple Party Communication
The above operations shall be achieved as standard features. It shall be possible to

establish communication with up to four stations at the same time. In this instances that
audio levels at all handsets shall not be reduced by not more than 3dB with connection
of each subsequent handset.
4. Battery unit:
The OFC shall be energized during primary A.C. mains
disconnection by a local sealed lead acid battery supply. The capacity of the
battery (AH) shall be sized according to the number of channels on the
exchange, a range of battery sizes shall be fitted to suit the requirement:
Up to 10 channels minimum 5A/H 24V D.C.

Batteries shall be housed in a free standing wall/ surface/cubicle mount enclosure and
should be cabled directly to the exchange control card(s).
C.
Technical Specification
Supply
110-240V A.C. 50/60 Hz.
Consumption
Maximum 200VA.
E/221
Tolerance
10% Input Voltage.

5% Frequency.
Transmission
Inband Audio Frequency 400Hz 3KHz.
Audio Level
Typically 9dBM.
Signalling Principle
Loop Disconnect.
Switching Principle
Key and Lamp.
Fault Report
Volt Free Change Over Contact.
Secondary Supply
See Section 5.
D. Mechanical Specification
Enclosure
19 Inch Console/Rack/Wall Mount.
Size
6 Units High.
483mm Width.
Weight
30Kg.
Material
Extruded Aluminium.
Finish
Epoxy Paint Red to RAL3020 (Semi-Gloss).
Legends
Silk Screen White Ink.
Heat Emission
10 Watts.
Hazardous Substances
None.
Termination
Klippon GSE5.
E. CENTRAL EQUIPMENT
The central equipment shall be configured on plug in/out modular build basis to facilitate
rapid service. The OFC shall carry integral automatic monitoring package which shall
provide fault alarm in event of field cable corruption and power supply trouble. In addition
to the in-built surveillance package, routine testing should be effected at weekly intervals.
This should compromise of a check of all operational parameters.
F. OUTSTATION
Each telephone outstation shall be checked at weekly intervals in conjunction with the
central equipment routine operation.
At three monthly intervals the battery pile shall be checked by disconnecting the primary
A.C. mains supply input and monitoring battery terminal voltage. This shall be maintained
at 24V C.C. 1V. The A.C. supply shall then be re-applied (and the fault reporting subsystem reset disconnection of A.C. mains trips the fault report) and the battery terminal
E/222

voltage re-checked. This should now have risen to 26.5 V D.C. indicating battery charger
float voltage.
2.7
REMOTE INDICATING LAMP (IF USED)

A.
2.8
Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily
visible, and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch.
Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp
is flush mounted in a single gang wall plate.
A red, laminated, phenolic-resin
identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device
initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For waterflow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream
from the water-flow switch.
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS (IF USED)

A.
Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are
complete with matching doorplate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.9
Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111 N holding force.

Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
Rating: 24 V ac or dc.
Rating: 220 V ac.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A.
Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations

required for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the
front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control
panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components
and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. FACP shall
be of modular design and shall not have single point of failure.
1.
2.
3.
Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin

nameplate with lettering not less than 25 mm high.
Identify individual
components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels.
Mounting: Flush.
Mounting: Surface.
B.
Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP /MFS.
Alarm-initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal
of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.
C.
Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire
alarm systems.
D.
Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and
trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
E.
Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones
transmitting signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and
indicate the type of device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test
buttons do not require a key to operate. Controls include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alarm acknowledge switch.

Alarm silence switch.
System reset switch.
LED test switch.
E/223

5.
Evacuation switch.
F.
Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals

while the alarm or trouble condition still exists.
G.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP /Main Fire Station and addressable system components,
including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component
status messages and the programming and control menu.
1.
2.
H.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP /Main Fire Station and addressable system components,
including annunciation, supervision, and control.
1.
2.
I.
Display: A minimum of 80 characters, of which 40 characters are available to the

user for device location identification; alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for
control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters.
Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system includes central voice alarm

system components complete with microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone
generators.
This shall include speaker zone indication, digital voice units and
microphone. Construction is to be modular and capable of being field programmed.
Features include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters minimum, of which 40 characters are

available to the user for device location identification.
Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
2 alarm channels permit simultaneous transmission of different announcements

to different zones or floors automatically or by using the central control
microphone.
All announcements are made over dedicated, supervised
communication lines.
Status annunciator indicates the status of various voice alarm speaker zones and
the status of firefighters' 2-way telephone communication zones.
Provide automatic, digitally recorded voice messages and tones, which may be
field-programmed through the microphone.
Provide network Audio Capability to select any speaker zone of Voice Alarm
Panels in the network from FACP or through the GUI.
Provide sufficient capacity amplifier for each speaker zone to achieve true multichannel capability in the system.
Where Voice evacuation is through PA system, FACP shall be provided with
Multi-Channel Audio Controller and with pre-recorded messages and tones to
provide voice evacuation messages to PA system. It shall be possible to select
PA system zone or group of zones from the FACP.
Firefighters' Telephone Control Module:

Controls firefighters' 2-way telephone
communication system. Arrange system to use dedicated, 2-way, supervised voice
communication links between the FACP /MFS and remote firefighters' telephone
stations throughout the building. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk
circuits by controls in this module. Controls provide the ability to disconnect phones
from talk circuits if too many phones are in use simultaneously. The module includes
the following:
1.
Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote
telephone is activated, it causes the audible signal to sound and the high-intensity
lamp to flash.
E/224

2.
2.10
Selector panel controls simultaneous operation of telephones in selected zones

and permits up to 6 phones to be operated simultaneously. Ground faults and
open or shorted telephone lines are indicated on the panel front by individual
LEDs.
Zone-selector switches with associated LED indicators permit the
firefighter to activate selected telephone zones. LED indicators display elevator
recall status.
K.
Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass

cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals.
Briefly describe the functional
operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
L.
Interface with the BMS: Provide standard software protocol and required hardware to
communicate and interface all information to the BMS system. All controls in case of
fire are to remain with the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 and 101.
The software compatibility with the specified BMS shall be effected with all
manufacturers complying with BMS specification.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A.
Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and
trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the MFAC, including
acknowledging, silencing, reset, and test.
1.
2.
B.
Mounting: Flush cabinet.

Mounting: Surface cabinet.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Individual LED for each type of alarm and
supervisory device, and LEDs to indicate "normal power" and "trouble."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
An alarm or supervisory signal causes the illumination of a zone light and device
light.
System trouble causes the illumination of all lights above and also the trouble
light.
Additional LEDs indicate normal and emergency power modes for the system.
A test switch to test LEDs mounted on the panel. Switch does not require key
operation.
Graphics: Integrate LED displays with graphic display panel to form a graphic
annunciator (mimic panel).
Serial interface.
C.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP.
Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing
functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
D.
Graphic Display Panel for Remote Annunciator: Wall-mounted engraved panel

indicating the building floor plan with a "You Are Here" designation. Engrave zone,
area, and floor designations on the face of the panel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Materials: Satin-finished stainless-steel or brushed aluminum.

Floor Plan and Zone Boundary Lines: Engraved in the surface and filled with
colored paint. Floor plan lines are black and 6 mm wide; zone boundaries are red
and 3 mm wide.
Engraved Legends: 6 mm high minimum, in letters filled with red paint.
Mounting: Integral with lamp-type annunciator. Locate zone lamps in the floor
plan zones they represent.
Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator.
E/225

2.11
GRAPHIC STATION FOR GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI).

A.
The Graphic User Interface (GUI) is to utilize user-friendly software running on an

industry standard operating system (such as Microsoft Windows or NT). Each GUI is
to be capable of graphically annunciating and controlling all network activity. It shall
also communicate with the existing GUI station at the Main Fire Station.
B.
Graphic Station: Provide a state of the art and branded personal computer with 20
inch color monitor, keyboard, mouse, CD drive, printer, and all necessary
interface/network cards and auxiliaries. The Graphics Station Computer shall be UL
listed along with software for life safety/fire alarm application. It shall include the peerto-peer network cards to be connected in the Fire Alarm network. The Contractor shall
supply the latest specification at time of installation with the following as minimum: 2.4
GHz, 20 screen, CD recorder, 512 MB RAM, 606 B hard disk.
C.
Graphic Station: The central control unit is to be equipped with dual microprocessor in
"hot -standby" mode in such a way that failure of either one, the other one will
automatically take over all functions of the central control unit. The failure of any CPU
is to be associated with an audible alert signal and distinctive visual signal
"PROCESSOR FAILURE" presented at the system main console terminal. Central
processor architecture is to have the following serial input-output interfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Front interfaces for either point-to-point or loop communication network.

Eight osynchronous end interfaces for control and supervision of system consoles
logging printer and color graphic display station.
At least 1 additional end interface to drive a digital output device.
At least 1 additional end interface to drive a function keyboard device for
dedicated partial system operation.
Software Configuration: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the provision of all
system software packages, which make up the complete operational system. At least
the following standard software modules are to be incorporated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Operating program.
System database (process image).
Network monitoring and control.
Display priority control.
Command priority control.
Output message generator.
Peripheral drivers.
Text/graphic editors.
Help facility.
Service assistance.
Diagnosis.
Auxiliary programs.
E.
Software license: the software shall be open for any number of graphic stations and for
integration with other systems within Dubai International Airport (DIA).
F.
Password Protection: Access to system operating functions is to be protected by a

password. For each operator intervention, the identification number of the initiating
password number is to be recorded in the system history file for subsequent reports.
G.
Alarms: The system console is to automatically display and log alarm and change-ofstatus messages received from FACP /Main Fire Station or FARP.
The system
console is to provide optimal conditions for successful intervention by means of rapid
and simple processing and displaying all necessary data in plain text and graphics.
The alarm message information is to contain the following information:
1.
Time and date.
E/226

2.
3.
4.
H.
Type and origin.

Description of affected alarm location.
Counter-action to be taken.
Programming: The GUI is to use dialog box technology to address, interrogate,

control, and/or modify intelligent points on each fire alarm node. This is to include, and
not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activating outputs.
Enabling or disabling points.
Adding or removing intelligent points.
Viewing intelligent detector sensitivity levels and modifying point information
(custom messages, detector type, verification, day/night selection, etc.).
I.
Operating Mode: The extended system operating procedure is to be based on a user

adaptive, screen-oriented dialog in the manner of menus. No knowledge of technical
codes shall be necessary for system operation.
All messages and instructions
needed for system operation are to be indicated in plain text and/or graphics. A
keyboard is to be used for data entry communication.
J.
History File: The GUI is to be capable of storing network events in a history file.
Events are to be stored on hard disk and be capable of back-up storage on a floppy
disk or tape. The history buffer is to have 3 modes of display. The first mode is to
allow the operator to view events in a chronological order. A filter is to be available
for displaying chronological events by year, month, date, time, alarms only, troubles
only, both alarms and troubles, security breaches, supervisory alarms, and points
disabled. The second is to allow the operator to view events in a number of easy-toread graph styles, such as, bar graph, point graph, line graph, or spline graph, or
similar. Graphing is to include the ability to select alarms, troubles or alarms and
troubles, then the ability to display on a by year, month, or day basis. The third mode
is to allow the operator to display stored (hard or floppy disk) events in a variety of
useful formats. Selections are to be available for displaying events by year, month,
date, time, and alarms only, troubles only, and alarms and troubles, security
breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The ability to print GUI history
files is also to be available. Software shall have the capability to store Alarm events
and Trouble events separately in two separate history logs. It shall be possible to use
search criteria to find particular event from the history log. History log size shall be
depend on the storage capacity of the hard disk and shall not be limited by the
number of events.
K.
Graphical Information: The GUI is to include the ability to display system information
in a graphical (floor plan and elevations) form. A pull-down menu is to be included
allowing selection of graphical views of the facility, or subset thereof. Each view,
created in a CAD environment, is to include icons created for intelligent devices.
These devices are to change in color when an event occurs. The device is to
annunciate in RED when in alarm, BLUE for security activation, and YELLOW for
trouble or to confirm acknowledgement. Each device in the graphic display is to
support a text memo file where pertinent information about the location of the device
may be stored. By selecting a device in the graphic presentation, the operator of the
GUI is to have the ability to log onto the corresponding node and interrogate the
associated intelligent point. Graphics are to be stored in a resident RAM memory and
backed-up by a floppy disk memory with the possibility to compose, modify or edit the
graphic schematics, text, symbols, and zone allocations on-site without jeopardizing
the fire alarm system operation. Provide license and tools to software to revise / add
equipment, floors, or areas. Selection and activation of a certain graphic display is to
be either automatic (event driven) or by manual request via the terminal. Graphics
presentation shall have a minimum of 4 hierarchical levels:
1.
2.
Area overview.
Building overview.
E/227

3.
4.
2.12
L.
Annunciation: The GUI is to include an easy-to-read system interface window, which

displays alarms and troubles in an 80-character text message format. Alarms are to
display in RED, troubles in YELLOW and security alarms in BLUE. The system
interface window is to also include reset, silence, and acknowledge keys for local
panels and for the complete network.
M.
Help: The GUI is to include help screens, available to aid the user without leaving the
selected application screen.
N.
Passwords: The GUI is to have a flexible way of assigning operator passwords.

There is to be an unlimited number of possible operators, each with specific levels of
control. Each operator is to have his/her own password. Operator password and
control selection is to be available to a high level "administrator" who is to have
complete control over levels of control. If no action has taken place on the GUI after
30 minutes, the current operator is to be logged out and require a new log-in.
O.
Printer Port: The GUI shall include an industry-standard EIA-232 port for a printer.
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A.
General: Components include lead acid batteries, charger, and an automatic transfer
switch.
1.
2.
2.13
Floor overview.
Room overview.
Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum.

Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power.
holders are released when normal power fails.
Magnetic door
B.
Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide

capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at
full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely
within 4 hours.
Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply
supervision.
C.
Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of
signals or status indications when normal power fails.
D.
Capacity: 24 hours under standby and 1/2 hour under full alarm load conditions at the
end of the 24 hours.
E.
Remote power supply for devices is not recommended. However, if provided in

inevitable circumstances, the remote power supply shall be fully supervised by the
control panel and backed-up by battery as per paragraph 2.12D.
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

A.
Analog Addressable Circuit Interface Modules (Relay Control Module), generally:

Shall monitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for
addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve
tamper, non-addressable devices, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances
and AHU systems.
B.
Monitor Module: This module has both its power and its communications supplied by
the system. It provides location specific addressability to an initiating device by
monitoring normally open dry contacts. This module shall be listed for the application
is required for monitoring waterflow and tamper switches.
E/228

C.
2.14
2.15
Control Module: This module is an individually addressable module that has both its
power and its communications supplied by the system. The system shall be capable
of energizing 100% of the relays connected to the signaling line circuit in order to
initiate the required function. Control Relay Module shall provide a Form C dry relay
contact to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers, elevator
recall or a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown, etc.
SYSTEM PRINTER
A.
Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
B.
The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main
FACP enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages,
such as a trouble, are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is to receive power from
the system power supply and shall operate via battery back up if ac mains are lost.
C.
The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and
shall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer is
to be standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to use standard pin-feed
paper. The printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a
desktop or table. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an
interface complying with Electrical Industries Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.
D.
The event and status printer shall be a 9 pin, impact, dot-matrix printer with a
minimum print speed of 200 characters per second at 10 characters per inch. Printer
parameters shall be set up with a menu drive program in the printer. The serial cable
connecting the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Printer shall be supervised. The serial
printer shall support short haul modems or Fiber-Optics modules. The printers shall
list the time, date, type, and user defined message for each event printed. It shall be
possible to support multiple printers per CPU. It shall be possible to define which
event types are sent to the printer(s) including alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor,
and service groups.
E.
The printer shall be powered from 240 VAC, and shall use standard 91/2" x 11" fan
fold paper.
Battery backup if required shall use an emergency power unit or
uninterrupted power supply.
WIRE
A.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600 V rated, 75 deg. C

(167 deg. F), color-coded insulation.
1. Initiating devices circuits: 1.5 mm (No. 16 AWG), minimum, and subject to circuit
load.
2. Notification appliance circuits: 2.5 mm (No. 12 AWG), minimum, and subject to
circuit load.
3. Loudspeaker circuits: 1.5 mm (No. 16 AWG), minimum, and subject to circuit
load.
B.
Wires and Cables: Comply with NFPA 72 and 101, and certified to have passed IEC
331 and 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests.
C.
Cables are to be silicone rubber insulated, with overall PVC sheath bonding to coated
aluminum foil.
E/229

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
B.
Manual Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes.
C.
Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches:

valve station required to be supervised.
D.
Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a sidewall to the near
edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists.
On smooth ceilings, install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.
E.
Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm, below
the ceiling.
F.
Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 1520 mm.
G.
The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account both the
performance characteristics of the detector and the areas into which the detectors are
to be installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper operation after installation.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed in areas where air velocity is greater than
1.5m/sec, and shall not be located in a direct airflow. If siting of detectors in such
areas is unavoidable, use detectors specifically designed for use in such conditions.
H.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Connect for each sprinkler
1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature,
and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so that they extend the full width of the duct.
3.2
I.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
J.
Audible Alarm Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install bells
and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location
into a single unit.
K.
Visible Alarm Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
150 mm below the ceiling.
L.
Device Location-Indicating Lights:

monitor.
M.
MFAC: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor.
N.
Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor.
Locate in public space near the device they
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways

and Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
E/230
3.3
3.4
3.5
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors

as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right
angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or
interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks.
Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections
with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug
connectors.
C.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets,
or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-codes for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code
for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from
alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint
fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
E.
Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so that the
loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors
or zones.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Install framed instructions and zone layout in a location visible from the FACP.
C.
Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
GROUNDING
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written

instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible,
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet.

power system and equipment grounding.
C.
Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply
with installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D.
Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to
the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross
talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location.
Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
Isolate from

A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory trained and authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and connections and to
supervise installation, pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system.
Report
results in writing.
B.
Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform
complete pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system
with requirements of the Drawings and Specification. Correct deficiencies observed in
pre-testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until
E/231

satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic
recording of acceptance test results.
C.
Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the

installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses
to preliminary tests.
D.
Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is
ready for final acceptance testing.
E.
Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA
72. Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the
circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit
on Record (As-Built) Drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the
manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open
circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10
percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission
according to class of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response
at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual.
Systematically initiate specified functional performance
items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations
and using all communications options.
For each item, observe related
performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system
sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator
indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise
and distortion, and proper volume level.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner
specified.
3.6
F.
Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected
by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets specified
requirements and complies with applicable standards.
G.
Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and
detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion
of tests.
H.
Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been
satisfactorily completed.
I.
Experimental period for all systems shall be 3 months, before provisional taking over.
J.
Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged

equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to existing
system.

A.
Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up
scratches and marred finish to match original finish.
Clean unit internally using
methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
E/232

3.7
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A.
Engage a factory-authorized and trained service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for operating, adjusting,
troubleshooting, and servicing system.
1.
B.
3.8
Provide a minimum of eight hours' training in operation and maintenance.
Demonstrate full functionality of the system as specified to the acceptance of the

Engineer, DCA, and Authorities having jurisdiction.
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 year of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and
sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 requested visits to
Project site for this purpose.
E/233

FIRE STOPPING
SECTION 16742
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a U.L. approved firestopping system in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Firestop Caulk
Fire Rated Board
Fire in tumescent sealant.
Fire resistant coating.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturers installation instructions for all
materials and prefabricated devices, providing description sufficient for identification at the
job site.
B. Submit shop drawings showing proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and
method of installation. Construction details shall accurately reflect actual job conditions.
C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with product delivered to job site.
D. Submit certification by F.S>D. and U.L. for the complete system of firestopping for each type
penetration.
E. Submit complete details of each type of penetration to be used indicating the proper U.L.
approved firestop system and U.L. system number.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire system installation shall conform to requirements of qualified designs or manufacturer
approved modifications, as supported by engineering reports.
B. Install firestop materials and systems as required by these Tender Documents and meet and
be accepted for use by applicable design building and construction codes.
C. Submit manufacturers product data, letter of certified laboratory test report that the material
or combination of materials (firestop system) meets the requirements specified in accordance
with the applicable referenced standards.
D. The firestop compound shall not contain any solvents of inorganic fibers. The penetration seal
material must be unaffected by moisture and must maintain the integrity of the floor or wall
assembly for its rated time period when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 (UL1479). The
system shall be U.L. classified for up to and including 3 hours.
E. Fire Stopping System shall be in accordance with Kahramaa HSE Department requirement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestop compound of in tumescent expandable nature for collar or strip application.
Material must:
B. Provide firestop compounds for caulk application. Material must be capable of sealing
openings around single or multiple ducts, pipes cables, wire or conduits against fire, smoke
and toxic gases, and maintaining rating with a thickness no greater than the structure.
E/234

C. Provide a board material, where required as per manufacturers recommendations and/or
shown on the drawings.
D. Provide a firestop system consisting of a material or combination of materials, to retain the
integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke and toxic gases through pentrations in fire-rated barriers. It shall be used in
specific locations as follows:
a.
b.
2.2
Penetrations for the passage of duct piping cable, tray conduit, and electrical busways
and reaceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal
barriers (floor slabs and floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shafts.
Provide FS Boards at the typical floor plantrooms.
MATERIALS
A. Firestopping materials/system shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of building
structure and penetrating item(s) without effecting the adhesion or integrity of the system.
B. Firestopping materials shall not require hazardous waste disposal of used
containers/packages.
C. Provide firestopping materials free of solvents which will not experience shrinkage while
curing.
D. Provide Fire Rated boards to provide 2 or 4 hour fire resistance as specified compliance with
FSD and Building Requirements.
E. The fire resistant board cladding material shall be non-combustible to BS476 Part 4, Class 1
surface spread of flame to BS476 Class 7, and class 0 to UK Building Regulations. The fire
resistant board shall be of monolithic asbestor-free calcium silicate material. The
performance shall not be affected by moisture absorption Mechanical strength shall be
maintained and the board shall not delaminate or the fire resisting properties shall not
deteriorate even under 100% water saturation. The fire resistant board shall be not attracts
pests and shall not rot or support the growth of mould.
F. Fire resistant coating over life emergency and security system cables crossing different fire
compartments than intended for cable use. This coating shall provide minimum 3 hour
protection. Such space include Basement carpark, kitchen and similar are
2.3
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Deliver material to site in original unopened containers or packages bearing the manufactures
name, brand designation, product description and U.L. Classification Mark.
3.2
Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at
job site.
3.3
Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufactures requirements.
3.4
Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in Material Safety

Data Sheets a applicable.
E/235

3.5
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Verify that openings are properly sized and in suitable condition to receive the work of this
section.
3.6
PREPARATION
A. Clean sustrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose materials, rust or other matter that may effect the
proper fitting or adhesion of the firestopping.
B. Clean metal and glass surfaces with a non-alcohol solvent.
3.7
INSTALLATION
A. Install firestop materials as indicated in accordance with design requirements and
manufacturers instruction.
B. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air, smoke and water-tight seal.
C. Firestopping may be required by other Contractors under related sections of the
project specifications. Identify all locations requiring firestopping and coordinate the work of
this section with work performed under other sections of the project to provide a uniform
system of firestopping.
D. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item
installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
E. Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed
the manufacturers recommended limitations for installation
F. HORIZONTAL CABLES
1. Install a cable sleeve with an inside diameter large enough to pass the cable through.
2. Install firestop in tumescent sealant material between the sleeve and the cable as per
manufacturers
G. FIRE RATED BOARD
1. Provide the Fire Rated Boards (2) between the top of the Hardy Wall and
the underside of the floor slab between the core walls forming the typical floor plant room.
Provide the openings in the board for ducts, trunking, conduits and cables. Seal the space
around all penetrations with Fire Rated Caulking.
H. FIRE RESISTANT COATING
a. Provide 4-hour fire protection coating for cables of life safety, security and emergency
system crossing hazardous zones of Car Parking, generator room, kitchen and alike.
END OF THE SECTION 16742
E/236

CONSOLE FOR FIRE COMMAND CENTER ROOM
SECTION 16743
The Contractor shall provide a high quality console for the Security Officers
Room at Ground Floor level.
The console shall consist of desk tops, wall units, supporting brackets, chairs,
mobile drawers units, 19 racks, cabinets.
The console shall be designed by a professional system integrator engineer and
detailed by an architect/decorator hired by the Contractor. All drawings shall be
submitted to Engineers for approval.
The furniture layout shall be console on the room perimeter, placed against the
wall with a desk in the center of the room. The furniture shall be provided with
5 nos. swivel chairs, adjustable with armrests and backs support, heavy duty
5 rollers, high quality synthetic fabric designed for workstation use.
The provision of desk and mobile drawers shall be at least for 7 nos. operators the
rest of the console shall be designed to accommodate twice the equipment and
computers going into this room.
The desk area and mobile drawers units shall be provided for 7 Nos. operations at
least. The rest of the units shall be provided for double (100% increase of) the
basic requirement to accommodate all extra low voltage system control panels.
The console shall be provided with following features and specification:
-
Modular construction
Anti-electrostatic finishes
Sturdy and robust, oversized frame and panel sections to prevent vibration deflection, sagging and
cracks.
Ergonomical design, functional and visual appeal.
Integrated wireways for concealed cabling
Supply and installation of multi-gang power and signal sockets
Fire retardancy compliance
Supporting structure and frame of formed steel or aluminium concealed with PVC or wood cladding.
Paneling in mdf; finish smooth and easy to clean and maintain; scratch- proof; base coat, precision
coats, print/pattern and colour coats, machine top coat
Alternative durable and precision finishes will be reviewed by the Engineer.
END OF THE SECTION 16743
E/237

LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION 16744
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes lightning protection for buildings and associated structures and
includes requirements for lightning protection systems components including, but not
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air Termination Network.

Down Conductors.
Ground Termination Network.
Bonding.
Accessories.

2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links ground point and rods,
connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories forming part of the lightning
protective system.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail the lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations,
conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding locations and
provisions. Include indications for use of raceway and sleeves, and data on how
concealment requirements will be met.
C. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed lightning
protection, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
D. Records: Submit the following:
1. Actual layout and components of the system.
2. Nature of soil and characteristics and any special grounding arrangement.
3. Test conditions and results.
E.
1.4
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and
owners, and other information specified or required by the Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in
installing lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those
E/238

indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Standards: Comply with BS 6651 "Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against
Lightning"
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems
and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building
materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and
building finishes.
1.6
TERMS USED
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably:
1. "Earth" and "Ground".
2. "Earthing" and "Grounding".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components, that comply with
approved manufacturer's standard design, in accordance with published product
information and the Standards specified in this Section.
B.
Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, and conductor straps,
fasteners, grounding plates, grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other
components required for a complete system that meets the Standards specified in this
Section.
C. Roof Conductors: Bare, high conductivity, annealed copper strip, 25 x 2.5 mm.
D. Ground Rod:
Solid copper conductor of minimum 20mm diameter having following
features and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Driving Head: High strength steel.

Couplings: Long length silicon bronze, internally threaded.
Threads: Rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of steel and strength.
Minimum Length of Rod: 1.2 m.
Clamping device for connection to down conductors.
E. Inspection (Ground) Pit:

Precast concrete construction of dimensions shown on
Drawings, with heavy duty cover and brass plate engraved 'Ground Pit Below' inset in
cover. The inspections pit installed in building Basement shall be provided with double
seal water stop at two locations.
1. Provide one pit for each ground rod.
F.
Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, PVC insulated copper tape, 20 x 2.5 mm

minimum dimensions, or 70 mm soft drawn stranded copper cables.
G. Accessories: Supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links, etc., are to be
copper or copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and
connectors are to be specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting to the
E/239

various shapes and surfaces of bonded metalwork. Provide bimetallic connectors
between different materials. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and bolts will not
be accepted on copper installations.
H. Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 25 x 3.5 mm, suitable for
bonding flat surfaces, cut to length required and with drilled flat terminals for bolted
connections.
Provide special bimetallic alloy terminals for joining to aluminum
conductive parts.
2.2
I.
Down Conductors: Round solid copper, 8 mm diameter, covered with PVC of approved
color.
J.
Test Links: Two-bolt split-coupling, copper alloy, made to join 2 ends of down
conductor specified. Plate indicating position and number of electrodes is to be fitted
above each test link.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network:

Provide horizontal
conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are
higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher conductor.
Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of 10 m x 20 m maximum spacing. Join all
elements of lightning protective system together.
B.
Down Conductors: Space at 10 m for buildings over 20 m height, and at 20 m for

buildings less than 20 m height. Every down conductor is to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Have test link above ground for testing ground termination network.
Be protected against corrosion for 0.3 m above and below ground level.
Terminate in a ground electrode.
Be insulated with PVC or polyethylene (5 mm thick) from test link to electrode
connection point (to reduce potential gradient at ground level which otherwise would
be lethal to humans or animals).
5. Be protected against mechanical damage for 1.2m above ground level.
C. Ground Termination Network: Interconnect and bury ground electrodes at least 1 m
into the ground water table during summer and minimum 0.6 m from foundations. Each
electrode is to have resistance to ground not exceeding ten times the number of
interconnected down conductor earth electrodes provided. For example for 5 down
conductors, resistance of each electrode is not to exceed 5 x 10 = 50 ohms, tested with
test link removed and before bonding to other services or other ground electrodes.
Combined resistance to ground of whole network is not to exceed 1 ohms.
D. Common Grounding: Interconnect ground termination electrodes in a ring around the
structure and bonded to ground electrode of protective grounding system. The two
systems are to form a common ground ring having a total resistance value to ground
below the lower value of any of the 2 systems.
E. Joints and interconnections in ground termination network are to be exothermic welds
except that down conductor is to be connected by a single or multi-conductor bolted Uconnector clamp at ground pits.
F. Ground Electrode: Provide one of the following arrangements:
1. Deep driven grounding rod (9 m minimum total length), or where necessary, drilling
of ground, insertion of rod and backfilling with soil conditioning agents such as
Bentonite or Marconite.
2. Matrix arrangement of rods (where deep driving is impracticable) coupled together
by buried conductors, spaced at least equal to and not more than twice their driven
depth, with total length not less than 9 m and minimum rod length 3.6 m.
E/240

G. Isolation of ground electrode for testing is to be possible.
H. Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning protective
system at points above the test joint (test link) to avoid side flashing. Metalwork
includes but is not necessarily limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structures,
communication supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations,
vents, exterior metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, steel doors or door
frames, main grounding terminal or bar of electrical installation and reinforcing bars of
concrete structures if these are in continuous electrical contact.
I.
Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as water
piping, etc.), as follows:
1. As directly as possible to the ground termination.
2. Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
3. At nearest ground point or at nearest main grounding terminal or bar of protective
grounding system.
2.3
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network:

Provide horizontal
conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are
higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher conductor.
Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of 10 m x 20 m maximum spacing. Join all
elements of lightning protective system together and to steel reinforcing bars of outer
columns, as shown on the Drawings.
B. Down Conductors: Connect air termination network to ground via steel reinforcement
of concrete structure, at the positions shown on the Drawings and in conformity with
specified Standards for down conductors. Ensure good contact between reinforcing
bars during construction, by fixing the bars with tying wire, for both vertical to vertical
bars, and horizontal to vertical bars.
C. Ground Termination: Provide exposed ground bonding points, inset into concrete base
of every column above ground level, bonded internally to reinforcing bars and externally
to ground ring at a ground pit (refer to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding").
Securely bond ground bonding points to reinforcing bars using bar clamps, and provide
high quality copper terminal plate with at least 4 threaded studs for bonding and for
isolating foundation system for testing.
D. Provide reference ground electrode for testing purposes.
It is to be possible to
completely isolate this electrode from the ground termination network for testing
footing/ground ring resistance at various positions. This electrode is to be provided in a
ground pit with special marking.
E.
Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning protective

system roof conductors or to exposed grounding points bonded to reinforcing bars in
the structure. Metalwork includes but is not necessarily limited to: water pipes, tanks,
sign structure, communication supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical
installations, vents, exterior metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, doors
or door frames and main grounding terminal or bar of electrical installations.
F.
Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as water
piping, etc.), as follows:
1. As directly as possible to the ground termination.
2. Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
3. At nearest ground point or at nearest main grounding terminal or bar of protective
grounding system.
E/241

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to BS 6651.
B.
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections.
sharp bends and narrow loops.
Avoid
C. Conceal the following conductors:

1.
2.
3.
4.
System conductors.
Down conductors.
Interior conductors.
Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m of
building.
5. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing
lightning protection components.
D. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor
splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those
above membrane roofing.
E. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop
conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 18 m intervals.
F.
Bends in conductors are not to be less than 200 mm radius and are not to exceed 90
degree turn.
G. Down conductors are to follow most direct path between air terminals and ground pit,
avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops. Re-entrant loops are not permissible. Tight
angle bends may be allowed where absolutely necessary at edge of roof, whereby
length of loop in relation to distance between its start and end is kept below eight times.
Where required, direct path is to be through an air space in a non-combustible, nonmetallic duct with net cross-section 15 times area of conductor.
H. Mechanical Protection of Down Conductors: Provide asbestos cement or stainless
steel pipes underground, starting 0.3 m below ground and to a height of 1.2 m above
ground. Test link is to be positioned 1.3 m above ground.
I.
Prevent corrosion on down conductors due to atmospheric, chemical, electrolytic or

other causes. Where acid condition of soil is likely to corrode conductor, provide lead
pipe sleeve or equivalent encasement from at least 900 mm below ground to at least
900 mm above ground with top sealed against moisture. Provide lead coating for
copper subject to severe corrosion from sulfur compounds.
J.
Joints and Bonds: Clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound.
Protect joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material, and
with overlapping joints not less than 20 mm long. Provide as few joints and bonds as
possible and make mechanically and electrically effective by clamping, bolting or
exothermic welding. Cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds are not to be less than
that of main conductor.
K.
Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance

between any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or the
distance allowed by the specified Standard, whichever is smaller.
E/242

L.
3.2
Inspection (Ground) Pit: Extend 150 mm below top of ground rod. Cover ground rod
connector with suitable protective compound, which can be easily removed for
inspection. Connector is not to be covered with backfill material and is to remain clean.
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate
corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from
junction of such materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.
3.3

A. Periodic Inspections:
Perform periodic inspections during installation of lightning
protection systems and at Substantial Completion.
3.4
TESTING
A.
The resistance at any point in the lightning protection earth continuity system to the
main electrode shall not exceed 10 ohms, unless otherwise allowed by QGEWC,
without taking into account of any bonding to other services. Install additional
electrodes in parallel if the figure is not met.
E/243

IP CCTV SYSTEM
SECTION 16745
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes complete IP Based CCTV System. Specifications and drawings are
generally detailed to the extent necessary to show design intents, signal flow, equipment
layouts; and to list requirements, materials, and labor. Ensure that the work herein described
shall be complete in every detail necessary to provide a complete programmed and properly
functioning system in compliance with all requirements of these specifications. Everything
with no exception shall be as per the latest MOI regulation.
B. The contractor is responsible to prepare a full submission document to MOI and attain all
required approvals for the IP CCTV system.
C. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 16 section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component specified.
Include data on features, ratings, performance, catalogues and literature, sufficiently detailed
for engineering purposes, and with full description of component and operating parameters.
Submittals are to include also:
1. Reception distribution technique.
2. System expandability.
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat dissipation, power
requirements, etc.
4. Recommended data/network cables specifications and characteristics.
5. Equipment layout in FFC or Control Room, including monitors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1.
Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures, and
details of control panels. Show access and workspace requirements.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring. Wiring diagrams are to bear manufacturers signature
indicating that they have reviewed the drawings and that they are correct in respect to
sizes, wiring and configuration and will operate in accordance with function, scope and
intent of the specifications.
3. Detailed system schematic diagram.
E/244

4. Exact camera locations and mounting details.
5. Configuration and construction details for operating console and layouts.
6. Complete and detailed cable routing and layouts with calculation losses and signal levels.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of equipment. Show
the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grills, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural features.
D. Samples: Full size, for each outlet and finish plate, for colors and textures required.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of equipment and components certifying that
F.
1.4
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Standards: System is to be in accordance to CCIR and/or EIA standards or other equal and
MOI approved standards.
C. The IP CCTV System's equipment shall be installed by a factory owned office that is also ISO
9001/ISO 9002 certified or an authorized distributor of the manufacturer. Any other installers
will no be acceptable bidders for this project.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of television equipment and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
2.0
EXTENT OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, hardware, software, services
and test necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the owner a complete
expanded IP Based CCTV System in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
1. Interface & Integration with the Integrated Security Management System.

2. Interface & Integration with the Fire Detection & Alarm System.
3. Workstation Complete with all needed Software & Licenses.
E/245

4. Fixed Indoor Cameras.
5. Fixed Outdoor Cameras.
6. Motorized Indoor Dome Cameras.
7. Operator Workstations.
8. Storage Devices.
9. Power supplies.
10. Application Software.
11. Watchman's Guard Tour System
All materials and equipments shall be standard, regularly manufactured equipment.

All Systems and components shall be thoroughly tested and proven in actual field use.
3.0 IP CCTV System
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SECURITY SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

-
The proposed security surveillance system must be an open standard based on IP.
System must contain a program capable of simultaneous recording, playback, storage,

copying and remote access without any adverse effect on any of the functions. Management
software should provide camera number, location, Date & time of recording generated by
system server, forced masking (password protected) in recorded video and alarm
management Images recording and storage systems performance must be checked daily.
Cameras used in the system must be Vandal proof, Tamperproof Weatherproof and
Day/Night according to the environment.
Cameras must be suitable for operation under extreme temperature, relative humidity and
non-condensing.
Cameras used in the system must cover the required field of view and its details day and
night. Panoramic coverage through PTZ or multi-lens megapixel cameras is a MUST
wherever required.
System must have sufficient storage system for all camera recordings for a period of 120
days, in MPEG-4 or H.264 format or better quality compression techniques. The recording
frame rate and resolution must be programmable from the user level. It should give the ability
to customize also quality of the video output based on the viewing needs and storing
capacity.
The minimum acceptable camera resolution is MEGAPIXEL.
Cameras used in the system for outdoor and indoor specific areas must have Auto-iris, AutoICR, Auto-exposure, Backlight compensation, Wide Dynamic Range, Contrast Enhancement,
Digital Noise Reduction, Digital Image Stabilization, Privacy masking, Motion detection,
E/246

Digital/Optical zoom, Multiple Gain Control, White Balance, Intelligent Video Analytics, and
Audio.
-
Sufficient lighting arrangement must be provided for the cameras according to the location
and requirement.
Sufficient lighting should be provided in the sites of long-range vision to cover the area of
surveillance.
High quality infrared camera must be used in full dark areas.
The camera representation of the object for monitoring should be as follows: a. For
identification purposes the figure should cover at least 120% of the screen height b. For
recognition purposes the figure should cover at least 50% of the screen height c. For
detection purposes the figure should cover at least 10% of the screen height d. For
monitoring purposes the figure should cover at least 5% of the screen height.
For number plate recognition, the recommended screen image representation must be at
least 50% of the screen height.
A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one
time in a standard 32 wall screen. At any given circumstances, the number of cameras per
display screen will depend primarily as the size of the screen. A separate viewing displays or
area may also be required for reviewing recorded video.
A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one
time in a standard 23 Desktop screen.
Local Area Network (LAN) infrastructure must be highly available, reliable, secured and able
to support a growing number of CCTV devices in the network. Infrastructure cabling must be
of the latest specifications and quality.
Infrastructure must be concealed and protected by industrial standard weatherproofing, antitamper and anti-RFI material.
CCTV system must be an integral part of the whole IP based network Infrastructure system.
The network infrastructure should be able to carry a high quality, high resolution, real time
video in a converged voice/video and data network.
Remote Wide Area Network (WAN) connectivity must be secured with the latest
encryption/decryption techniques to preserve the authenticity without compromising the good
quality video transmission over the network.
The system must also support NTP (network time protocol) to synchronize the system time of
the video to a reference time for time stamping.
Camera numbering and location details in display and recording must be according to site
and location to easily distinguish captured scenes.
System must have full function control unit (joystick control unit and touch screen feature if its
available) including keyboard and mouse facility to use with.
The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is tamperproof and
cannot be altered. The recording shall have an audit trail feature.
E/247

-
System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and roles in accordance
with the users responsibilities.
The system must contain search feature of the material recorded by the number/name of
camera, location, and time and date.
The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storage devices as well as
copying on different external media.
The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like CD/DVD/Blu ray
Recorders or any other device in a format which can be replayed through a standard PC
based software. Log of any such activity should be maintained by the system which can be
audited at a later date.
The recorded video should be exported in its native file format (i.e. without converting
between formats) to maintain image quality and no additional compression should be applied
during the export process.
The system must have a UPS backup power to run the whole system for NOT less than one
(1) hour in case of power failure.
The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in case of any fatal
failure in the active system.
The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or periodical
Service Level Agreement (SLA) for its operational life which includes but not limited to the
following:
Cleaning the equipment
Repairing or replacing faulty equipment
Fitness for purpose checks
Maintaining camera positions and focus
Upgrading the system software
Equipment warranties
Maintenance logs and audit report
3.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SECURITY CONTROL ROOM
Main Control room must have the proper size and space for monitors and operators,
ventilation and lightings, access security and alarm system, sufficient power system and the
required communication system for local and police authority emergency communications.
The Control room should be operational around the clock throughout the year.
Should have the required number of personnel to operate, manage and maintain the system
as well as the required training.
E/248
4.0
Three (3) work shifts of eight (8) hours for operators must be performed to maintain the 24x7
round the clock operation.
If there is need, the control room must have a direct hotline connectivity to the National
Command Center.
If required, the control room must have a secured connectivity for remote monitoring to the
National Command Center.
The Control room must have a security access and a power back up system in case of power
failure.
The Control room must have physical protection and safety devices.
For any emergency, the room must have an evacuation plan for the safety of the personnel.
SOFTWARE
A.
GENERAL
The software should interface with network Images and Video Servers, delivering full color still
and motion images to any standard windows or Unix based PC. The Servers can be hosted on
an Intranet and Internet. The software is compatible with Pan / Tilt/ Zoom cameras and can
record images from any camera at any interval, including advanced video motion detection.
The application is client based; enabling multiple sites to poll common Servers with minimal
Server load.
Image/m Video servers require no maintenance and are fully enabled upon power up.
Servers can be configured via any current Web browser.
Servers can be password protected to allow restricted viewing to authorized users only.
All workstations can access the same network at the same time.
All workstations can access and/or control the same camera or storage device.
All workstations can access and/or modify the same camera or storage device based on
password level.
Latest revisions of all programs at time of practical completion.
Licensing of software at time or practical completion.
CCTV application software should run via a standard web browser (MSI, Explorer, Netscape).
B.
FEATURES
Display 1 to 256 camera views per software instance. Multiple copies can be run
concurrently, scaling to any quantity.
Record Images based on a given time interval, at a used defined resolution and
compression level.
Pan / Tilt. Zoom supported cameras, with configurable Touring and Preset options.
Record images when a triggered event or video motion detection has occurred.
Audiovisual alert settings.
Email notification with attached image upon video motion detection.
View a single camera at a higher frame rate, with sire-specific information and statistics.
View multiple cameras via an included streamer interface allowing additional
viewing/recording to 30FPS per camera.
View/Record image sizes are user selectable.
E/249
4.1
Compatible with MS Windows or UNIX.

No special hardware, capture cards or dongles installed in any workstations.
Integrates into existing TCP/IP network.
SYSTEM PASSWORDS
To limit control by the system operators, the CCTV system shall support system passwords at the
workstation level.
4.2
The user passwords shall limit user access and privileges to provide system level security.
A password shall be required to log on to the system. The CCTV System workstation shall
support up to 100 passwords. It shall be possible to enable or disable each and every
individual function to the CCTV System on a password by password basis using a simple
point and click operation. Each password shall allow a 30-character operator name, a 10character alpha numeric password.
HELP SCREENS
Context Sensitive Help Screens: Provide context sensitive help screen associated with the
current keyboard/mouse input.
4.3
CAMERA SERVER
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
Provide server equipment, conforming To the specified requirements. Latest configuration as per
the manufacturers recommendation.
4.4
OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
Provide workstation equipment, conforming to the specified requirements. Latest configuration as
per the manufacturers recommendation.
4.5
CAMERA OPERATING TEMPERATURE
4.6
0-45 C for Indoor Camera

0-60 C for Outdoor Camera
INDOOR, IN-CEILING FIXED IP COLOR DOME CAMERA

A. GENERAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Built in motion detection

Up to 25 frames per second
Built-in Web /server and network connection
View live images from any network-connected PC
B. APPROVALS:
EMC : FCC Class A, Part 15 subpart B
CCE : EN 55022 Class B, EN55024

C.
HOUSING
Indoor / In-Ceiling Housing complete with all necessary installation accessories: Back Box and
decorative Lower Dome (please indicate if different models/types are available)
E/250

5.0
HOUSING
Indoor/ In-Ceiling Housing complete with all necessary installation accessories: Back Box and
decorative Lower Dome (please indicate if different models/types are available).
6.0
EXTENT OF WORK:
The scope of work comprises the final design engineering, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning, maintenance and defects liability of materials, labor and equipment for the
complete IP CCTV System. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.0
A.
Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration and

commissioning, programmed system commissioning and integrated system program
commissioning. Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets, which
shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing. Notify the Engineer and the Commissioning
Management Consultant in writing of the testing schedule so that operating personnel may
observe calibration and commissioning.
1. System Program Commissioning
2. Integrated System Commissioning
B.
Inspections and Cable Testing

1.
After the installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing as described
herein, and at such times as the Engineer and the Commissioning Management Consultant
directs. The installation shall be demonstrated to be in accordance with the requirements of
this specification. Any defects revealed shall be corrected promptly at the Contractor's
expense and the tests performed again.
2. As a minimum, test, as described below, all cables installed under these specifications.
3.
If a bad conductor is found, replace the entire cable. Remove any cables that contain a
defective conductor from ceiling and/or floor duct. Do not abandon defective cables in
place.
4. The Employer and the Commissioning Management Consultant reserves the right to
observe of any or all portions of the testing process.
5.
The Employer and the Commissioning Management Consultant further reserves the right to
conduct, using contractor equipment and labor, a random re-test of 10% of the cables to
confirm documented test results.
3. All test results and corrective procedures are to be documented and submitted within five
(5) working days of test completion.
C.
Acceptance Testing
E/251
8.0
1.
Submit a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with

contract requirements at least 4 weeks before the start of testing. This procedure to be
approved prior to the start of the testing.
2.
During acceptance testing provide services of a fully qualified security systems technician
who is knowledgeable of the project.
3.
Using the commissioning test data the Employer and the Commissioning Management
Consultant and/or his representative shall select, at random, functions to be demonstrated.
These functions shall be demonstrated in accordance with the acceptance test procedure.
At least 15 percent of the systems functions shall be demonstrated. At least 95% of the
functions demonstrated must perform as specified and documented on commissioning data
sheets or the system must be retested.
4.
Provide instruments required for testing.

approval prior to performance of tests.
5.
After the acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning
as specified, a thirty-day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as
specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and
adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system
fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Employer or his
Representative/Consultant may request that the endurance tests be repeated after
problems have been corrected.
6.
Coordinate testing period so that free access, work lighting and electrical power is available
on site.
7.
Furnish three portable VHF or UHF business band, two-way radios with sufficient range to
cover the entire project. Include extra rechargeable batteries, battery charger and belt
"holsters".
8.
Ensure that technical areas are in a clean and orderly condition, ready for acceptance
testing.
Submit catalog data on all instruments for
DOCUMENTATION
A. Keep a complete set of drawings on the job. Note any changes or modifications made during
installation and submit to the Consultant for review one corrected set of reproducible
drawings showing the work as installed.
B. Provide two (2) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals including wiring diagrams, parts
lists, shop drawings and manufacturers' information on all equipment and cables. Provide
manuals in a high quality binder and completely indexed. Submit manuals not more than 1
week after project completion.
C.
Upon completion of work and acceptance by Employer or his Representative/Consultant,

provide reproducible As-Built drawings of the complete system including, but not limited to,
floor plans showing the exact location and type of each security device, equipment room
details (elevation of all walls), showing the exact placement of all cabinets, racks, blocks, etc.,
and a riser diagram showing all security devices, panels, and cabling. Include details
showing the exact type, quantity and route of all security system cables. The size and
location of all security conduit, conduit sleeves, junction boxes and cabling splices. The
E/252

as-built drawings shall show door elevations indicating the exact placement of all security
devices.
D. As-built drawings shall include a point to point wiring diagram including the terminal
connections and cross connections for all security devices, security panels, power supplies,
cameras and console monitoring equipment. The diagram shall indicated the number of
conductors, color code and wiring labels. All wiring splices and equipment grounding shall be
shown on the point to point wiring diagram.
E. Maintenance:
Items recommended for maintenance along with recommended products, procedures and
schedules for maintenance of those items. Normally, manufacturers maintenance manuals
should be used for this purpose. If information from the manufacturer is inadequate or item is
custom provide the information necessary for proper maintenance. Include parts lists and
schematics as available from the manufacturers and for all custom items.
1. Service:
A clear statement of the Security Contractor's guarantee for the system including, dates &
times of service, time to respond to phone calls, to respond on site, to resolve an issue.
Service phone number and weekday/weekend hours. Include similar information for oncall service. Include manufacturer's warranty statement for all equipment including actual
expiration dates.
Two options shall be provided: 5 days a week, 8am 6pm and after hours and
weekends.
9.0
INSTRUCTION FOR THE OPERATION OF THE SYSTEMS

A.
Provide the services of competent instructors who will give instruction in the adjustment,
operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and
system specified. The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather than being
a general training course. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the
subject matter they are to teach. Provide equipment and material required for classroom
training.
B. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified for
each phase.
1.
The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually
agreeable and shall be at least five (5) days (8 hours/day) in length. Operating personnel
to be trained in the functional operations of the security system installed and the
procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. The training shall include
but not be limited to:
a.
General Security Systems Configuration
b.
Operation of Computer and Peripherals
c.
Report Generation
d.
Operator Control Functions
e.
Graphics Generation
E/253
10.0
f.
General equipment layout
g.
Troubleshooting procedures
h.
Preventive Maintenance procedures
OPERATIONAL TRAINING
A. Upon acceptance of the system, the manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) eight (8)
hour sessions of onsite training for the Employer's selected personnel. Training must cover the
basic operations (interrogating the system, sending commands, acknowledgment of alarms,
smoke detector maintenance).
B. All instruction shall be conducted on the system as installed in the building and include a tour of
the building and adequate instructional manuals.
C. Trainer shall be a Factory certified trainer with a supporting factory certification statement.
11.0
EXECUTION
11.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways.

C. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install
bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable.
Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation
and replace it with new cable.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips
in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten
electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
E. Grounding: Provide signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.
F
Equipment: install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to the approval of the
Engineer. Mount equipment in alignment with other building fixtures and fix firmly in place
with all supports and fastenings secured.
G. Interference Protection: equipment is to be installed to prevent electromagnetic, electrostatic

or other outside interference impairing system performance.
H. Accessibility: equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance
and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no changes are to be
made without prior approval.
I.
Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint provided
by equipment manufacturer, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E/254

J.
11.2
Routing of video signal cables, power and control cables, in general, is to be in separate
raceways.
IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
11.3

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pre-testing, testing,
and adjusting of television equipment.
B.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
C. Record test results.

D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
E.
System test is to include light box mylar test pattern for random camera locations, for
measurement of resolution, streaking, ringing, interlace, shading, scanning, aspect ratio and
gray scale.' H&V wedges of resolution chart are to be arranged to measure 200 to 1600 lines.
F. Test Equipment: provide diagnostic equipment required to perform system tests and
measurements including function generator, impedance bridge, oscilloscope, frequency
spectrum analyzer, chart recorder, digital voltmeter, dB meter and wave form monitor.
11.4
CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
E/255

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
SECTION 16746
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. The section include motor control centres complete in all respects, enclosure, components,
instruments, wiring cabling, etc.
B. Relates to section of Division 16 and Division 15.
1.3
STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with latest
applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1. British Standard BS 5486, BS 587, BS 5424.
2. All motor control panels shall comply with the appropriate British Standard, Code of
Practice, IEE Regulations and the Local Electric Company regulations.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' data for the following items in accordance with the
conditions of the contract.
1.
Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller, assembly
outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field connection diagrams,
shall be submitted.
2.
Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include information on
type and size of structural supports, metal thicknesses, surface finishes, bus cross
sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse, circuit breakers,
bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc.
3.
Supply complete schematic wiring diagrams and a full set of equipment wiring diagrams for
protective equipment relays, pilot lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for all
wiring diagrams.
4. Include full load heat rejection in kilowatts for total components by control center.
5. All fuse/circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated.
6. Where a control centre assembly is shipped in more than one section, show field interwiring
required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly. Clearly delineate shipping
sections.
7.
Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls and the
fire alarm system.
E/256

8. Provide the appropriate test certificates.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each complete product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer.
The integrated equipment short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment is capable of
withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the
Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar
equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each motor control center. Test
data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
2.2
GENERAL
A. Provide motor control centers, completely factory-assembled and tested, metal-enclosed, freestanding, dead-front equipment, with the following general ratings and construction
designations.
1. Voltage: 240/415 volts as indicated, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 hertz, except as otherwise noted.
2. Minimum bus short circuit rating: 100,000 amperes, Root Mean Square Symmetrical.
3. Motor Controllers:
-
Combination magnetic type with fused disconnect switches.
Variable speed (frequency) drives.
Soft starters
4. Feeder Access: Top or bottom as job conditions permit.

2.3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide number of vertical sections and general arrangement of modular control units as
outlined and as required. Provide fused disconnect switches or miscellaneous equipment.
Each vertical section to contain no more than 6 modular units, unless otherwise indicated.
Degree of segregation to be Form 4B Type 7.
B.
Provide motor control centers to consist of detachable vertical sections, each a reinforced,
shaped, rigid, free-standing structure, with cover plate of minimum 2.0mm thick steel or
aluminum. Provide each standard section capable of mounting interchangeably with various
motor controller units and designed so that control units may be readily removed or added as
required. Mount entire assembly on two (2) sturdy structural steel channels, drilled for bolting to
floor. Provide each section 2250mm overall height by 500mm wide by 500mm deep.
1.
Horizontal sections of entire assembly to contain the main horizontal bus feeding the
busses of the vertical sections. Provide removable plates for access to main bus. Provide
sections above or below control units constituting a continuous wiring trough with screw-on
E/257

covers along the entire length of the control center.
2. Provide each vertical section to be dead-front IP 34 gasketed dust-ight construction.
Provide vertical bus full-length and isolated from starter compartments by a full-height fiber
barrier, provided with opening so designed that control units of any standard size can be
removed or added as required. Provide a 100mm, minimum-width, full-length vertical
wiring trough with cable supports on one side of each section. Provide easily removable
isolating metal barriers between control units.
C. Provide a separate, formed, heavy sheet steel (minimum thickness of 2.0mm) door for each
control unit. Doors secured to the vertical section frame by screw-fastened, concealed hinges
and bolted door fasteners, capable of being tightened by hand or screwdriver. Doors to be
gasketed dust-tight all around, including disconnect operating handles and knockouts and
opening for required pushbuttons, selector switches and indicating lights. Do not attach wiring
to door.
D. Provide disconnect handle mounted on door of each control unit to operate switch through
adjustable linkage with clearly marked "On" and "Off" designations. Handle designed for
padlocking either in "On" or "Off" position with 1 to 3 padlocks. Provide mechanical interlock to
prevent opening of door when handle is in the "On" position. Interlock to be bypass able with
special tool.
E.
Provide each vertical section with a number of motor controllers, fused switches, or
miscellaneous equipment units.
Provide each unit with components and wiring readily
accessible for ease of maintenance, and connected to the vertical bus by means of self-aligning
connectors having free-floating spring construction so as to insure a positive silver-to-silver
contact with both sides of the bus at all times. Provide stationary structure and unit supports
designed to support and align the units during removal or replacement and for locking in the
connect or disconnect positions. Provide units of modular heights and interchangeable with
other units of same size or multiple of this size.
1. Provide each modular unit capable of being secured and padlocked from the power bus, to
facilitate inspection and maintenance.
F.
Provide control center with facilities for future field installation of motor controller units without
requiring modification of the bus structures.
G. Thoroughly clean interior and exterior of entire assembly, including pullbox, after fabrication and
give it a rust-inhibiting primer coat followed by 2 finish coats of orange air-drying lacquer or
baked enamel.
H. Provide control center completely assembled and connected at factory and then given
operating and high potential tests in accordance with British Standards.
Provide entire
assembly suitably reinforced for shipping and provided with bolted-on lifting irons at the top.
Ship control center as a single assembly unless entry conditions or handling facilities at a point
of installation require division into smaller sections.
I.
Provide factory wired terminal strips for all required field connections at top of each vertical
section.
J.
Provide a common lamp test facility on each MCC.
E/258

2.4
BUSWORK
A. Horizontal bus sized as indicated. Provide bus supports of high-quality insulators with high
dielectric strength, low moisture absorption, and high impact strength, so arranged and secured
to bus as to provide the required short-circuit bracing and integrated equipment rating.
All conductors between the main busbars/droppers and the outgoing protective devices not
short-circuit type tested to a fault current of 50kA for 1 second at 0.25 lagging power factor shall
be insulated by approved means to comply with the requirements that "an internal short circuit
is only a remote possibility" as stipulated in Clause 7.5.5.1 of B.S. 5486 Part 1:1590.
B. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout R-Y-B left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear.
Where special circuiting precludes this arrangement (as accepted by the Engineer) bus bars
shall be permanently labeled.
C. All busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity copper to B.S. 1433 and shall be
electro-tinned.
Construction, marking and arrangement of the busbars, connections and
auxiliary wiring shall be to B.S. 5486: Part 1.
D. Bus shall be sized at 160 amperes per square centimeter, but in no case less than of sufficient
cross section to limit temperature rise to 55 degrees Celcius above an ambient temperature of
40 degrees Celcius.
E.
Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt holes drilled and
tapped for future expansion at the end of horizontal bus bars including neutral and earth bus.
The provisions shall include bus bars installed and extended to the extreme side of the section
and be fabricated in such a fashion that the addition of a future section would require only the
installation of standard bolted splice plates.
2
F. All auxiliary circuit wiring should be PVC insulated to BS 6231 of not less than 1.5mm .
G. Provide terminal strip for control cables connection.
2.5
EARTHING
A. Provide an earth of 50 percent of phase bus capacity throughout the length of the control center
with earthing lugs for equipment earthing.
2.6
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Provide motor controller unit of the combination type with fused switches and magnetic starter,
complete with auxiliary equipment, including selector switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights,
auxiliary relays, auxiliary contacts, and all other devices required for satisfactory operation of
the equipment to be controlled.
1.
Starter short-circuits current-interrupting rating to be not less than 100,000 amperes

symmetrical at 380 volts.
2.
Provide standard magnetic type starter with 3 properly sized overload heaters for 3-phase
motors, manual reset overload pushbutton, and a minimum of 2 auxiliary contacts arranged
in the normally open position, but capable of field adjustment to the normally closed
position.
Provide each starter with a long-life green pilot light and a HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC selector switch. Provide necessary interlocks and remote terminals for both
local and remote connections indicated for the electrical or mechanical work. Coordinate
requirements with the ELV Sub-contractor.
E/259

3.
Provide starter operating coil with voltage of 240 volts. Provide a two-winding control circuit
transformer for each starter unit of sufficient capacity to supply the inrush and continuous
volt-amperes required by the starter coil and other devices in the control circuit. Capacity of
transformers shall be a minimum of 150VA over standard by size of motor starter. Supply a
dual element fuse in each line of the primary circuit of the control transformer. Required
fuse size engraved on fuse block or adjacent thereto.
4. Variable frequency drives (refer to Division 16).
2.7
DUTY STANDBY CONTROLS

A. For motor pairs designed for duty and standby service provide automatic switchover controls as
part of MCC. The duty and standby starters shall be in adjacent bays.
B.
A duty standby selector switch shall be located on the starter most accessible to building
operator and shall allow selection of the duty motor with the other motor being the standby.
Install necessary controls so that when the duty fan is required to operate and fails to operate
the standby fan shall automatically start and the standby fan operation contacts shall open.
Provide an adjustable time delay to allow duty motor to reach full speed before testing for motor
failure. A flow switch shall be provided to indicate proof of operation. The standby switchover
controls shall be reset by stopping both fans.
C. Each starter shall be equipped with a Test-Auto control switch. The standby switchover controls
shall only function when the control switch is in the automatic position.
2.8
INTERFACE
A.
Provide all necessary interfacing dry contacts, signal terminal blocks and auxiliary contacts,
etc. for monitoring/control signal.
B. BMS Interface
A terminal strip will be provided by the contractor in a separate compartment of the Motor
Control Center for all ELV interfacing with the MCC.
1. Car Park Ventilation Supply Fans and Supply Fan - AHU
a. The Building Management System (BMS) will provide the following inputs to the
Motor Control Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
-
BMS On (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS, the MCC will set the specified
Supply into BMS on.
The MCC will automatically select the lead motor and if after a specified time the
motor fails to start or immediately upon a motor fault, the lag motor will be
automatically be selected by the MCC
b. The BMS panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control Center
(MCC) at each location for each motor.
-
Common Motor Fault (O/P)

Whenever either supply fan is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the
MCC and monitored by the BMS
BMS Status (O/P)
E/260

A current transducer will be supplied by the contractor and fitted to monitor the
current drawn by the motor to determine the status of the fan.
2. Mechanical Ventilation (FCUs, AHUs, Extract Fans)

a. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the Motor Control Center (MCC) at
each location for each motor.
- Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the MCC will set the
specified unit to run under BMS control.
3. Pump and Tank Room Ventilation BMS Interface

each location for each Supply and Extract Fan.
-
Start/Stop (I/P)
b. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the Motor Control Center (MCC) at
each location for each Supply and Extract Fan.
-
Motor Fault (O/P)

Whenever this unit is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the MCC and
monitored by the BMS panel
BMS Status (O/P)

A current transducer will be supplied by the contractor and fitted to the BMS to
monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of the fan.
BMS Fire (O/P)

Whenever this unit receives any fire input a dry contact will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel
4. Toilet Extract Fans BMS Interface

each location for each Fan.
-
Start/Stop (I/P)
b. The BMS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the Motor Control
Center (MCC) at each location for each fan.
-
Motor Fault (O/P)

BMS Status (O/P)

will monitor the current drawn by the motor and to determine the status of the
E/261

fan.
-
BMS Fire (O/P)

5. Electrical Switch Rooms

-
Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the MCC will set the unit to
run under BMS control.
-
Motor Fault (O/P)

BMS Status (O/P)

BMS Fire (O/P)

6. Tx Room Ventilation
-
Start/Stop (I/P)
-
Motor Fault (O/P)

BMS Status (O/P)

BMS Fire (O/P)

7. VFDs
a. The BMS panel will Control the following inputs to each VFD at each VFD location.
-
VFD Speed (I/P)

The VFD speed will be determined by an Analog input to the VFD from the BMS
E/262

panel (2-10v = 0-100%)
-
VFD Enable/Disable (I/P)

The VFD will be enabled or Disabled via an input to the VFD from the BMS
panel.
b. The BMS panel will Monitor the following outputs from each VFD at each VFD
location.
-
VFD Bypass (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD is placed in
Bypass Mode.
VFD Fault (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD detect a fault.
VFD Status (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD speed is
greater than 0 Hz
8. Pumps
a. The BMS control panel will monitor the following dry contact outputs from the Motor
Control Center (MCC) at each location for each Pump.
-
Motor Fault (O/P)

BMS Status (O/P)

9. Chilled Water Pumps

each location for each Chilled water pump.
-
VFD Enable/Disable (I/P)

The VFD will be enabled or Disabled via an input to the VFD from the BMS
panel.
VFD Speed (I/P)

The VFD speed will be determined by an Analog input to the VFD from the BMS
panel (2-10v = 0-100%)
b. The BMS panel will Monitor the following outputs from each Pumps at each VFD
location.
-
VFD Bypass (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD is placed in
Bypass Mode.
VFD Fault (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD detect a fault.
VFD Status (O/P)

The VFD will provide a dry contact to the BMS whenever the VFD speed is
greater than 0 Hz
E/263

10. MCC
each location for each Device.
-
MCC Control (I/P)

specified Device to operate via the, BMS panel where specified in the ELV points
schedule.
Center (MCC) at each location for each Device.
-
MCC Common Alarm (O/P)

Whenever any alarm is present in the MCC a dry contact will be generated from
the MCC and monitored by the BMS panel where specified in the ELV points
schedule
Circuit Breaker Monitoring (O/P)

Whenever this device is present in the MCC a dry contact will be generated from
schedule
ATS Status (O/P)

schedule
Power Filure (O/P)

schedule
Alarm Monitoring (O/P)

schedule
Electrical Monitoring (O/P)

schedule
Current Sensor (O/P)

This device will be provided by the contractor into the MCC where an analog
output will be generated, to be monitored by the BMS panel where specified in
the ELV points schedule
Network Analyzer (O/P)

This device will be provided by the contractor into the MCC where an analog
output will be generated, to be monitored by the BMS panel where specified in
the ELV points schedule
11. Chillers
a. The BMS will monitor and control the chiller via a high level interface using the points
specified in the ELV points list, the interface is to be provided in two parts.
-
Part1: Provided by the Contractor; provides a Graphic interface into the chiller
E/264

system by controlling and monitoring part 2
-
Part2: Provided by the Contractor; a high level interface enabling control and
monitoring the chillers as per the ELV interface points schedule. The BMS will
have the capability to monitor the event on the chiller microprocessor.
12. Fan Coil Units

a.
b.
The Fan Coil Units (FCU) controllers will be provided by the ELV contractor to be
fitted to the FCU. The BMS panel will provide the following inputs to the FCU at each
location for each FCU.
-
Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the FCU will run under
BMS control.
Valve Control (I/P)

Whenever input is driven on/off via the BMS the 3 way valve supplied, installed
and wired by the contractor will open and close.
The FCU will provide the following outputs to the BMS control panel at each location
for each FCU.
-
FCU Fault (O/P)

Whenever the FCU is in fault a dry contact will be generated from the FCU and
monitored by the BMS.
13. Variable Air Volume

a.
The Variable Air Volume (VAV) box controllers will be provided by the contractor to
be fitted to the VAV box by the box manufacturer. The BMS panel will provide the
following inputs to the VAV box at each location for each VAV.
-
Start/Stop (I/P)
Whenever this dry contact is made by the BMS panel, the VAV will run under
BMS control.
Damper Position (I/P)

The VAV controller will output to the Damper actuator provided by the Box
manufacturer to control the damper position.
E/265
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Install motor control centers where shown.
3.2
Install control centers when the area is free and clear of dust and debris. Protect control centers at
the time from dust and moisture. Do not utilize control centers for temporary lighting and power
services except as otherwise approved by the Owner.
3.3
Install control centers on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pads which shall follow the contour of
centers with 100mm clear all around. Concrete pads shall be provided by the Contractor
3.4
Provide channel iron sills below each control center where the control center frame is not suitable for
use as a floor sill.
END OF SECTION16746
E/266

MOTOR STARTERS
SECTION 16747
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
B. Division 16 section on Motor Central relates.
1.2
Scope
A. This Part includes the supply and installation of motor starters and associated equipment.
1.3
References
The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS EN 60947-4 Contactors and motor starters
BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
BS EN 60073
1.4
Coding of indicating devices and actuators by colour and supplementary means
Manufacturer
Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. Starters
1. Motor starters shall comply with BS EN 60947-4.
2.
Motor starters shall be rated to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most severe
load conditions. All starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 % full load
torque.
3.
In accordance with the current QGEWC regulations, motors up to and including 11 kW shall
be started direct on line. Motors above 11 kW shall incorporate assisted starting.
4.
Motor starters shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of the relevant motor control
centre and each starter cubicle shall contain the following components, or as otherwise
indicated on the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
(a) 1 no triple pole MCCB or isolator, as indicated on the Project Drawings, externally
operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall be provision for padlocking in
the OFF position
(b) 1 no starter, comprising one of the following types, as indicated on the Project Drawings:
(i)
direct on line
(ii)
star/delta
E/267

(iii)
close transition star/delta
(iv)
reduced voltage soft start
(c) 1 no. motor protection relay, as specified in Part 3

(d) 1 no. set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary indication and
control sequence
(e) 1 no. set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls and
indications.
(f) 1 no. set of terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons
(g) 1 no. control circuit transformer, where applicable
(h) 1 no. anti-condensation heater, controlled by humdistat.
(i)
Thermistor relays where applicable
5.
The components of the starter shall be type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2
coordination in accordance with IEC 947.
6.
The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter cubicle, or as otherwise
indicated in the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
(a) 1 no. ammeter fitted with suppressed scale to read motor running and starting current with
red pointer to indicate full load current
(b) 2 no. pilot lamps to indicate SUPPLY ON (Green) and MOTOR RUNNING (Red).
(c) 1 no. pilot lamp to indicate MOTOR FAILED (Amber)
(d) pilot lamps (a separate lamp for each motor fault conditions)
(e) 1 no. Hand/OFF/AUTO Selector switch
(f) 1 set Start/Stop push button
(g) 1 no. externally operated overload reset push button
(h) 1 no. motor and cubicle heater OFF/AUTO control switch, where applicable
(i) lamp test push button
(j) 1 duty label.
7.
All starters shall contain a totally enclosed dust proof timer, or the operation will be controlled
by a timer in the automatic section, which shall prevent pump(s) starting after a power failure
until after a pre-set time has elapsed. The timer(s) or contacts shall be adjustable in the range
50 to 200 percent of the anticipated maximum delay which shall be taken as twice the total
time required for all pumps to start and run steadily having been started consecutively. The
timer(s) or contacts shall be set to give individual sequential start after a power failure with no
drive starting until its predecessor has reached full steady running.
B. DOL Contactors
1.
DOL starters shall consist of a TP contactor for switching direct on line in accordance with BS
EN 60947-4-1 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
E/268

2. Contactors shall be selected for category AC-3 duty.
C. Star Delta Starters
1.
Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in such a
manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
2.
The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable solid
state type timers.
3. Cascading of Starter Control

The control circuit for starting of motors shall be cascaded with a minimum time delay of 10
seconds to prevent simultaneous starting of more than one motor grouped in a starter panel or
MCC.
D. Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
1.
Solid-state, reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed transition, shunt duty type with
shorting contactor, for full speed operation. When the motor and load reach full speed, the
shorting contactor by-passes the SCR power section. The solid-state power section shall
consist of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two per phase connected back-to-back, in reverse
parallel configuration) to provide a soft start for the indicated pump motors. The starters shall
conform to the latest IEC Standards.
2. The starters shall use the current limit method of starting with the current adjustable between
150 percent and 425 percent of full load current of the motor. At turn-on, the control ramps up
to the current limit in approximately 1 second and maintains that current until the motor comes
up to full speed. If a problem exists and the motor fails to reach rated speed within a
predetermined period of time, the control will shutdown. The starter shall provide a smooth,
stepless acceleration and deceleration of the load from start to full speed and from full speed
to stop. The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide varistor type surge suppressers across
the SCR to protect against voltage transients and resistor/capacitor scrubber networks to
protect against false firing of the SCR. Each SCR heat sink shall have a temperature sensor
that shall shut the starter down in the event of an over temperature condition. When a starter
failure occurs, the actual problem shall be indicated by an LED on the control panel front.
3.
There shall be a overcurrent protective device, which shall provide over current protection and
main disconnect function for the control unit. The position of the operating handle shall
indicate ON or OFF position of the protective device and include provision for padlocking in
the OFF position. This protective device shall be equipped with a shunt trip and shall trip
when there is a SCR or plant power failure. Motor space heaters shall be energized when the
motor is not running.
4.
The reduced voltage starters shall be equipped with micro-processor controlled motor
protection relays to control, monitor and protect the motors. The relay shall monitor three
phase current and voltage and make trip and alarm decisions based on pre-programmed
motor current and voltage conditions. Control functions shall include start detection, starter
transition, incomplete sequence and number of starts per hour. The relay shall monitor and
display load current of each phase, percent of full load current of each phase and running
time. The relay shall protect the motor against time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent,
under load, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase loss and phase reversal.
E/269

5.
The manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the controller has been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify not
only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the
enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory tested in
accordance with applicable standards.
6.
Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise immunity
on both input and output power connections.
Part 2 EXECUTION
1. The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to the
Engineer for approval prior to commencement of installation work.
2.
Provide all the motor control equipment installations, wiring installations and tests, including
connections and interconnections for the electrical controls as indicated, specified and
required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the
Drawings.
3.
Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the cubicle frames. The sections
shall be joined together with bolts, nuts and washers to form a complete unit assembly.
4.
Each panel board shall be individually bonded to main earth bar located in the electrical
rooms.
5. Each panel section shall be cross bonded to adjacent panel section earthing terminal.
E/270

VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLS
SECTION 16748
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
B. Division 16 sections on Motor Control Centers
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A. Variable speed drives shall be of the electronic, low harmonic type and active front end pulse
width modulating (PWM) variable frequency type with an output suitable for controlling
standard industrial squirrel cage motors, with a synchronous speed of 1500 rpm, unless
B. Unless otherwise specified, the inverters and associated control equipment shall be housed
within a cubicle forming part of the relevant motor control centre. The inverter cubicle shall be
considered as a starter and generally comply with the requirements for motor starter cubicles.
C. Unless otherwise specified, the load characteristic should be taken to be pump-type with
variable torque.
1.3
STANDARDS
A. The drive shall conform to the requirements of IEC 146.
B. The drive shall comply with EMC requirements such as EC directive 89/336/EEC.
C. The drive shall conform to the guidelines outlined in the Electricity Association, London, and
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 regarding harmonic distortion. The level of harmonic
distortion shall not exceed 5 %.
1.4
SUBMITTLAS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' data for the following items in accordance with the
conditions of the contract.
1.
Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller, assembly
outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field connection diagrams,
shall be submitted.
2.
Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include information on
type and size of structural supports, metal thicknesses, surface finishes, bus cross
sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line diagram of switch, fuse, circuit breakers,
bus arrangements, metering arrangements, etc.
3.
Supply complete schematic wiring diagrams and a full set of equipment wiring diagrams for
protective equipment relays, pilot lights, alarms, controls, etc. Provide narratives for all
wiring diagrams.
E/271

4. Include full load heat rejection in kilowatts for total components by control center.
5. All fuse/circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated.
6. Where a control centre assembly is shipped in more than one section, show field interwiring
required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly. Clearly delineate shipping
sections.
7.
Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls and the
fire alarm system.
8. Provide the appropriate test certificates.

1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each complete product shall receive a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer.
The integrated equipment short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment is capable of
withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the
Drawings. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar
equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each motor control center. Test
data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. The drive shall be warranted for a minimum of three years by the manufacturer.
1.7
MANUFACTURERS
Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. RATINGS
1. Rated input voltage is 415 volts + 10 %, 50 Hz +5 %, 3 phase, 4 wire.
2.
The incoming line power factor shall range between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over the entire
operating speed range.
3. The drive shall be capable of being stored at a temperature between -0 C and 70 C.

4. The drive shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature between 0 C and 50 C
with a relative humidity of up to 95 % (non-condensing).
5. The drive shall be capable of operating at altitudes up to 200 metres above sea level.
6.
The drive shall be capable of operating at a minimum efficiency of 95% at full load and full
speed.
7.
The rating of the drive unit must be sufficient for the continuous maximum rating of the
motor and not its running load.
E/272

B. DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
1.
The VSD shall have a fixed and alternatively variable V/f curve characteristic suitable for
the required application.
2.
The VSD shall be capable of varying the motor speed from a maximum speed at full load
and at any intermediate speed down to 10% full load speed.
3.
The drive shall be designed to be selectable for variable or constant torque. When
selected for constant torque, the drive shall supply 150% of rated current for up to one
minute. When selected for variable torque the drive shall supply 115% of rated current for
up to one minute.
4.
The VSD shall employ a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter system with insulated gate
bi-polar transistors (IGBT) to minimise audible motor noise and increase overall
performance.
5.
The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable PWM carrier frequency with a minimum
range from 2k Hz to 8k Hz to minimise audible motor noise.
6. The drive shall be optimised for 4k Hz switching frequency at 44 kW (60 HP) or less and 2
K Hz at 55 kW (75 HP) and larger.
7. The drive must be capable of switching on to a motor already rotating in either direction.
8.
The starting arrangement must include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting currents
not exceeding normal full load current.
C. CONTROL SYSTEM
1. The drive shall be arranged for either manual or automatic speed control.
2. Manual speed control shall be by means of a hand adjusted potentiometer.
3.
In the automatic mode, the drive shall have an integrated PID control system as standard
to accept the following external signals coming from sensors and transducers in pumping
applications.
(a)
4 to 20 mA
(b)
20 to 4 mA
(c)
0 to 20 mA
d)
0 to 10 V
D. CONTROLLER KEYPAD
1.
The drive controller shall incorporate a user friendly programmer keypad having LCD
Plan Language Text Display with Help feature to enable easy drive diagnostics and
setting up of various parameters without reference to an instruction manual. Complete
configuration of the drive shall be possible through the key pad.
2. All parameters shall be password protected to prevent tampering and unauthorised

changes.
E/273

E. COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
1.
The drive shall incorporate an RS 485 serial communications interface to allow full drive
control, programming, monitoring and diagnostics, including access to history record.
F. FAULT DETECTION
1.
The drive shall keep a record of the last ten trips, plus a 100 sample history record of up
to ten pre-defined parameters to enable fast diagnosis and minimum down time.
Automatic printout of history record to a serial printer shall be an available feature.
G. PROTECTION FEATURES
1. The drive shall incorporate the following protective functions:
a)
active limiting of fundamental current by frequency fold back on acceleration loads

and frequency hold on decelerating loads
b)
over current protection
c)
short circuit protection
d)
fast acting supply fuses
e)
DC intermediate bus under voltage
f)
DC intermediate bus over voltage
g)
power section over temperature
h)
earth fault protection without damage
i)
power section faults.
2. The drive shall be protected against supply-phase loss and mains discontinuity.
3. The drive shall have a selectable auto-restart after trip.
4.
The drive shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in the event of any of
the above fault conditions arising.
H. EMERGENCY STOP CONTROL

1.
The drive shall incorporate facilities to allow the connection of an Emergency Stop
Pushbutton to ensure effective direct stopping of the drive if dangerous situations arise.
The means provided should include direct connection to an air-break device e.g. a
contractor, arranged such that its opening on-load:
(a) does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller
(b) does not produce additional safety hazards
(c)
does not cause damage to the controller.
2. Such contactors shall be to BS EN 60947-1 with utilisation category AC-3.

I.
DRIVE ENCLOSURES
E/274

1.
Drive enclosures shall generally be fabricated in accordance with the requirements for
motor control centres specified in Part 2.
2. The drive enclosure shall have a protection rating of IP 31 minimum to BS EN 60947-1.

3.
Where necessary, forced cooling shall be provided incorporating a visual indication on the
front of the cubicle door in the event of a cooling system failure.
4. Ventilation grills shall be fitted with sand trap filters.

5.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and have OFF/AUTO

control on the cubicle front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the inverter is
functioning.
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Install VSD as indicated in accordance with manufacturers written instruction
3.2
DOCUMENTATION
1. The following documentation shall be provided:
2.
3.3
a)
load de-rating
b)
harmonic distortion
c)
circuit diagrams
d)
maintenance instructions
e)
fault diagnosis
f)
parts list with part numbers
g)
commissioning instructions
h)
general arrangements drawings
A recommended spares list for two years continuous operation shall be submitted at the time
of tender. Where multiple, identical units are being supplied a rationalised list, i.e. not a
summation of individual drives, requirements, should be produced.
COMMISIONNING
1.
The manufacturer of the drive system shall have a factory trained service representative
residing in the Qatar for commissioning, programming and to provide training and after sales
service.
2.
The representative shall be trained in the installation, maintenance and trouble-shooting of the
equipment specified and shall assist the Contractor to set-up and commission the variable
speed motor drives and controls.
E/275

3.4
TRAINING
1. The AC drive manufacturer shall provide an on site training program for the operating
personnel. This program shall provide operating and instruction manuals, training in
equipment operation, and troubleshooting of the AC drive. The training program shall include,
but not be limited to:
a) Instruction on the basic theory of pulse width modulation control
b) Instruction on the layout of the variable frequency controller indicating the location and
purpose of each component
c) Instruction on troubleshooting problems related to controller
d) Installation and removal of printed circuit boards
e) Actions to take under failure of controller
f)
Necessary cleaning of component parts.
E/276

ELECTRIC MOTORS
SECTION 16749
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for Engineer approval, shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturers certified
reports and technical data for motors supplied with driven equipment to the extent required in
this Section and the Specification Sections for mechanical equipment.
B. Shop Drawings. In addition to information to be included in the shop drawings as specified in
Part 1, shop drawings shall include the following:
1) motor locked rotor and full load currents
2) power factors and efficiencies at full load, three quarters load and half load
3) motor housing material, winding material, ambient temperatures and maximum elevations
in which motor is designed to operate continuously, service factor, insulation Class,
temperature rise, type of enclosure, voltage, bearing life and dynamic balance; all of which
shall comply to the requirements of the specifications
4) nameplate data
5) dimensions, weights and mounting details of motors
6) motor construction details
7) speed torque/current at 100 % volts
8) wiring diagrams, internal and typical external connections.
C. Current Data. Submit eight copies to the Engineer of field recorded current data. The data shall
indicate the full load current for each motor, and current rating for the overload relay in each
motor starter and controller.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 2048
Dimensions for fractional horse-power motors
BS 4999
Winding terminations
BS 5000
Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications
1.4 MANUFACTURERS
E/277

Part 2 PRODUCTS
A. MOTOR ENCLOSURES
1) All motor enclosures shall satisfy and be selected from:
a) IP 54 for general purpose drives
b) IP 55 for outdoor use or machines subject to splashing or washing
down c) IP 68 for submersible machines.
2) Motor enclosures shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard in which they are
to be installed.
3) Outdoor motors shall be protected from direct sunlight.
B. INDUCTION MOTORS
1. General:
(a) Motors shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the driven equipment as specified in
this section, and specifically outlined in the driven equipment specifications
(b)
All motors shall be suitable for operation on a 415V, 50 Hz 3 phase supply.

Motors rated for 380 V or 400 V with (+), (-) tolerances shall not be acceptable in any
case
(c)
All motors shall be capable of starting 10 times per hour. The stalled motor
current shall not exceed 6 times full load current
(d) The motors shall be commercially silent in operation and run free from vibration
and the rotors shall be perfectly balanced both statically and dynamically and
shall be tested and adjusted for dynamic balance in an approved manner
(e) The motors shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of a size to maintain the
temperature of the windings 5 C above ambient. Each heater shall be provided with a
switch and automatic control to disconnect it when its motor is in operation
(f) Terminal boxes shall be provided with glands suitable for XLPE or PVC armoured
2. Motor
Ratings:
(a) The efficiency and power factor of the motors shall be high over a wide range
of load conditions. The motors shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with BS 4999 and BS 5000 (or BS 2048 and BS 5000 in the case
of small horsepower motors) for continuously rated industrial electric motors
and Class F insulation but limited to Class B temperature rise. This shall be
in addition to any adjustments necessary for high ambient temperatures at
site. The maximum continuous rating (MCR) of each motor shall be as set out
in Table 15.1 and shall be rated and designed to suit the climatic
conditions at site. This reserve power requirement shall be added to the
calculated power prior to any other adjustments e.g. high ambient
temperatures at site.
E/278
Table 15.1
MCR Ratings
Application
Up to 75 kW drive
Above 75 kW drive
All pump motors
10% above that required
5% above that required
(excluding positive
under all conditions of
under all conditions of
displacement type)
operation
operation
Positive displacement
25% above maximum
12.5% above maximum
pumps and compressors
duty requirements
duty requirements
(b) Motor starters shall be selected from the following to satisfy the stipulated
performance requirements and comply with QGEWC starting current restrictions:(i)
motors up to 11 kW (15 hp) shall be squirrel cage suitable for DOL starting
having a starting current not greater than 6 x full load current (FLC)
(ii)
motors between 11 kW (15 hp) and 37.5 kW shall have their starting
current restricted to 4 x FLC and shall use one of the following starting
methods; as indicated in the Project Drawings or the Project
Documentation:
Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics
suitable for the application
Korndorffer Auto Transformer
Rotor Resistance
Star - Delta
(iii) motor over 37.5 kW shall have their starting current restricted to 2.5 FLC and
shall use one of the following starting methods:
Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics

suitable for the application
Korndorffer Auto Transformer
Rotor Resistance
(iv) submersible pump motors because of inherent design are to generally

comply with the foregoing. The starting method is to be restricted to DOL/
Star-delta starting or soft start according to rating.
(c) Motors shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard in which they are to
be installed
(d) Where flywheels are fitted to the main pump set, the motors shall be capable of
starting and driving the pumps under these conditions.
Part 3
E/279

EXECUTION A.
GENERAL
1. Provide all the equipment installations and wiring installations, including connections as
indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in
the spaces as shown on the Drawings.
2. Motor:
(a) provide power, control, alarm and earthing installations for all motors
(b) check the connections to provide correct rotation for all motors
(c)
record the full load current to each motor, and the overload relay rating in each
motor starter for the certified data submittal
(d)
provide the wiring for heaters in the motor frames and the required controls to
de- energise the heater when the motor operates (if applicable)
(e) provide the required wiring for all equipment that shall be furnished and
installed according to other relevant Sections of the Specifications
(f)
install the control stations and/or emergency stop units on steel stanchions or
building structures near motors, if specified and as shown on the Drawings. Control
stations, where required in accordance with the particular specification, shall
incorporate a Local/Remote switch, On/Off switch and the emergency stop unit
(g) field damaged factory finish on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal
in quality and colour to the original factory finish.
B.
FACTORY TESTS
1. Factory tests shall be carried out as
follows: (a) All motors: - No load current
- High voltage on windings and auxiliary.
- Windings resistance
- Vibration
(b) One motor: - Full load heat run and temperature rise
- Efficiency at 100 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % load
- Power factor at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% load
- Noise
- Momentary overload
(c) Type test certificate shall be provided to cover the following:
- Locked rotor current
- Locked rotor torque
- Saturation curves
- Percent slip
2. The Contractor shall provide calculations to demonstrate motor power rating and bearing life
E/280

with derating factors taken into account.
C.
FIELD CHECKS
1. Motor Installations shall be complete and correct.
2. Operation tests shall be performed to observe that motors start, run and stop satisfactorily
under design load.
E/281

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
SECTION 16860
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the intelligent building control system KNX to control and monitor
lighting of public areas, landscape and building facades of the project. The system shall
be distributed thorough system type network comprising microprocessor based lighting
control devices. Intelligent system components, operating by distributed control, are
coupled to this communications network.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

Division 16 Section Conductors and Cables.
Division 16 Section Raceways and Boxes.
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices".
Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
DEFINITIONS
A. CSMA-CA: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance, a multiple access
method in local area networks that prevents any collisions during simultaneous transmissions.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for
lighting controls.
B.
Selection criteria for ratings of power supply units and uninterruptible power supply
units.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for

specific application on Project. Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and access requirements.
1. Riser Diagram: detailed single-line diagram of the system configuration.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Operational Documentation: For software and firmware.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting control equipment and system components to include in
maintenance manuals. Include software-operating manuals.
E/282

1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the programmable lighting system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance
of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing programmable lighting controls similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain KNX system components from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide total responsibility for compatibility of system components, including those
provided in this Section and in Division 16 Sections Wiring Devices and "Lighting
Control Devices".
D. Codes and Standards:
1.6
1.
All devices in the system shall comply with:

a. KNX norms and guidelines.
2.
In addition, devices shall comply with one of the international standards listed below regarding EMC guidelines and the low voltage guidelines where not in contradiction with Local Power Authorities requirements:
a. CE Standards
b. British Standards BS
c. Underwriters Laboratories UL
d. National Fire Protection Association NFPA
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of equipment and system components to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components and interconnections for optimum
performance of specified functions.
B.
Coordinate lighting controls specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections, including the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices.
2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
3. Division 16 Section "Panelboards".
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective device specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion,
2.
1.8
Warranty shall cover defects in materials and workmanship, labor to troubleshoot,

repair, reprogram, or replace system components and manufacturers software
updates introduced during the warranty period.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
E/283

1. Relays: 5 % of each installed type but not less than 2 of each.
2. Switches: 5 % of each installed type but not less than 2 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A. Expansion Capability of System: Adequate to increase the number of control functions
in the future by 25 percent more than those indicated. This applies to equipment ratings, housing volumes, spare relays, terminals, and control cable conductor quantities.
B. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.
C. The lighting control system (LCS) shall control all lighting devices and lighting switch
plate with Infrared remote control bus system comprise a two-wire bus line and the
connected bus-compatible installation devices, such as sensors, actuators and system
components.
D. The system major have two parts component which are sensors and actuators. The
sensors are lighting switch plate with scene function. The actuators are lighting actuator, curtain shutter control and control media.
E. The two-wire bus line carries technology carrier power for the electronics of the bus devices and also the data. The bus line is connected to every bus device. Sensors normally only use the bus line, while actuators use the 230V mains supply to control
F. The lighting control system and product shall apply standard open protocol with compliance to ISO/IEC 7498, EN50090 and CENELEC/C 205 or equivalent acceptable international open standard. The corresponding programming and application tools software
must be open standard type and not only for particular manufacturer or product. The
programming tools shall not be any manufacturer or proprietary products. It can be
available through standard organization
G. The lighting control system shall be a distributed intelligence system type network comprising microprocessor-based lighting control devices connected via a topology-free
network that employs specified cable to supply power and facilitate communications between network devices
H. The lighting control system should have the ability to support up to 64 units per single
network, and all the units are connected through specified twisted pair cable, selfpowered operations under extra-low voltage of 24Vdc
2.3
FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The lighting control system protocol shall utilize communication algorithms based on
Synchronous Carrier Sense, Multiple Access with Collision Detection, implemented with
Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CD-CA) standards (IEEE Standard 802).
B. The lighting system for the small rooms and as specified on the Drawings, which being
controlled locally by motion sensors, shall turn-off that area lighting when the area is
unoccupied.
E/284

C. The conference rooms and meeting rooms shall be provided with touch screen control
unit. Fully customizable graphics including bar graphs, sliders, percentage indicators,
images, gauges and clocks with any border and background style shall be included for
user-friendly controlling on lighting level and/or other controlling functions as specified.
D. The perimeter lighting in window area, as specified in the Drawing, provided with light
level sensors shall provide top-up control to maintain minimum 500 lux on working plan
by dimming the lights if the daylight can supplement the artificial lighting. The mounting
location of light level sensor shall be selected that the operation of the light level sensor
shall not be affected by the internal or external lighting systems. The sensors shall be
designed to measure ambient light levels in the range of 10 to 1000 lux.
E.
Areas shall be divided into smaller zones, and installed with motion sensors for the
ON/OFF area lighting control. Time delay of 5 min. to 30 min. shall be allowed for the
automatic turn-off of lighting system by the signal from motion detectors infrared receivers. Central lighting control system software shall adjust the time delay of the sensors
up to 18 hours.
F.
Scheduling function shall be set according to end-users need and/or relevant requirements. Lighting control system module supports scheduling, logic engine, and code
programming shall be included in the system.
G. The lighting control system shall be provision for BMS to remote monitoring, ON/OFF
control and dimming.
H. The lighting control system (LCS) shall be a specialist design system comprises occupancy sensors, input buttons, light level sensors, motion sensors, touch screens, relay
actuators, dimmer actuators, and system accessories.
I.
LCS includes lighting control, maximum-demand monitoring, temperature control,

emergency and standby power, ventilation control, control of blinds/shutters, timedependent control/remote control, display/logging as well as monitoring and reporting.
Weather data can be recorded and integrated in the building automation. With various
gateways, it is possible to establish a connection to the Internet, telephone network or
subsystems such as DALI or 110 V controllers.
J.
All the sensors (push buttons, dimmers, shutter switches, brightness and temperature
sensors, movement detectors etc.) are linked to the actuators (relays, lighting control
devices, shutter motors etc.) via a KNX control cable either YCYM (2x2x0.8mm) or J-Y
(St) Y (2x2x0.8mm).
K.
The programming of the system is carried out with the Engineering Tools Software
(ETS) parameterization software via an RS232 or USB interface. They can be used in
any location within the bus system. A programming of the KNX devices by the Ethernet
is possible via IP gateway.
L. Each bus device receives a physical address. The device is queried or programmed via
this address. The bus management is a multi-master operation i.e. each bus device has
the same rights. A control unit is not required. Collision detection and resolution is possible via the central access procedure CSMA-CA without loss of telegrams.
M. Work on the KNX installation bus should only be carried out by specialist electricians
with the appropriate training. The specialist contractor should have KNX training certificate and a current ETS license.
N. All items shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures up to 40oC and relative
humidity range between 10 95% with no degradation in performance.
E/285

O. All mains voltage equipment shall be suitable for operation normally on phase voltages,
400Vac 3-phase and 230Vac 1-phase. All extra low voltage equipment will operate on a
maximum of 34V dc.
P. The Contractor shall be responsible for provided conduits/ trunking, wiring and all necessary accessories as described in this Specification and shown on the Drawings.
Q. As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the works.
a. Detailed schedule of equipment and components and manufacturers data.

b. Detailed design drawings.
c.
Builders Works requirements.
.
R. The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission the lighting control
system comprising ON/OFF switching units, dimming units, motion detectors, light level
sensors, key input units, and all necessary accessories in accordance with the specific
requirements stipulated in this Specification, Annex A, Electrical general Specification
and the Drawings.
S. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and install of the intelligent
lighting control system and selection of equipment and components including the
matching with other components to ensure that the system conforms to the specified
T.
The Contractor shall provide power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and the
schedule of connection of lighting control system to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Both power and control wirings shall be provided from all lighting control output modules to their respective luminaries
U. The intelligent lighting control system shall capable to interface to a Building Management System (BMS), and the Contractor shall supply the interface driver. The interface
driver shall use a common protocol to interface with OPC or BACnet.
V. The lighting control system network bus should support free wiring topology. Star, daisy
chain or any combination shall be possible.
W. Dimming control of fluorescent lighting shall be via the use of dimmable electronic ballasts. The lighting control system shall accept and compatible with 1-10V analogy control and Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI) ballasts.
X.
The luminaries shall be connected to and supplied from lighting control output unit
modules installed as indicated on the Drawings. All outputs and inputs shall be individually addressed and identified within the system. The output units can support either
ON/OFF or dimming control. The ON/OFF relay modules shall each be capable of controlling up to 24 independent loads. The dimmer modules shall each be capable of controlling up to 2/4 independent loads on the same mains phase. All output modules shall
be DIN rail mountable and fit into standard DIN switchboard enclosures. Each relay/dimmers channel shall have an associated manual over-ride switch and operation
indicator light.
Y.
The perimeter lighting in office area, meeting room and as specified in the Drawings
provided with light level sensors shall be turn-off automatically once the external lighting
level reach a preset value. The mounting location of light level sensor shall be selected
E/286

that the operation of the light level sensor shall not be affected by the internal or external lighting systems.
Z.Manual ON/OFF controlling of motion detectors shall be provided for the Open/Public area lighting. The maximum spacing between the motion detectors shall be no more than
5 meters. Upon field detection by body motion, the lighting shall be turned-on automatically for duration of 15 to 30 minutes software adjustable delay-off timer from the central lighting control system.
AA. The motion sensor shall be flush mounted into a ceiling and have a 360-degree field of
view. Coverage shall be a minimum of 7 metres diameter circular at the working plane
with a minimum ceiling height of 3.0 metres. The motion sensors shall be with software
programmable time delay function and adjustable sensitivity on the unit.
BB. The wall mounted button plate shall support 1-gang, 2-gang or 4-gang with LED, which
is used to indicate the operation status of each gang. The wall mounted button plate
shall have the ability to be controlled remotely via infrared hand held remote control
units.
CC. Halt circuits of each basement parking lights to be controlled through a pre-determined
time, other half by presence detectors, or full part of the lighting to be controlled by either time setting or presence detectors.
2.4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. ACTUATOR
1.
Switching Actuator
a.
The relay unit shall allow control of 1/2/4/8/12/16/24 independent loads,
equipped with a voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel.
b.
No de-rating shall be required for inductive lighting loads
1)
1, 2, 4, 8, 12-fold shall support up to 16A per channel
2)
16, 24-fold shall support up to 10A per channel
c.
The unit shall be independent switching of each channel via either make or
break contacts
d.
Readiness for operation is indicated by a green LED after the application has
been loaded
e.
Each unit shall have the facility for connecting both ON and OFF Remote
Manual Override push-button switches. It shall be possible to connect these
overrides in parallel to multiple units to allow manual override of multiple units
from one push-button location
f.
Local ON/OFF toggle buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually
overridden at each unit
g.
Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be software selectable
h.
The individual relays shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
2.
Switching Actuator with Current Detection

a.
The relay unit shall allow control of 2/4/8/12 independent loads, equipped with
a voltage free, magnetically latched relay per channel
b.
The unit shall support up to 16A per channel. No de-rating shall be required for
inductive lighting loads
c.
The actuator also has integrated current detection which measures the load
current of each channel
1)
A possible failure is registered, as is a break in the electric circuit
2)
The operating status is shown and controlled by threshold values
3)
Pending maintenance work can be planned looking ahead
3.
Universal Dimmer Actuator

a.
The dimmer unit shall be capable of controlling 1/2/4 independent loads
E/287

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
The unit shall provide up to 1000W per channel from a single-phase mains
voltage, frequency 50 Hz
The minimum loading shall be greater than 25W
As well as controlling 220V loads (e.g. incandescent lighting), the dimmer unit
shall be capable of controlling dimmable electronic ballasts
The dimmer unit shall have the facility to program a minimum level setting and
power-up delay time via the lighting control software
Local ON/OFF toggle buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually
overridden at each unit
been loaded
Electrical isolation between the Extra Low (Bus) Voltage and the Low (mains)
voltage side of the unit shall be provided with the use of optical isolators
Electricity input for each channel could be fed from different phases
(MTN649325 only)
The individual dimmers shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
4.
Blind Actuator
a.
The unit shall allow control up to 12 blind / roller shutter drives with limit switch
independently of one another
b.
The unit shall support up to 10A per channel
c.
been loaded
d.
Local manual buttons shall allow individual channels to be manually overridden
at each unit
e.
Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be software selectable
f.
The individual relays shall be DIN rail mounted within the unit enclosure
5.
Analogue Output Unit

a.
The analogue actuator shall convert KNX telegrams into analogue output signals
b.
These analogue output signals enable heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system actuators to adapt their output variables based on bus information and
to participate in control processes
c.
The outputs are parameterized to voltage or current signals using software
1)
Voltage outputs: 0 to 1 V DC, 0 to 10 V DC
2)
Current outputs: 0 to 20 mA DC, 4 to 20 mA DC
B.
1.
SYSTEM DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

Power supply/ Power supply with emergency input
a.
The Power Supply shall provide safe extra low voltage (SELV) of DC 30V for
one line with up to 64 devices
b.
With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus, as well as
switches to interrupt the power supply and reset the bus users connected to
the line
c.
It is short-circuit resistant, and features a voltage and current limiter. Excessively high output currents are indicated by a red display (over current)
d.
The input power supply shall be rated at 20V AC frequency 50 Hz
2.
USB Interface
a.
The USB interface, either flush-mounted or DIN rail type shall allow linking to a
PC for addressing, programming and diagnosis of KNX components with
USB1.1 or USB2 interfaces
3.
Logic Module
a.
The logic module is used for logic and controlling functions in KNX system
b.
Device module shall be contained logic features as follow
1)
10 logic modules (AND, OR, XOR)
2)
10 filter and time modules
E/288

3)
4)
5)
6)
8 converter modules
12 multiplexer modules for lighting control
3 freely programmable push buttons
3 status LED initiators
4.
KNX IP Router
a.
The KNX/IP router enables telegrams to be forwarded between different lines
via a LAN (IP) as a rapid backbone
b.
The device can additionally serve as a programming interface in order to connect a PC with the KNX bus. The IP address can be assigned via a DHCP
server or via manual configuration (ETS)
c.
The Internet protocols ARP, ICMP, IGMP, UDP/IP and DHCP are supported.
The device operates in accordance with the KNXnet/IP specification using
core, device management, tunneling and routing
d.
The green operating LED indicates that the interface is ready for operation
5.
DALI Gateway
a.
The KNX DALI gateway shall connect the cross-function KNX bus with the
DALI bus designed exclusively for lighting control. Luminaries with DALI electronic ballasts can therefore be integrated into a KNX complete system in the
form of a subsystem and operated by a wide range of available KNX devices
b.
The gateway shall serve as the DALI master and power supply for the connected electronic ballasts. Up to a maximum of 64 electronic ballasts according
to IEC 60926 in a total of 16 groups can be switched, dimmed or set to a defined value
c.
Brightness values or error messages in the DALI devices can be sent to the
KNX and visualized on display units
d.
The DALI is commissioned and configured with the integrated display and operator buttons
e.
DALI commissioning and configuration shall be performed as follows:
1)
via the device
2)
via a software tool (free of charge)
3)
via the integrated web server
4)
via a portable web panel or a PDA
5)
via two binary inputs, e.g. for connecting push-buttons to the device
(building site operation)
C. SENSORS
1.
Push Button, 1/2/4 gang
a.
Application module for KNX system design
b.
Push buttons shall be available with 2/4/8 operating buttons, operating and status display and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an
orientation light
c.
Push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single push
buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve various
control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer control
and blind control
d.
Push buttons is free for plugging on coupling unit
2.
Push Button Plus, 4 gang with IR receiver

a.
b.
Push buttons shall be available with 8 operating buttons, operating and status
display and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light
c.
The functions of each keys can be triggered using an IR remote control
d.
The push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single
push buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve
various control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer
control and blind control
E/289

e.
Push buttons is free for plugging on coupling unit
3.
Multi-Function Push Button with room temperature control, 2/4 gang

a.
b.
All functions of respective buttons can be controlled via distance remote controls
c.
Push buttons shall be available with 4/8 operating buttons, operating and status display and labeling field. The operating display can also be used as an
orientation light
d.
The room temperature control unit shall be used for heating and cooling with
infinitely adjustable KNX valve drives or to trigger switch actuators and heating
actuators. With the display for showing date, time, temperature and operating
mode
e.
The push buttons are freely parameterizable as push button pairs or as single
push buttons. Each button shall be capable of being programmed to achieve
various control functions including, setting a scene, toggling, switching, dimmer
control, blind control, fan control
4.
Motion Sensor (KNX ARGUS)

a.
Provide flush mounted PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b.
The motion sensor shall be a flush-mounted KNX presence detector for indoor
installation
c.
The unit shall detect moving heat sources, e.g. people, within a radius of 180
and to a distance of approx. 8 m to the right and left and approx.12 m to the
front
d.
The unit shall be designed for installation at a height of 2.2 m
e.
The unit shall incorporate dual PIR element detectors to minimize false triggering
Motion Sensor (ARGUS 220)
a.
Provide surface mounted PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b.
The motion sensor shall be a surface-mounted KNX movement detector which
can be used indoors and outdoors due to its IP55 protection rating
c.
The unit shall have a 220 detection pattern, a radius of 7m at a 2.5m mounted
above floor-level
d.
The unit shall have 360 short-rang zone with a radius of 4m
e.
The area of detection could be adapted to the local conditions due to the horizontally, vertically and axially adjustable sensor head. Unwanted zones or
sources of interference (e.g. trees) from the area of detection could be blocked
using the masking segments provided
5.
6.
Motion Sensor (KNX ARGUS Presence)

a.
Provide ceiling mount PIR occupancy sensor as shown on the drawings
b.
The motion sensor shall be KNX presence detector for interior ceiling mounting
c.
The unit shall have a 360 detection pattern, a radius of 7m at 2.5 meters
mounted above floor-level
d.
Sensor should have lux adjustable from 10 to 2000
7.
IP Touch Panel
a.
The LCD screen shall be 10 inches in size (diagonal) and include a 800 x 600
pixel SVGA. The touch overlay shall be a resistive membrane type
b.
The Touch Panel interface shall be configurable to suit user requirements via
the Windows compatible configuration software. Required software shall
download from manufacturer website
c.
The Touch Panel shall provide a wall mounted, colour interface to the automation system. The Touch Screen shall include a touch sensitive LCD screen
that can display pages of graphical items, such as buttons, sliders and images.
These graphical items shall be programmed to perform control and monitoring
related functions
d.
The Touch Panel shall be capable of controlling and monitoring via LAN
(10/100 M bit/s), RS-232 and USB connection
E/290

e.
The touch panel shall be provided at the conference rooms, meeting rooms
and VIP rooms of 19th Floor and as shown in the drawings.
8.
KNX Touch Screen 7

a.
The touch screen shall be a 7 inches TFT screen in size (diagonal) and include
800 x 480 pixels
b.
Touch screen functionality shall be contained:
1)
Week time switch
2)
Website accessible
3)
Scenes control
4)
Slide show with personal photos via USB
5)
Updates via plug-ins and USB
6)
Horizontal or vertical installation
7)
Minimum 8 frame colours and materials
8)
Minimum 5 colour themes for user
9)
Password protection
9.
Brightness and Temperature sensor

a.
The sensor shall be compatible for brightness and temperature measurement,
measured values are sent to the bus
b.
Measurement range for brightness shall be adjustable from 1 to 100,000 lux
with +/- 20% or +/- 5 lux tolerance
c.
Measurement range for temperature shall be adjustable from -25C to +55C
with +/- 5% or +/- 1C tolerance
10.
Weather Station with sensors

a.
The weather sensor shall be incorporated with a wind sensor, precipitation
sensor, twilight sensor and brightness sensors
b.
The measurement values for wind, temperature are transmitted directly to the
bus and are processed in the device
c.
The sensors shall be IP65, suitable for external installation on a wall or on a
mast
d.
Measurement range for wind speed shall be adjustable from 1 to 40 m/s with
+/- 0.5m/s tolerance
e.
Measurement range for brightness shall be adjustable from 1 to 110,000 lux
f.
Measurement range for temperature shall be adjustable from -40C to +60C
11.
Analogue Input
a.
The unit shall be processed measuring data from analogue sensors
b.
Minimum four freely programmable analogy transducers can be connected to
the input
c.
The unit shall evaluate both voltage signals and current signals as
1)
Current signals:
0 to 20mA DC, 4 to 20mA DC
2)
Voltage signals:
0 to 1V DC, 0 to 10V DC
3)
The unit shall be monitored for wire breakage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Mount control equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C.
Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of
unit for wall-mounting items.
E/291

3.2
3.3
3.4
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A.
Install wiring between control devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors

and Cables" for low-voltage connections.
B.
Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section

"Raceways and Boxes."
C.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D.
Ground equipment in accordance with Division 16 Grounding and Bonding.
E.
Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Label each system control module with a unique designation. Make designations on
elevated components readable from floor.

A.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

test, adjust, and program lighting control system.
B.
Check, calibrate and test all system components to insure that the system performs in
accordance with the Specifications and the required sequence of operation. Demonstrate:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
group and pattern switching,

timer and delay functions,
scheduling function,
manual override commands,
And system man/machine interface functionality.
C.
Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven
days' advance notice.
D.
Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.
2. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
a. Where light balancing or other control involving equipment provided under
other Sections is indicated, combine testing required by this Section with that
required by Sections specifying other equipment. Test programmable control
related to light balancing, occupancy sensing, and other controls under conditions that simulate actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.
E.
Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
E/292

F.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel as specified below:
1.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting,

and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of eight hours'
training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through the Engineer, with at least seven days'
advance notice.
3.7
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide

up to 4 Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program
changes, and adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.
E/293

LIST OF APPROVED AND RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
SECTION 16999
The following list of manufacturers is given for guidance to show the minimum quality expected in each
equipment/product. This list does not exclude other equivalent or better manufacturers from obtaining
approval and this approval shall be at the sole discretion of the Client. Refer to the List of Kahramaaa
Approved Manufacturers for additional list.
1. Grounding &Earthing System
a. Furse England
b. BICC England
c. A. Wallis - England
2. Conductors/Cables (LV)
a. Al SweidiCables - Egypt
b. Doha Cables Qatar
c.
Riyadh Cables Saudi Arabia
d. Ducab UAE
e. Oman Cables - Oman
3. MV Cables
a. Saudi Cables Saudi Arabia
b. Jeddah Cable Company Saudi Arabia
c.
Riyadh Cables Saudi Arabia
d. Doha Cables - Qatar

e. Al SweidiCables - Egypt
4. Conduits, Wireways& Boxes
a. Decoduct UAE
b. Schneider - France
c. Simplex UK
d. Comat UAE
5. Cable Trays
a. LanRic Singapore
b. Wibe Sweden
c.
Cooper USA , Saudi Arabia
6. Wiring Devices
a. ABB Germnay
b. Legrand France
c.
Vimar - Italy
d. MK UK
E/294

e. Schneider - France
7. Generators& Major Components
a. Caterpillar USA
b. Cummins USA/UK
c.
Kohler USA
d. Perkins UK
e. Mitsubishi Japan
f.
Leroy / Somer - France
8. Static UPS
a. Schneider - France
b. GE- Switzerland
c.
9.
Chloride - UK
Emergency Central Battery System

a.
Emergi-Lite, Inc. Canada/UK
b. Teknoware - Finland
10. Transformer
a. ABB Spain
b. Siemens Germany
c. Tesar Italy
d. Emirates Transformer UAE
e. Schneider - France
11. Automatic Power Factor Capacitor Corrections
a. ABB - Germany
b.
Schneider France
c.
SiemensGermany
d. Legrand - France
12. Automatic Transfer Switch
a. Schneider France
b. Socomec - France
c.
ABBGermany
d. ASCO - USA
13. Switchboards& Major Components
a. ABB Germany
b. Legrand France
c. Schneider France
d. Merlin Gerin
e. Cutler Hammer - USA
f.
SQUARE - D - UK
E/295

14. Panel Boards (SMDB, DB, MCC)& Major Components
(Locally assembled by reputable panel board fabricators)
a. ABB Germany
b. Cuttler-Hammer USA
c.
Legrand - France
d. Schneider France
e. Siemens Germany
f.
AEG Germany
g. Hager - Germany
15. Bus Ducts ( Busways)
a. Translite Malaysia
b. Zucchini - Italy
c.
Powerduct - Malaysia
d. AEA - Turkey
16. Interior & Exterior Lightings
a. Trilux Germany
b. Philips - USA
c. LEDSC4 Spain
d. Martinelli Luce Italy
e. Lux Contempora - Italy
f.
Artemide Architectural Italy
g. Targetti Italy
h. Disano Italy
i.
Erco UK
j.
Thorn UK
k.
Kreon Belgium
l.
LSI - USA
m. Cooper Lightings - USA

n. Apollo - UK
17. Fire Alarm & Detection System
a. Edwards Canada
b. Simplex USA
c.
Esser UK
d. Notifier - Honeywell
e. Teknoware - Finland
18. Lightning Protection System
a. Furse UK
b. Wallis UK
c. Erico - Australia
E/296

19. Structured Cabling & Blown Fiber
a. Siemon Company USA
b. Panduit USA
c.
Krone Germany
d.
Brand Rex - UK
e.
Legrand France
f.
Emtelle UK
g. Alcatel Lucent - France

h. Panduit
20. IP CCTV System
a. General Electric Interlogix of USA
b. Pelco of Schneider UK
c.
Lenel USA
d. UTC UK
e. Panasonic
21. Motor Control Center
a. Siemens - Germany
b. ABB Germany
c.
Schneider France
d.
Moeller Germany
e. Legrand - France
22. Motor Starters
a. ABB Germany
b. Telemechanique France
c.
Siemens Germany
d. Legrand - France
23. Variable Speed Controllers

a. Danfoss - USA
b. ABB Germany
c.
Vacon Finland
d. Telemechanique - France
e. Siemens
24. Electric Motors
a. ABB Germany
b. Siemens Germany
c.
Brooks Crompton UK
d. AEG Germany
e. Leroy / Somer - France
E/297

25. Gate Barrier
a. Wego System - Germany
b. Came Italy, USA
c. Elcosta Security System - Spain
d. Heintzmann Germany
26. Electric Metering (Kahramaa approved brands)
a. ABB
b. Schneider - France
c. All Kahramaa approved brands
27. Lighting Control System
a. ABB Germany
b. Legrand France
c.
Schneider UK
d. Delmatic- UK
e. MK/Honeywell UK
f.
Trilux - Germany
29. Public Address

a. Bosch Germany
b. Philips - USA
c. TOA Japan
30. Surge Suppression
a. DEHN Surge Suppression Germany
b. Schneider - UK
c. ABB Germany
31. Controls & Instrumentation Cables

a. Schneider - UK
b. Belden - USA
c. Krone Germany
32. IP Voice & Data System
a. Hewlett Packard - USA
b. Cisco - USA
c. Microsoft Server USA
d. Alcatel Lucent France
e. Emtelle - UK
E/298

21.3 - C - Part 3 - Electrical Specs

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

21.3 - C - Part 3 - Electrical Specs

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

Labeling and identification.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

HIGH AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

High voltage works shall be as per KM-ENA's Compound agreement.

An integrated ceiling mounted lighting system is considered throughout the

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION

FIRE DETECTION, ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SERVICE

Fully automatic addressable fire alarm system is provided throughout including

BUILDING MANGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) AND CONTROLS

An IP based Closed Circuit Television Security System (CCTV) comprising fully

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTION

Complete System serving the Client.

ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FOR VARIOUS MECHANICAL/OTHER EQUIPMENTS

2. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.

2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described

No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the required

DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

INSTRUCTION MANUALS, SUPPLY OF SPARE PARTS AND LISTS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP

SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

K. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

Cut remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, component

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

All Electromechanical systems and equipments should be inspected, witnessed,

CLEANING AND ADJUSTING -GENERAL

INSERTS AND SLEEVES

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

3. Sleeves in Foundation Walls: HDPE or Standard weight galvanized steel

4. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings: UPVC or LDPE.

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES

MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

Details of training: Comprising Training manuals from original manufacturer to be

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

This Section includes the following:

Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation,

REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in

Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be

BS: The British Standards Institute

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

Power Supply: Liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm: